Fiat - 500e - Owners Manual - 2012 - 2012

Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing the Fiat New 500. We have written this handbook to help you get familiar with all the features of your car. Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding use of your car and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Fiat New 500. You are advised to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls; at the same time, you can understand the car behaviour on different road surfaces. This document contains specifications, special procedures and essential information for caring for and maintaining your Fiat New 500 over time, driving it safely and running it correctly. After reading it, you are advised to keep the handbook inside the car, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains on board the car should it be sold. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that Fiat offers to its customers, the Warranty Certificate and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new car and the service provided by the people at Fiat. Enjoy reading. Happy driving! ATTENTION All the versions of the Fiat New 500 are described in this Owner Handbook. Options, equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not explicitly indicated in the text: as a consequence, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, motor and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified with the wording (where provided). All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA Italy S.p.A. can modify the specifications of the car model described in this publication at any time, for technical or marketing purposes. For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership. ESSENTIAL INFORMATION! STARTING THE ENGINE With the transmission in position P (Park), when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, an acoustic warning is emitted and the message "READY" appears on the instrument panel display to indicate that the electric traction system of the the New 500 has started. The New 500 is now ready to go. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the 12V battery), contact a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car's electric system can support the required load. SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring that it maintains its performance and its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come. USE OF THE OWNER HANDBOOK OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate. The figures in the Owner Handbook are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your car. In addition, the Handbook has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position or construction of some controls is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure. To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner Handbook. The sections can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is a key for getting to know the section order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There is in any case a textual indication of the current section at the side of each even page. WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS While reading this Owner Handbook you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your car. There are also PRECAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the car, which could cause accidents or injuries. Therefore, all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: personal safety; car safety; environmental protection. NOTE These symbols, when necessary, are indicated besides the title or at the end of the line and are followed by a number. That number recalls the corresponding warning at the end of the relevant chapter. SYMBOLS Some car components have coloured labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. CHANGES/ALTERATIONS TO THE CAR WARNING Any change or alteration of the car might seriously affect its safety and road grip, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured. WARNING The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the car in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER If after buying the car, you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case burden the electrical supply, contact a Fiat Dealership, whose personnel will check whether the car's electrical system is able to withstand the load required, or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful 12V battery. WARNING Take care when fitting additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp, repeated braking or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedal stroke (mats, etc.). INSTALLING ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC DEVICES Electrical and electronic devices installed after buying the car in the context of after-sales service must carry the following label . FCA Italy S.p.A. authorises the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialised centre, in a workmanlike fashion and in compliance with manufacturer's specifications. WARNING Traffic police may not allow the car on the road if devices have been installed which modify the features of the car. This may also cause invalidation of warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. FCA Italy S.p.A. shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by Fiat and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. RADIO TRANSMITTERS AND MOBILE PHONES Radio transmitter equipment (car mobile phones, CB radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the car unless a separate aerial is mounted on the roof. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the car body. As far as the use of ECapproved mobile phones is concerned (GSM, GPRS, UMTS, LTE), follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer. WARNING The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external aerial) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the car in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. GRAPHICAL INDEX KNOWING YOUR CAR KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING IN AN EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE AND CARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MULTIMEDIA CONTENTS GRAPHICAL INDEX FRONT VIEW 3 6 5 1 4 2 1 F0S1216 1 HEADLIGHTS Exterior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 210 Bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 2 WHEELS Rims and wheels . . . . . . . . . Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 262 3 DOOR MIRRORS Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 6 WINDSCREEN WIPERS Replacing blades . . . . . . . . . 244 4 DOORS Central opening/closing . . . . . . 27 5 BONNET Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . 67 9 GRAPHICAL INDEX REAR-VIEW 3 2 1 2 F0S1217 1 REAR LIGHTS Exterior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . 217 Bulb types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 2 BOOT Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . 66 3 REAR WINDOW WIPER Blade replacement . . . . . . . . 10 244 DASHBOARD 4 5 5 2 6 3 8 1 9 5 10 7 11 3 F0S1093 1 LEFT STALK External lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 2 INSTRUMENT PANEL Instrument panel features . . . . . 75 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 3 RIGHT STALK Window washing . . . . . . . . . . 42 4 Uconnect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 AIR VENTS 283 Climatic comfort . . . . . . . . . . . 46 6 CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM Manual/automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 7 TRANSMISSION One-speed transmission . . . . 8 CONTROLS ON WHEEL Co-Driver System Cruise Control . . Speed Limiter . . . 137 THE STEERING ......... ......... ......... 145 143 142 9 STEERING WHEEL Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 bk CONTROLS ON THE STEERING WHEEL Phone controls . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Display controls . . . . . . . . . . . 76 bl Left-side controls Park Assist activation/deactivation . . . . . . 165 ESC system activation/deactivation . . . . . . 100 Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 11 GRAPHICAL INDEX 12 Headlight alignment adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 INTERIOR 5 1 4 2 3 2 2 4 1 IGNITION DEVICE Starting the car . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 2 INTERIOR FITTINGS Storage compartments . . . . . . 68 Cup/bottle holders . . . . . . . . . 68 Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Smartphone compartment / Wireless charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 USB ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Uconnect™ system controls . . 68 Drive mode selector . . . . . . . . 15 F0S1094 4 POWER WINDOWS AND DOOR MIRRORS Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adjusting the mirrors . . . . . . . . 36 5 DOORS Door opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 3 SEATS Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 13 KNOWING YOUR CAR 14 KNOWING YOUR CAR In-depth knowledge of your new car starts here. The handbook you are reading will tell you how things are done, and how it works in a simple, direct way. That’s why we advise you to read it seated comfortably on board, so that you can see what is described here for yourself. OPERATING PRINCIPLE ............... DASHBOARD .............................. THE KEYS................................... IGNITION DEVICE ........................ SENTRY KEY® ............................ ALARM SYSTEM.......................... DOORS ...................................... SEATS........................................ HEAD RESTRAINTS ..................... STEERING WHEEL....................... REAR-VIEW MIRRORS ................. EXTERNAL LIGHTS ...................... INTERIOR LIGHTS........................ WINDOW WASHING .................... PROGRAMMING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ..................... CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ....... ELECTRIC WINDOWS .................. ROOF ......................................... SOFT TOP .................................. BOOT ......................................... BONNET..................................... INTERIOR FITTINGS ..................... ROOF RACK/SKI RACK ................ RED SPECIAL SERIES .................. 15 21 22 24 26 26 27 32 35 35 36 37 41 42 44 46 58 59 61 66 67 68 72 73 OPERATING PRINCIPLE The propulsion system of the New 500 is completely powered by the energy contained in the high-voltage lithiumion rechargeable battery of the car. Unlike conventional or hybrid cars, there is no internal combustion engine in this car. The New 500 uses the electrical energy stored in the high-voltage battery and not fuel. This battery provides the energy needed to start moving and therefore needs to be recharged before use. If the high-voltage battery is completely flat the car will not start. This car also has a 12V battery of the same type as those used by cars with internal combustion engines. If the 12V battery is completely flat the car will not start. The 12V battery supplies power to the conventional electrical system: lights, windscreen wipers, restraint systems (airbags and pretensioners), sound system, etc. The high-voltage battery supplies power to the electric motor and supplies the high-voltage auxiliary devices (heaters, electric climate compressor, etc.). The electronic converter that powers the 12V system for general car operation is also powered by the high-voltage battery and also recharges the 12V battery. The battery is charged by connecting the charging socket of the car to the mains power supply using the charging cable. The battery is charged by connecting the charging socket of the car to the mains power supply using the charging cable. The high-voltage battery is also partially recharged while driving during deceleration or braking. During this steps, the battery is recharged by regeneration via the electric motor. This is an efficient way of recharging as the kinetic energy of the car is used and converted into electric charging energy. Electric cars have specific characteristics of use, which is useful to know, in order to achieve optimal performance. This car respects the environment because it does not emit exhaust gases and therefore has zero CO2 emissions. 15 KNOWING YOUR CAR FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF THE CAR A E B D C 5 F0S1050 A. Charging port B. High-voltage battery C. High-voltage electrical compressor D. Traction electric motor E. Voltage converter 16 HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY The high-voltage battery is located at the bottom of the vehicle in a central area and is maintenance-free. A while in the smaller version the voltage is 395V. The high-voltage battery is equipped with conditioning systems that ensure that it operates under the best temperature conditions appropriate to its operation. 1) The car is equipped with a safety device that inhibits the activation of the high-voltage system. This device is normally used by Fiat Dealerships to repair and service the car. A 1) 6 F0S1069 2) 3) 4) 1) 2) A. High-voltage wires The high-voltage battery is lithium-ion. Lithium-ion batteries provide the following benefits: are much lighter than other types of chargeable batteries of the same size; keep the charge longer; have no memory, i.e. it is not necessary to discharge them completely before recharging, as is the case with other types of batteries; can be recharged and discharged, charging times vary depending on home or public charging mode and power. The high-voltage battery of the New 500 in the larger version (with more energy) has a nominal voltage of 350V, HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY DISPOSAL The high-voltage battery is designed to last for the lifetime of the car. If it is necessary to replace the battery, please contact a Fiat Dealership for information on disposal. NOTE The car is provided with a high-voltage lithium-ion battery. Inappropriate disposal of this type of battery carries a risk of serious burns, electric shock and damage to the environment. In accordance with national and international battery regulations, FCA guarantees an adequate collection of this component in cooperation with qualified operators for the proper handling of the batteries to be disposed of. GENERAL INFORMATION The car is also equipped with a battery management system designed to: ensure safe operation optimise driving range optimise the working life of the highvoltage battery NOTE You can hear a click from inside the car when the car is starting and switching it off. When the ignition device is in the ENGINE position, the high-voltage battery contactors are closed to allow the distribution of the accumulated electricity to use the car. This typical sound is the noise of these contactors opening and closing and is normal for the car. If the temperature of the high-voltage battery is below -10°C, or above 40°C, some car functions may change or turn off as battery performance decreases outside this temperature range. OPERATING MODE As with a car with automatic transmission, you must get used to not using your left foot to activate the clutch pedal which is not present. While driving, when you lift your foot off the accelerator pedal or when you press the brake pedal during deceleration, the motor generates electric current 17 KNOWING YOUR CAR 18 which is used to brake the car and recharge the high-voltage battery. Refer to the "eBraking mode" chapter in the "Starting and driving" section. Special case: after the high-voltage battery has been fully recharged and during the first kilometres of use of the car, the exhaust brake is in a temporary condition of reduced effectiveness. Adapt your driving accordingly. 5) 6) 7) While driving, you can activate the selector (A) fig. 7 located on the central tunnel. This device allows you to set three different driving modes according to the driver's needs: NORMAL RANGE SHERPA Via the on board electronics, the device acts on the dynamic control system of the car (motor, ESC system), interfacing the instrument panel as well. The selector is of "hold to operate" type, returning to the central position when released. Engagement of the required driving mode is indicated on the instrument panel display with a dedicated message. The system does not allow you to change the driving mode when you drastically reduce the performance of the electric motor (see paragraph on performance limitations). When the motor is started, the system usually maintains the driving mode that was active before the car was stopped. The standard operating mode is "NORMAL". Pull and release the selector once to activate "RANGE" mode. Pulling and releasing the selector switch a second time activates the "SHERPA" mode. To return to "RANGE" mode, push the switch towards the dashboard and release it once, to return to "NORMAL" mode, push and release it a second time. Driving mode selection is not available in "Performance limitation - Turtle mode". 7 F0S1088 "NORMAL" mode In the "NORMAL" operating mode, the car has no performance limitations and can be driven fast using all the power and torque of the traction system. In this mode, the energy consumption of the car depends on the driving style. In "NORMAL" mode, when the accelerator pedal is released, the car slows down with an motor braking effect similar to that of a conventional vehicle. During this phase, the highvoltage battery is partially recharged (regeneration). In "NORMAL", when the one-speed transmission is on D, to keep the car stationary press the brake pedal ("One Pedal Driving" not available). The "creeping" function is also available. The car will start to move forward (with transmission in "D") or backward (with transmission in "R") when the brake pedal is released. The accelerator should not be pressed in this case. "RANGE" mode In "RANGE" mode, the car continues to have no speed restrictions but offers comfortable handling with a smoother response to accelerator pedal pressure. This mode helps to adopt a driving style aimed at maximising the range. WARNING The "One-Pedal Driving" function is enabled on the accelerator pedal in "RANGE" mode. In this case, the car can be accelerated, decelerated and stopped by acting only on the accelerator pedal. See the "One Pedal Driving" chapter in the "Starting the motor" section. NOTE The "creeping" function is not available in "RANGE" mode. NOTE When "One Pedal Driving" with one-speed transmission in D is active and the car is stationary, it is not necessary to press the brake pedal to hold it stationary. In "RANGE" mode, by fully depressing the accelerator pedal, you can override the mode limitations and temporarily return to "NORMAL" mode. "SHERPA" mode In "SHERPA" mode, the car has no acceleration restriction but the top speed is electronically limited to 80km/h. "SHERPA' mode significantly helps to adopt a driving style aimed at maximum efficiency and maximises the range of the car. The climate control system and seat heaters are also automatically deactivated but can be manually reactivated if necessary. WARNING The "One-Pedal Driving" function is enabled on the accelerator pedal in "SHERPA" mode. In this case, the car can be accelerated, decelerated and stopped by acting only on the accelerator pedal. NOTE The "creeping" function is not available in "SHERPA" mode. NOTE When "One Pedal Driving" with one-speed transmission in D is active and the car is stationary, it is not necessary to press the brake pedal to hold it stationary. NOTE Even if "One Pedal Driving" is active, the brake system operated by the brake pedal works normally. In "SHERPA" mode, by fully depressing the accelerator pedal, the operating mode is temporarily returned (e.g. to make an overtaking manoeuvre) to "NORMAL". When "SHERPA" mode is activated, the heated seats will be turned off if turned on. To turn them on again, you must act on the activation command. NOTE If the climate control system or heated seats are activated in "SHERPA" mode, a dedicated message appears on the instrument panel to alert the user that these functions have an impact on battery life. Performance limitation Turtle mode "Turtle" mode is activated automatically when the remaining range is less than 24 km, but can be temporarily deactivated in case of emergency (for example to clear a junction) by quickly depressing the accelerator pedal fully (kick-down function). Range: 24-16 km Amber high-voltage battery charge status indicator, symbol on the instrument panel display lit for 6 seconds. Speed according to the selected mode (NORMAL, RANGE, SHERPA). The heated rear window, windscreen, mirrors and seats are deactivated automatically (but can be reactivated manually if necessary). Range: 16-8 km Red high-voltage battery charge status indicator, symbol on the instrument panel display lit fixed. Speed according to the selected mode (NORMAL, RANGE, SHERPA). The heated rear window, windscreen, mirrors and seats are deactivated automatically (but can be reactivated manually if necessary). Range: 8-0 km Red high-voltage battery charge status indicator, symbol on the instrument panel display lit fixed. 19 KNOWING YOUR CAR Top speed: 70 km/h. The climate control system is deactivated, and the fan and quick defrosting may be activated. The heated rear window, windscreen, mirrors and seats are deactivated automatically (but can be reactivated manually if necessary). Range: ≈0 km (emergency conditions) Red high-voltage battery charge status indicator, symbol on the instrument panel display blinking. Top speed: 70 km/h. The climate control system is deactivated, and the fan and quick defrosting may be activated. The heated rear window, windscreen, mirrors and seats are deactivated automatically (but can be reactivated manually if necessary). NOTE Turtle mode speed limits are disabled when the Speed Limiter or Cruise Control is active. WARNING 1) The propulsion system of the electric car is connected by the high-voltage battery and when the system is active the components are then powered at highvoltage. Observe the warning messages on the labels on the car when accessing the motor compartment. Any intervention 20 or modification on the high-voltage electrical system of the car (components, cables, connectors, high-voltage battery) is strictly forbidden due to the risks it may imply for your safety. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership. Tampering with the high-voltage system can lead to serious burns or electrical discharges with even fatal consequences. 2) Do not resell, give away or modify the high-voltage battery. The high-voltage battery must only be used on the car on which it is supplied. If used outside the car or modified, accidents such as electric shock, heat or smoke generation, explosion or electrolyte leakage may occur. 3) If the car is scrapped without removing the high-voltage battery, contact with high-voltage components, cables and connectors could cause very dangerous electric shock. 4) If the high-voltage battery is not disposed of properly, it may cause electric shock, resulting in serious injury or death. 5) Under no circumstances may the motor brake replace pressing the brake pedal. 6) In case of bad weather and flooded roads: Do not drive on a flooded street if the water level exceeds the lower part of the wheel rims. 7) Due to the quiet operation of your electric car, always set the speed selector switch to P and engage the electric parking brake and stop the motor before leaving the car. DANGER OF SERIOUS INJURY. IMPORTANT 1) The high-voltage battery may only be disconnected by qualified personnel at a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT 1) Do not dispose of the battery yourself. If the car is scrapped, it must be taken to a Fiat Dealership to have the high-voltage battery removed and disposed of properly by the Fiat Dealership personnel who have the technical skills to operate in complete safety. 2) Live parts of the car are marked with safety warning labels. The high-voltage battery bears a label indicating this danger. DASHBOARD The presence, graphics and position of panels, controls, instruments and indicators may vary according to the different versions. C B A D G T U E R F H G Q L P O M S N I 8 F0S1096 A. side air vent B. left steering wheel stalk C. instrument panel D. right steering wheel stalk E. Uconnect™ system F. hazard warning lights, door locking/unlocking button G. central air vents H. side air vent I. glove compartment L. climate control system controls M. storage compartment and wireless charging device (where provided) N. One-speed transmission O. USB port P. ignition device Q. controls on the steering wheel: Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, Speed Limiter, Co-Driver R. driver's side front airbag and horn S. steering wheel adjustment lever T. Uconnect™ system and display steering wheel controls. U. control panel: rear fog light, ESC deactivation, headlight alignment adjustment 21 KNOWING YOUR CAR THE KEYS The car is equipped with two types of key, an electronic key and a Wearable Key. 8) 2) 3) ELECTRONIC KEY The electronic key of the car performs the conventional functions for access and starting, which are detailed below. 9 F0S1229 OPERATION Unlocking doors and boot Briefly press the button : unlocking of doors and boot, timed switching-on of internal lights and double flashing of direction indicators (where provided). When the function is available, press and release the unlock button on the remote control once only to unlock the driver's door or twice within 1 second to unlock all doors and the tailgate. 22 The current setting can be changed using the display Menu or the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section), for the system to unlock the driver door only or all the doors the first time the button is pressed on the remote control. For further information, see the "Display" chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section. Door and boot locking Briefly press the button : lock of doors and boot with interior ceiling light off and single flash of direction indicators (where provided). If one or more doors are open, the doors are locked and this is indicated by a rapid flashing of the direction indicators (where provided). The doors prepare for locking, which is active from the moment they are closed. The doors will unlock again only if the key presence is detected inside the passenger compartment. Opening the boot Rapidly press the button twice to open the boot remotely. The direction indicators will flash twice to indicate that the boot has been opened. Lights on Press the button to remotely control the switching on of the side/tail lights and main beam headlights, for up to 90 seconds. This function is useful for example to find the car easily in a crowded parking. button again, or at the end Pressing of the 90 seconds, the lights switched on previously will go off (if the parking light function was already active, it will remain so). If, when 90 seconds have passed, the button is pressed, the main beam headlights and the side/tail lights will stay on for a further 30 seconds. FLAT BATTERY When the battery of the key is nearly flat, the car will detect it beforehand by displaying a message on the instrument panel. WARNING The battery life of the keys depends considerably on their use. BATTERY REPLACEMENT 3) To replace the battery, proceed as follows: take the key from the lower side (A) fig. 10 (the one without buttons) and, using the fingertips, move the cover in the direction of the key chain hole until the teeth are released (motion (1)); gently remove the lower cover by pulling it upwards (motion (2) fig. 10); 12 10 F0S1231 pull up the edge of the metal key (B) fig. 11 until the release and pull it out; remove the battery protection cap (C) fig. 11; 11 F0S1232 lift the fastener (C) fig. 12 by prying into the recess in the end of the key, on the side of the key chain (movement (3)); EMERGENCY KEY HOLDER The emergency key (B) fig. 11 can be housed in the charging compartment. Open the charging compartment flap and remove the holder (A) fig. 13. Insert the key into the holder from the grip side and refit the holder on the flap. extract the battery (D). F0S1233 To replace the battery, insert it in the compartment occupied by the previous one, taking care to respect the polarities indicated inside the electronic key. Then proceed by sliding and then pushing the battery into the cavity intended to house it. Reposition the battery protection cap. Refit the metal insert in the electronic key. Reposition the cover taking care to anchor it correctly to the key. WARNING The battery replacement operation must be carried out with care, in order not to damage the electronic key. A 13 F0S1348 REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL KEYS To guarantee that the motor starts and the car operates correctly, use only electronic keys specifically coded for the car’s electronics. If an electronic key is coded for a car, it cannot be used on any other car. Duplicating keys Should a new key with remote control or a new electronic key be necessary, go to a Fiat Dealership, taking an ID document and the car ownership documents. 23 KNOWING YOUR CAR WEARABLE KEY The car is optionally equipped with an additional extremely small, lightweight electronic device that works as a passive key (without buttons). IMPORTANT 3) Used batteries should be disposed of, as specified by law, in the special containers, otherwise take them to a Fiat Dealership, which will deal with their disposal. IGNITION DEVICE OPERATION WARNING 14 F0S1230 The Wearable Key is resistant to immersion in water (15 meters/1 hour) and can therefore be used for outdoor activities or sports activities in general. Every indication in this manual related to the electronic key apply to the Wearable Key, except for the functions related to the presence of the buttons and the battery replacement procedure. WARNING The Wearable Key must not be used for deep diving or other activities involving contact with highspeed water (such as water skiing, diving, kite surfing, etc.). 24 WARNING The battery of the Wearable Key cannot be replaced. If the internal battery is not sufficiently charged, contact a Fiat Dealership and follow the "Request for additional keys" procedure. The need to replace the battery is notified to the owner as described above for the electronic key in the "Flat battery" paragraph. 8) Do not swallow the battery. Danger of chemical burns. The keys contain a small battery. If the battery is swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns in just 2 hours and cause death. Keep new and used batteries out of the reach of children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use of the product and keep it out of reach of children. If you believe that batteries may have been swallowed or inserted inside the body, seek medical attention immediately. 9) 10) 11) To activate the ignition device (A) fig. 15 the electronic key must be inside the passenger compartment. The ignition device activates also if the electronic key is inside the boot or on the rear shelf. IMPORTANT 2) The electronic components inside the key may be damaged if the key is subjected to strong shocks. In order to ensure complete efficiency of the electronic devices inside the key, it should never be exposed to direct sunlight. 3) Do not place the car key in the wireless charging compartment: risk of access and starting system malfunction. 15 F0S1366 The ignition device has the following possible states: STOP: the motor is off. Some electrical devices (e.g. central door locking system, alarm, etc.) are still available; ENGINE: driving position. All electrical devices are available. This state can be selected by pressing the ignition device button once, without pressing the brake pedal; START: motor starting. 12) 13) NOTE The ignition device does NOT activate if the electronic key is inside the boot and this is open. NOTE With the ignition device in the ENGINE position, if 30 minutes pass with P (Park) transmission and the motor stopped, the ignition device will automatically move to the STOP position. NOTE With the ignition device in the ENGINE position, if 15 minutes pass with transmission in position N, motor off and car stopped, the ignition device will automatically switch to the STOP position. NOTE With motor started, it is possible to go away from the car taking the electronic key with you. The motor will still be running. The car will indicate the absence of the key on board when the door is closed. NOTE If the device does switch off the car, refer to the “Display” chapter in the “Knowing the instrument panel” section, where available, and contact the Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. For more information on the engine startup, see the description in the "Starting the engine" chapter in the "Starting and driving" section. NOTE The electronic key can be disabled for starting if it is left in the car. To do this: close all the doors, including the tailgate; press the lock button on another key twice or the button located under the handle with another electronic key, waiting at least 3 seconds between each press; wait 30 seconds without unlocking the car or opening the doors. To reactivate the previously disabled electronic key you must either start the car with an enabled electronic key or unlock the car using an enabled electronic key. compliance of the car with type-approval requirements. 10) If the ignition device has been tampered with (e.g. an attempted theft), have it checked by a Fiat Dealership before driving again. 11) Always take the key with you when you leave your car to prevent someone from accidentally operating the controls. Remember to engage the electric parking brake. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 12) Before leaving the car, ALWAYS engage the electric parking brake. Put the transmission in the P (Park) position and press the ignition device to set it to STOP. Always lock the doors when you leave the car. 13) Do not leave the electronic key inside or near the car or in a place accessible to children. Do not leave the car with the ignition device in the ENGINE position. A child could activate the electric window winders, other controls or even start the vehicle. WARNING 9) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any after-market operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that could adversely affect performance and safety, invalidate the warranty and also result in non- 25 KNOWING YOUR CAR SENTRY KEY® The Sentry Key® system prevents unauthorised use of the car preventing to start the motor. The system does not need to be enabled/activated: operation is automatic, regardless of the fact that the car's doors are locked or unlocked. When the ignition device is set to ENGINE, the Sentry Key® system identifies the code transmitted by the key. If the code is recognised as valid, the Sentry Key® system enables motor starting. When the ignition device is brought back to STOP, the Sentry Key® system deactivates the control unit controlling the motor, thus preventing its starting. For the correct motor starting procedures, see the instructions in the "Starting the motor" chapter in the "Starting and driving" section. IRREGULAR OPERATION If, during starting, the key code is not correctly recognised, the icon is displayed on the instrument panel (see the instructions in the "Warning lights and messages" chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section). This condition leads to the motor switching off after 2 seconds. In this case, bring the ignition device to 26 STOP and ENGINE; if it is still blocked, try with the other keys provided. If it is still not possible to start the motor, contact a Fiat Dealership. If the icon is displayed while driving, this means that the system is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a voltage drop). If the display persists, contact a Fiat Dealership. ALARM SYSTEM ALARM ACTIVATION The alarm goes off in the following cases: wrongful opening of doors/bonnet/boot (perimeter protection); operation of starting device with a key which is not validated. Activation of the alarm triggers the acoustic warning and the direction indicators. WARNING The immobilizer function is provided by the Sentry Key®system, which is automatically activated when you get out of the car taking the electronic key with you and locking the doors. WARNING The alarm is adapted to meet requirements in various countries. SWITCHING ON THE ALARM With the doors, bonnet and tailgate closed and the ignition device turned to STOP, point the electronic key towards the car and press and release button . The alarm can also be engaged by pressing the "door lock" button, located on the door external handle. For further information, see the "Passive Entry" paragraph in the "Doors" chapter. The system emits a visual and acoustic warning (where provided) and enables door locking. The activation of the alarm is preceded by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is detected, the system emits a further acoustic warning. If, after the alarm is switched on, a second acoustic warning is emitted, wait about 4 seconds and switch off the alarm by pressing the button , check that the doors, bonnet and boot are closed correctly and then reactivate the system by pressing the button . If the alarm emits an acoustic warning even when the doors, bonnet and boot are correctly closed, an anomaly has occurred in system operation: in this case, contact a Fiat Dealership. Locking doors without alarm insertion is also always possible by locking the doors through the emergency locking procedure. For more information see "Emergency opening and closing" in the "Doors" chapter. DISARMING THE ALARM To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. during a long period of car inactivity), close the doors using the emergency locking manoeuvres described in the "Doors" chapter. WARNING If the doors are unlocked by putting the metal insert into the driver side door lock, the alarm, if previously enabled, is not disabled. It will be possible to disable the alarm by turning the ignition device switch to ENGINE, or by pressing button on the remote control. WARNING If the batteries of the key with the remote control run out or the system fails, the alarm can be switched off by placing the ignition device switch in the ENGINE position. TURNING THE ALARM OFF Press the button. The following operations are performed: two brief flashes of the direction indicators (where provided); two brief acoustic signals (where provided); doors are unlocked. For versions with Passive Entry function, the alarm can be switched off by the key holder by pressing the door opening button on the external handle. For further information, see the "Passive Entry" paragraph in the "Doors" chapter. button will light up to notify the locking. With doors locked, press the button again to unlock them. The LED on the button will go out to notify the unlocking. DOORS LOCKING / UNLOCKING DOORS FROM THE INSIDE Central locking / unlocking Where provided, the "Autoclose" function automatically activates the automatic locking of the doors on exceeding the speed of 20 km/h. If it is not present, use the respective control (A) fig. 16 located on the centre dashboard to lock/unlock the doors. Where provided, the "Autoclose" function can be activated/deactivated via the Uconnect™ system (see "Doors & Locks" in the "Vehicle Mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). In any case, the doors can be locked by pressing the button (A) on the centre dashboard. The LED on the 16 F0S1098 Opening the door The door can be opened by pressing the button (B) fig. 17 located above each door. If the function is present, pressing the button on either door opens the door and unlocks the other doors and the boot. The function must have been activated via the instrument panel display menu or the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). 27 KNOWING YOUR CAR be locked and cannot be opened from outside any more. Door unlocking from the outside Press the opening button on the key. Then pull the handle (E) fig. 19 on one of the two doors to enter the car. 17 F0S1099 Press button (B) fig. 17 three times in two seconds to open the door in motion at speeds above 5 km/h (to prevent spontaneous opening of the door while in motion). At speeds below 5 km/h, the door will open when the button is pressed for the first time. The red LED around the button will light up when the door is locked and it will turn off when the door is unlocked. LOCKING / UNLOCKING DOORS FROM THE OUTSIDE Locking from the outside With the doors closed, press the button on the key. The door lock can be activated also with all doors open and the boot open. When the button on the key is pressed, all the locks are closed, including that of the open boot. When the open door or boot is closed, it will 28 VERSION "3+1" OPENING/CLOSING THE REAR DOOR ON PASSENGER SIDE (where provided) Opening To open the rear door on passenger side, firstly open the respective front door using handle (E) fig. 19 (opening from the outside) or button (B) fig. 17 (opening from the inside). Then open the rear door using the internal handle (A) fig. 18. A 18 NOTE It is recommended to fold the front passenger seat forward F0S1339 to facilitate access to the rear seats and getting out of the car. See the "Seats" chapter in this section for more information. IMPORTANT The front passenger seat belt is fitted on the rear door. If the seat belt of the front seat passenger is fastened, it must be unfastened and fully retracted it before opening the rear door. IMPORTANT The front seat passenger must always make sure the door is closed before fastening the seat belt. Closing Close the rear door first and then the front door. PASSIVE ENTRY 4) The Passive Entry system can identify the presence of an electronic key near the doors. The system lets you lock/unlock the doors (and the tailgate) without having to press any button on the electronic key. If the system identifies the electronic key detected outside the car as a valid one, the key holder can simply pull the handle (E) fig. 19 on one of the two doors to deactivate the alarm and open the door. The other doors and the boot will be unlocked. 19 F0S1100 If the function is present, by pressing the button on the driver's door it is possible to open the driver's side door only, leaving the other doors and the boot locked, or to open the driver's side door by unlocking the other doors and the boot according to the mode set using the display menu on the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). Door locking To lock the doors, proceed as follows: make sure that you have the electronic key and are close to the driver's or the passenger's door; press the button (B) fig. 19 on the handle: this will lock all doors and the tailgate. Locking the doors will also activate the alarm (where provided). WARNING After pressing the "door locking" button (B) , you need to wait two seconds before the doors can be unlocked again using the door handle (E). It is therefore possible to check whether the car is locked correctly by pulling the door handle within 2 seconds. The doors will not be unlocked again. The doors and tailgate of the car can still be locked from the outside by pressing the button on the electronic key or from the inside by pressing the (A) fig. 16 placed on the centre dashboard. PREVENTION AGAINST INADVERTENT LOCKING OF THE KEY INSIDE THE CAR (FOBIK-SAFE) The key is provided with an automatic door unlocking function to avoid leaving the electronic key inside the car accidentally. There are three situations that activate the FOBIK-Safe system: A lock request made with a valid electronic key while the door is open. A lock request made by pressing the door lock button on the outside handle (B) fig. 19 while a door is open. A lock request made by pressing the door lock button (A) fig. 16 on the centre dashboard while a door is open. Once all the doors are closed, the FOBIK-Safe system performs a check inside and outside the car to verify the presence of enabled electronic keys. If one of the electronic keys is detected inside the car and no other active electronic key is detected outside the car, the FOBIK-Safe function automatically unlocks all the car doors. The FOBIK-Safe function will also intervene if the electronic key is left inside the boot. When the boot is closed, if the electronic key is detected, the system will unlock the boot. If, on the other hand, one or more electronic keys are found inside the passenger compartment, locking the doors with another key will disable the operation of the keys from the inside. In this case, the FOBIK-Safe function will not detect the disabled keys if left inside the car. To re-activate their correct operation, press the button on the remote control. NOTES The car will not unlock the doors if one of the following situations is present: the doors have been locked by means of the emergency lock using the door opening button (B) fig. 17 on the door panel; 29 KNOWING YOUR CAR an electronic key close to the car has been detected outside. Access to the boot If the car is provided with Passive Entry function, while approaching the tailgate with an enabled electronic key, press the electric door opening button located under the handle (F) fig. 20, grasp this last and lift the boot tailgate. detected inside when it is locked, the tailgate will unlock again and the lights flash twice. WARNING Before driving make sure the tailgate is closed correctly. Locking the doors using button on boot (where provided) If the system identifies a valid electronic key on the outside of the car, by pressing the button (G) fig. 20 the tailgate can be locked with all doors and the boot itself. WARNING Boot opening is disabled while the car is moving. 20 F0S1102 WARNING Where provided, the alarm system will be temporarily disabled only for the boot area. After closing the boot, the alarm system will be reactivated again. For vehicles not equipped with a Passive Entry system, use the remote control to open the boot. WARNING With the car locked, if the tailgate only is unlocked, if a key is 30 System activation/deactivation The Passive Entry system can be activated/deactivated using the display menu or on the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). DEAD LOCK DEVICE (where provided) 14) This safety device inhibits the operation of the interior buttons of the car and the door lock/unlock door button. It thereby prevents the opening of the doors from inside the passenger compartment, serving as an obstacle to break-in attempts. We recommend that you activate the device each time you park your car. Activating the device The device is activated on all doors by on the key twice pressing button in rapid succession or, for cars with Passive Entry, by pressing the lock button on the exterior handle of the car. The direction indicators flash 3 times to let you know that the device is active. If one or more of the doors are not closed correctly, the device will not activate, thus preventing a person from getting stuck inside the passenger compartment by entering the car through, and then closing, the open door. Deactivating the device The device disengages automatically: when the doors are unlocked (pressing button on the key with remote control); when the ignition device is set to ENGINE; by pressing the door opening button on the outside handle in the case of a car equipped with the Passive Entry system. The horn is still active even when the ignition device is in the OFF position. EMERGENCY CLOSING AND OPENING If the electronic key does not work, e.g. if the battery of the key is low, you can: unlock the car using the mechanical key inside the electronic key by acting on the pawl located on the driver's door. See the "Emergency opening of the doors from outside" paragraph below. Lock the car by pressing the door open button (B) fig. 17 placed on the inner door panel for about 5 seconds keeping the ignition device in STOP position and the door open. The car will lock all the doors and the tailgate after about 5 seconds. The LED on the door button (B) fig. 17 and on the centre dashboard (A) fig. 16 will light up to notify the locking. When the last door is closed the car will be locked. The car can be locked from any door, respecting the manoeuvre described above. 5) Opening and locking doors in the event of power failure If the 12V battery of the car is flat, the doors can still be opened or locked as they are equipped with an additional power supply. Opening the doors You can open the door in the following ways: with the doors locked, press the door opening button (E) fig. 19 on the external handle three times within 2 seconds. Turn the pawl (C) placed on the driver's door fig. 24 using the mechanical key located inside the electronic key. Press the internal door opening button three times (B) fig. 17 in two seconds. pawl (A) fig. 21 using the key inside the remote control. A 21 F0S1195 Emergency opening of the doors from the inside If the electronic key does not work, for example if the electronic key or the 12V battery of the car is low, the doors can still be opened from the inside by pulling the emergency lever (D) fig. 22 located on each door. Locking the doors The doors can be locked following the emergency locking manoeuvre. See the "Emergency closing and opening" paragraph described above. NOTE See the "Emergency closing and opening" paragraph described above. RESET Resetting the door is automatic for a certain number of times after which it must be done manually using the 22 F0S1101 31 KNOWING YOUR CAR Emergency opening of the doors from the outside If the electronic key does not work (e.g. if the battery of the electronic key is low) or if the power supply fails completely, you can still open the doors from the outside by proceeding as follows: remove the cap (B) fig. 23 present on the external handle on the driver's side inserting the mechanical key inside the electronic key in the slot (A); the keys inside the car. The emergency locking manoeuvre disables the FOBIKSafe function. SEATS C FRONT SEATS A 15) 16) 6) 24 F0S1282 WARNING 14) By engaging the Dead Lock device it is possible to open the doors from inside the car only by acting on the emergency handle (D) fig. 22. Therefore, make sure that there is no-one on board before getting out. 23 F0S1281 open the door using the mechanical key (A) inside the electronic key by turning the pawl anticlockwise (C) fig. 24 on the outside handle on the driver's side. 32 Forward/rearward adjustment Lift lever (A) fig. 25 and push the seat forwards or backwards: in the driving position, you should be able to rest your arms on the rim of the steering wheel. IMPORTANT 4) The operation of the recognition system depends on various factors, such as, for example, any electromagnetic wave interference from external sources (e.g. mobile phones), the charge of the battery in the electronic key and the presence of metal objects near the key or the car. In these cases it is still possible to unlock the doors by using the metal insert in the electronic key (see description on the following pages). 5) After locking the car by emergency manoeuvre, make sure you do not leave 25 F0S1103 17) Height adjustment (for versions/markets, where provided) Operate lever (B) fig. 26 to lift or lower the rear part of seat to achieve the most comfortable driving position. C B 26 F0S1295 Backrest angle adjustment Rotate the lever (C) fig. 26. Reclining the backrest 7) To fold the backrest over, adjust lever (D) fig. 27 (movement 1) and push the backrest forwards until it locks (movement 2). Then release lever (D) and, pushing on the backrest, slide the seat forward (movement 3). 27 F0S1365 Driver side and passenger side, with position memory To bring back the seat in its initial position proceed as follows: slide the seat back by pushing in the lower part of the backrest as indicated in fig. 27, taking care not to lift the backrest into the vertical starting position. In this way, slide the seat to the locked position (movement 4); now lift the backrest (movement 5) into the vertical starting position until you feel the click; than or equal to 4.5°C. This function is activated/deactivated on the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). REAR SEATS EXTENDING THE BOOT 18) 7) The separate rear seats allow partial fig. 28 or total fig. 29 boot extension. WARNING Using lever (D) fig. 27 before locking the seat in its initial position will cause the initial seat position to be lost. In this case the position of the seat must be restored through lengthwise adjustment lever (A) fig. 25. Heated seats (where provided) Heated seats can only be activated by soft touch controls on the Uconnect™ system with the ignition device in the START position. Auto On comfort (where provided) The electric heated steering wheel is switched on automatically whenever the motor is started and the external temperature is lower 28 F0S1345 29 F0S1346 33 KNOWING YOUR CAR Partial extension (50/50) (for versions/markets, where provided) Proceed as follows: remove the parcel shelf, by releasing it from its two side pins and pulling it out; remove the rear seat head restraints (where provided); see the "Head restraints" chapter in this section; check that the seat belt is fully extended and not twisted; act on the buttons (A) fig. 30 (one on each side) to unlock the left or right portion of the backrest and accompany the backrest on the cushion. Total extension Tilting the rear seat completely forwards allows maximum loading volume. Proceed as follows: remove the parcel shelf, by releasing it from its two side pins and pulling it out; remove the rear seat head restraints (where provided); see the "Head restraints" chapter in this section; check that the belt straps are correctly extended and not twisted; operate the levers (A) fig. 30 and (B) to release the backrests and guide them onto the cushion. WARNING To return the backrest to its correct position, we recommend operating from the outside through the doors. 30 F0S1200 WARNING To return the backrest to its correct position, we recommend operating from the outside through the doors. Repositioning seat backrests Raise the backrests and push them back until the locking click of both retainers is heard. Position the seat belt buckles upwards and set the cushion to the normal use position. WARNING When returning the backrest to its normal position, make sure that it is correctly fastened and that you hear 34 the lock click. Also check that the seat belts do not get stuck between the backrest and the interior moulding. WARNING 15) All adjustments must be made with the car stationary and engine stopped. 16) If a side bag is fitted, it is dangerous to use seat covers not available from Lineaccessori MOPAR®. 17) After releasing the adjustment lever, always check that the seat is locked on the guides by trying to move it back and forth. If the seat is not locked into place, it may unexpectedly slide and cause the driver to lose control of the car. 18) Make sure the backrests are properly secured at both sides to prevent them from moving forward, in the event of sharp braking, with possible impact with of the passengers. IMPORTANT 6) The fabric upholstery of the seats has been designed to withstand long-term wear deriving from normal use of the car. Some precautions are however required. Avoid prolonged and/or excessive rubbing against clothing accessories such as metal buckles and Velcro strips which, by applying a high pressure on the fabric in a small area, could cause it to break, thereby damaging the upholstery. 7) Before tilting the backrest, remove any objects on the seat cushion. side of the two supports and lower the head restraint. HEAD RESTRAINTS 19) FRONT Adjustment Headrests can be adjusted in height. Upward adjustment: raise the head restraint until it clicks into place. Downward adjustment: press button (A) fig. 31 and lower the head restraint. 32 F0S1110 The particular shape of the head restraint deliberately interferes with the correct support of the rear passenger’s back on the backrest in order to force them to lift the head restraint for correct use. WARNING 19) All adjustments must be carried out only with the car stationary and motor stopped. Head restraints must be adjusted so that the head, rather than the neck, rests on them. Only in this case they can protect your head correctly. 20) To make the best use of the head restraint's protective action, adjust the backrest so that you are sitting upright and keep your head as close as possible to the head restraint. STEERING WHEEL 21) 22) ADJUSTMENTS The steering wheel can be adjusted both in height and in depth. WARNING If the rear seats are used, always set the head restraints in the "completely raised" position. 31 F0S1105 20) REAR Upward adjustment (usage condition): raise the head restraint until it clicks into place. Downward adjustment: press at the same time buttons (A) fig. 32 at the Removal To remove the rear head restraints press buttons (A) fig. 32 at the side of the two supports simultaneously and lift them out upwards. The rear head restraints must be lifted out with the backrest released and tilted toward the passenger compartment or with the tailgate open. 33 F0S1106 To carry out the adjustment move the lever (A) fig. 33 downwards in position (1), then adjust the steering wheel to 35 KNOWING YOUR CAR the most suitable position and then lock it in this position moving the lever (A) again in position (2). WARNING 21) All adjustments must be carried out only with the car stationary and motor stopped. 22) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any after-market operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device) that could badly affect performance and safety, invalidate the warranty and also result in noncompliance of the car with type-approval requirements. REAR-VIEW MIRRORS mirror is automatically set for daytime use. INTERIOR MIRROR The mirror is fitted with a safety device that causes its release in the event of a violent impact with the passenger. Lever (A) fig. 34 can be used to move the mirror to two different positions: normal or antiglare. 34 F0S1107 ELECTROCHROMIC REAR-VIEW MIRROR (where provided) Some versions have an electrochromic mirror with automatic anti-glare function. There is an ON/OFF button on the lower part of the mirror for activating/deactivating the electrochromic function. When the function is active, a LED on the mirror is active. When reverse is engaged, the 36 DOOR MIRRORS 23) Proceed as follows: select the mirror using selector (B) fig. 35; adjust the mirror using the joystick (A) fig. 35 in the four directions. 35 F0S1108 Folding the mirrors When required (for example when the mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces ) it is possible to fold the mirrors manually moving them from the open position (1) fig. 36 to the closed position (2). EXTERNAL LIGHTS The left stalk (A) fig. 37 operates most of the exterior lights. 36 F0S1109 WARNING 23) As door mirrors are curved, they may slightly alter the perception of distance. While driving the mirrors must remain in position (1). 37 F0S1111 The exterior lights can only be switched on when the ignition device is at ENGINE. Turning on the light may vary the brightness of the instrument panel: its brightness is regulated by an external light sensor (e.g. when entering a tunnel during the day, it lights up as if it were night, etc.). In daylight, the brightness of the instrument panel remains at maximum, while at night, it can be adjusted. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) 24) 25) The daytime running lights (DRL) are activated with the ring (B) fig. 37 in the AUTO position and in daylight conditions. The first time the ignition is switched on, they remain off as long as the electric parking brake (EPB) is engaged or the gearbox is in the P (Parking) position. With the ignition device in ENGINE position and the propulsion system not active, the daytime running lights are switched off. The daytime running lights are also temporarily deactivated when the direction indicators are activated. When the direction indicators are deactivated, the daylight running lights are reactivated. With the bonnet open, the daytime running lights on the bonnet are switched off. In some versions, if one of the daytime running lights fails, all the daytime running lights on the side where the failure is present are switched off. AUTOMATIC LIGHTING CONTROL (AUTOLIGHT) - DUSK SENSOR This is an infrared LED sensor that works in conjunction with - the rain sensor and is located on the windscreen. It is able to detect variations in outside lighting based on the light sensitivity set in the menu of the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). The higher the sensitivity, the lower the 37 KNOWING YOUR CAR amount of external light needed to switch the lights on. Activation With the ignition device in the ENGINE position, turn the ring (B) fig. 37 to the AUTO position to activate the "Automatic lighting control" function. This automatically switches on the side/tail lights and dipped beam headlights in case of low external light or DRL in daytime driving conditions. Turn the ring to position to switch to manual dipped beam mode. In the event of a sensor malfunction, the side/tail lights, dipped beam headlights and licence plate lights are automatically activated. WARNING The sensor cannot detect the presence of fog. These lights must therefore be switched on manually in these circumstances. DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS With the ignition device turned to ENGINE, turn the ring (B) fig. 37 to . If dipped headlights are activated, the daytime running lights switch off and the side lights and dipped headlights switch on. The warning light switches on in the instrument panel. 38 PARKING LIGHTS With the ignition device turned to STOP, turning the ring (B) from the AUTO position to position will light up the side/tail lights and number plate lights up on lights. Warning light the instrument panel. If the side lights are left on and the driver side door is opened, a buzzer sounds and the display shows a dedicated message warning the driver that the car is being left with the lights on. The buzzer stops when the driver side door is closed. REAR FOG LIGHT With ignition device in the ENGINE position, press button (C) fig. 38 to switch the light on/off. The rear fog light switches on only when the dipped headlights are on. To switch off the rear fog lights, press the button (C), switch off the dipped beam headlights or turn the ignition device to the STOP position. 38 F0S1112 With rear fog lights on, the warning light on the instrument panel will come on at the same time. MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS To activate the fixed main beam headlights, with the ignition device in the ENGINE position, push left lever (A) fig. 37 towards the dashboard. The ring (B) must be turned to AUTO with the dipped beam headlights on, or it . The should be turned to position warning light on the instrument panel switches on. The main beam headlights are deactivated bringing the lever back to the central stable position. Warning light switches off in the instrument panel. AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS In order not to dazzle other road users, the lights are automatically deactivated when approaching cars travelling in the opposite direction or when following a car travelling in the same direction. This function is enabled via the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). Turn the light switch to the AUTO position (B) fig. 37. The first time the main beam headlights are activated (pushing the left stalk towards the dashboard), the function is activated comes on in the (warning light instrument panel). If the main beam headlights are actually will also come on, the warning light on in the instrument panel). When the speed is higher than 40 km/h and the function is active, the lights switch off if the lever is taken again to the stable central position. When the speed is lower than 15 km/h and the function is active, the function switches the main beam headlights off. If the fixed main beam headlights are operated quickly again (taking the lever again to the stable central position and taking it back in a few seconds on the fixed main beam headlight position), the warning light will switch on in the instrument panel and the main beam headlights will be switched on constantly until the speed exceeds 40 km/h. When the speed of 40 km/h is exceeded again, the function is activated automatically again. If the lever is pulled again in this condition, to request main beam headlight deactivation, the function remains off and the main beam headlights switch off. To deactivate the automatic function rotate the light switch ring to position . FLASHING THE HEADLIGHTS Pull the left lever towards the steering wheel, to the unstable position; when released it returns automatically to the stable, central position. With main beam headlights on, the warning light on the instrument panel will come on at the same time. DIRECTION INDICATORS Take the left stalk to the (stable) position: upwards: activates the right direction indicator; downwards: activates the left direction indicator. Warning light or will blink on the instrument panel. The direction indicators are switched off automatically when the steering wheel is straightened. "Lane Change" function If you wish to signal a lane change, place the left stalk in the unstable position for less than half a second. The direction indicator on the side selected will be activated for 5 flashes and then go out automatically. COURTESY LIGHTS The function can be enabled and timed using the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). When the doors are unlocked, the side/tail lights and puddle lights come on for the time set in the menu. Once any door is opened, the lights remain on for a further 180 seconds, or for a further 10 seconds after the door is closed. "FOLLOW ME HOME" DEVICE This allows the space in front of the car to be lit for a set time. Activation With the ignition device turned to STOP or removed, pull the stalk towards the steering wheel within 2 minutes from when the motor is turned off. Each time the stalk is moved, the lights stay on for an extra 30 seconds up to 39 KNOWING YOUR CAR a maximum of 210 seconds; then the lights are switched off automatically. Also, each time the stalk is operated, warning light on the the instrument panel switches on. The display shows a message and the time set for the function. The warning light comes on when the stalk is first moved and stays on until the function is automatically deactivated. Each movement of the stalk only increases the amount of time the lights stay on. Deactivation Hold the stalk pulled towards the steering wheel for more than 2 seconds or turn the ignition device to the ENGINE position. WELCOME LIGHT (where provided) Depending on the version, with the ignition device in the STOP position, an animated sequence of front lights may can be shown when the doors of the car are unlocked. Then they light up fixed. To enable the function set the courtesy lights in a state other than OFF on the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). Only the direction indicators will light up when only the tailgate is unlocked. 40 Activating the alarm or hazard lights will disable the welcome light feature. LIGHT BEAM DIRECTION The correct aiming of the headlights is important for the comfort and safety of not only the driver but all other road users. This is also covered by a specific rule of the highway code. The headlights must be correctly aligned to guarantee the best visibility conditions for all drivers while travelling with headlights on. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the headlights checked and adjusted. Check the light beam alignment every time the load or its distribution changes. HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT CORRECTOR This device works with the ignition device in the ENGINE position and the dipped headlights on. Headlight alignment adjustment To adjust, press the buttons or fig. 39 on the control display located on the left side of the dashboard (left-hand drive versions). The adjustment position is shown on the display: 39 F0S1113 Position 0: one or two people in the front seats Position 1: 4 people Position 2: 4 people + load in luggage compartment Position 3: Driver + maximum load allowed stowed in the boot WARNING Check the headlight alignment each time the weight of the load transported changes. ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTS ABROAD Cars with LED headlight do not need headlight adjustment when driving in countries with opposite traffic. Halogen headlights, if fitted on the car, are adjusted for driving in the country where the car was originally purchased. In this case, when travelling in countries with opposite driving direction, to avoid dazzling the drivers on the other side of the road, you need to cover areas of the headlight according to the Highway code of the country you are travelling in: fig. 40 (front right headlight), fig. 41 (front left headlight). during the day; where it is not compulsory, the use of daytime running lights is permitted. 25) Daytime running lights cannot replace dipped beam headlights while driving at night or through tunnels. The use of daytime running lights is governed by the highway code of the country in which you are driving. Comply with legal requirements. INTERIOR LIGHTS 40 F0S1223 41 F0S1224 WARNING 24) The daytime running lights are an alternative to the dipped headlights while driving during the daytime in countries where it is compulsory to have lights on FRONT CEILING LIGHT Switch fig. 42 can assume three different positions: (A) light always off; (B) the light turns on and off when the doors are opened or closed; (C) light permanently on. 42 F0S1114 WARNING Before getting out of the car, make sure that the switch is in the central position: ensure that lights are off with the doors closed in order to avoid draining the 12V battery. On some versions, the lights switch on and off only when the front driver side door is opened or closed. CEILING LIGHT TIMING Ignition Two different switching-on modes are provided: when the doors are unlocked, a timer will be activated for about 27 seconds; move the ignition device to STOP to activated a timed sequence of approximately 27 seconds. Switching off Three modes are provided for switching off: when all the doors are locked, a 10second timer is activated. This timing will stop when the ignition device is turned to the ENGINE position; locking of the doors: the interior lights are turned off after 15 minutes to preserve the 12V battery, even if the switch fig. 42 is in position (C). BOOT COURTESY LIGHT (where provided) The lamp comes on automatically when the boot is opened and goes out when it is closed. 41 KNOWING YOUR CAR WINDOW WASHING 26) 27) The right stalk controls windscreen and rear window wiper/washer operation. WINDSCREEN WIPERS WITH AUTOMATIC WIPING 8) 9) The ring (A) fig. 43 can be set to the following positions: Windscreen wiper off Automatic wiping - slow flick Automatic wiping - fast flick (according to the car speed) LO Constant slow flick HI Constant fast flick 43 F0S1237 10) With the ring nut (A) fig. 43 in position , the windscreen wiper is not activated. In position , the pause time between the strokes of the windscreen 42 wiper is 10 seconds, independently of the car speed. In position , the pause time between two strokes is set according to the car speed: when the speed increases, the time between two strokes decreases. In position LO or HI, the windscreen wiper moves continuously, i.e. without a pause between two strokes. When the car is stationary, if the windscreen wiper is active in the HI position, it automatically switches to LO continuous slow flick operation. Continuous fast flick can be reactivated by moving the ring to a position other than HI and then back into HI, or by moving the car. “Smart washing” function Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel (unstable position) to operate the windscreen washer. Keep the lever pulled to activate both the windscreen washer jet and the windscreen wiper with a single movement; the latter turns on automatically if you keep the lever pulled for more than half a second. The operation of the windscreen wiper terminates three flicks after the stalk is released; a final cleaning stroke several seconds later completes the wiping operation. With the ring nut turned to the LO or HI position, the smart washing function is not carried out. WARNING If the stalk is activated for less than half a second, only the screen washer jet is activated. Do not prolong the activation of the "Smart Washing" function for more than 30 seconds. MIST function Move the stalk upwards (unstable position) to activate the MIST function: operation is limited to the time for which the stalk is held in this position. When released, the stalk will return to its default position and the windscreen wiper automatically stop. NOTE This function does not activate the windscreen washer; windscreen washer fluid will not therefore be sprayed onto the windscreen. To spray windscreen washer fluid onto the windscreen, the washing function must be used. RAIN SENSOR (where provided) 10) 11) This is located behind the interior rear-view mirror fig. 44, in contact with the windscreen and can measure the amount of rain and, consequently, manage the automatic wiping mode of the windscreen in accordance with the amount of water on the screen. The rain sensor will be activated when the ignition device is ENGINE. If no rain is detected, the wiper will not carry out any strokes. If it is raining, the windscreen wiper moves according to the amount of rain measured by the sensor. 44 F0S1287 The device is able to recognise, and automatically adjust itself in the presence of the following conditions: presence of dirt on the surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.); presence of streaks of water caused by the worn windscreen wiper blades; difference between day and night. The rain sensor will be deactivated only when the ignition device is turned to STOP. WARNING Keep the glass in the sensor area clean. AUTOMATIC WIPING Automatic wiping can be selected by selecting the rain sensor from the display menu (see "Display screens" in the "Display" paragraph in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section) or on the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section) and turning the ring (A) fig. 43 in position or . These will be used to set the sensibility level of the rain sensor: in position , the sensor has a lower sensitivity and the windscreens will activate when there is a significant amount of water on the windscreen, while in position , the windscreen wipers will be activated by a minimum amount or measured rain. The activation of the automatic wiping will be notified to the driver by a single stroke. The same stroke will be visible every time the sensor sensitivity is increased, by rotating the ring nut from position to position . The "Smart Washing" function activates the normal washing cycle, after which the automatic wiping function is restored. The failure of the sensor is indicated by the symbol lighting up on the display. If the rain sensor malfunctions, the wiper mode can be modified according to the requirements. The malfunction signal remain active during the operation time of the sensor or until the device is reset. When the car is stationary, if the windscreen wiper is moving at maximum speed, it automatically moves to a reduced speed. HI mode can be reactivated by moving the ring to a different position from and then back or by moving the car. To deactivate automatic wiping, turn the ring (B) to a position other than or . This deactivation prevents unwanted activation of the wipers when the car is started (i.e. when the windscreen glass is being washed by hand or the wipers are stuck to the screen by ice). Inhibition Moving the ignition device switch to the STOP position, leaving the ring nut (A) in position or , when the car is next started (ignition device switch to the ENGINE position), no wiping cycle occurs for system protection reasons. This temporary inhibition prevents unwanted activation of the wipers when the car is started (i.e. when the 43 KNOWING YOUR CAR windscreen glass is being washed by hand or the wipers are stuck to the screen by ice). It is possible to reactivate the automatic wiping mode in three ways: by turning the ring to the position and then returning it to the or position; by moving the stalk upwards to the MIST position; upon exceeding the 5 km/h speed and the sensor detects rain. REAR WINDOW WIPER / WASHER This operates only with the ignition device at ENGINE. The ring (B) fig. 43 can be set to the following positions: Wiper off Intermittent wiping Continuous wiping Rear Window Wiper Turn the ring to (B) fig. 43 to operate the rear window wiper: continuous: when the ring is in position ; intermittent: when the ring is in position and the windscreen wiper wiper is stopped; synchronous: when the ring is in position and the windscreen wiper is moving or set to AUTO. In this mode, the rear window wiper makes one 44 stroke for each two strokes of the windscreen wiper; With the ring in position , the wiper active and reverse gear engaged, the wiper is activated in synchronous mode. With the ring in position , the rear window wiper is stopped. NOTE If automatic wiping mode is active and the sensor does not detect water, the rear window wiper will stays still when the ring is turned to position . Push the stalk towards the dashboard (rocking position) to activate the rear window washer jet. Keep pushing the lever to automatically activate both the rear window washer jet and the rear window wiper with a single movement. Releasing the stalk will activate three strokes, as described for the windscreen wiper. WARNING 26) If the window needs to be cleaned, make sure the device is turned off or the ignition device is in the STOP position. 27) Driving with worn windscreen/rear window wiper blades is a serious risk, because visibility is reduced in bad weather. IMPORTANT 8) Never use the screen wiper to remove layers of snow or ice from the windscreen glass. In such conditions, the wiper may be subjected to excessive stress and the motor cut-out switch, which prevents operation for a few seconds, may intervene. If operation is not restored, contact a Fiat Dealership. 9) Do not operate the windscreen wiper with the blades lifted from the windscreen. 10) Do not activate the rain sensor when washing the car in an automatic car wash. 11) Make sure the device is switched off if there is ice on the windscreen glass. PROGRAMMING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (where provided) The system provides two types of remote climate control system programming: timely start of the climate control system: this can be activated through the dedicated smartphone app (where provided). Refer to the "Connected Services - Uconnect Services" chapter in the "Multimedia" section. Programming of the climate control system with start time: This can be activated either through the dedicated smartphone app (where provided) or by programming a start time using the Uconnect™ system (see "ENGINE" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). Failed climate control system programming messages If the on-demand or programmed climate control system switch-on fails or ends early, dedicated messages will be displayed on the instrument panel display. How to use the climate control system programming functions Starting the climate control system Select the programming function on the dedicated app (where provided. Refer to the "Multimedia" section). The passenger compartment climate control system will remain active for 15 minutes unless the ignition device is pressed. This function can be activated twice after which it is necessary to turn the ignition device to ENGINE to allow turning on the climate control system app (where provided) on-demand again. If the ambient temperature is lower than 4.5 °C when the function is started, the electric defrosters (heated rear window, heated mirrors and heated windscreen where fitted) are also activated. Programming the climate control system with start time Select a time to start climate control system programming using the Uconnect™ system or the dedicated app (refer to the "Multimedia" section); the passenger compartment climate control system will remain active unless the ignition device is pressed; The on-demand starting and programming of the climate control system can be successful in the following conditions: Doors closed Bonnet closed Boot closed Hazard lights not active Alarm not active Adequate 12V battery state of charge Ignition device in the STOP position Transmission in P position If the start on-demand function has not been activated twice If the key is not inside the car (necessary condition for programming the climate control system with start time) How to start climate control system programming Select the programming function on the dedicated app (where provided. Refer to the "Multimedia" section) to start the climate control system ondemand or select an climate control system programming start time on the Uconnect™ system or dedicated app (refer to the "Multimedia" section). The doors of the car will lock, the climate control system programming will start and the car will go into ENGINE mode. If the climate control system is started on-demand, the car will remain in ENGINE mode for 15 minutes; if the climate control system is programmed to start at a certain time, the car will remain in ENGINE mode. NOTES In case of motor malfunction/fault, the climate control system programming will be disabled. For safety reasons, both when the climate control system is started ondemand or programmed with start time, the wipers are disabled when the function is active. For safety reasons, the windows are disabled when the climate control system is started ondemand. In case of activation of the climate control system on-demand, the sunroof and soft top are also disabled. 45 KNOWING YOUR CAR Two 15-minute cycles of climate control system operation are possible after which the ignition device must be turned to the ENGINE position to perform new start cycles. How to finish programming the climate control system without driving the car If the climate control system starts up on time, select the end of charging function on the dedicated app (where provided. Refer to the "Multimedia" section) or wait for the end of the start cycle (about 15 minutes). In case of programming the climate control system with start time, finish charging through the programming function on the dedicated app (where provided. Refer to the "Multimedia" section). CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM PASSENGER COMPARTMENT AIR DIFFUSERS Side air diffusers (A) fig. 45 - Fixed side air diffuser (driver and passenger side). 45 F0S1123 How to stop climate control system programming and drive the car Programming can be interrupted with time or start the climate control system on time by moving the ignition device to the START position. A dedicated message will appears on the instrument panel. 46 (B) - Adjustable side vents: 46 F0S1124 use device (C) to adjust the diffuser to the desired position (up / down / left / right); Central air vents (A) fig. 47 - Adjustable and directable central vents: use device (B) to adjust the diffuser to the desired position (up / down / left / right); 47 F0S1125 MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROLS ON THE CLIMATE CONTROL FRONT PANEL A 48 B C D E F G H I F0S1218 A. introduced air temperature up/down button B. climate control compressor on/off button C. air to feet button D. air to body button E. window demisting/defrosting button F. rapid window defrosting/demisting on/off button G. heated rear window on/off button H. internal air recirculation on/off button I. fan speed adjusting button 47 KNOWING YOUR CAR CONTROLS ON Uconnect™ 10.25" SYSTEM DISPLAY (where provided) 49 There are graphic buttons on the Uconnect™ system that let you turn on the functions described in this paragraph. 48 F0S1219 CONTROLS ON Uconnect™ 7" SYSTEM DISPLAY (where provided) Off 50 F0S2069 There are graphic buttons on the Uconnect™ system that let you turn on the functions described in this paragraph. 49 KNOWING YOUR CAR Description of the controls Air temperature adjustment Press the (A) fig. 48button: press downwards: decrease temperature; press upwards: temperature rise. By repeatedly pressing the (A) button upwards or downwards the HI (maximum air temperature) and LO (minimum air temperature) functions are switched on respectively. To turn these functions off, ask for a numerical air temperature. Air distribution selection You can manually set one of the following air distributions by pressing the (C), (D), (E), (F) fig. 48 buttons on the dashboard or the graphic buttons located on the Uconnect™ system display: Airflow at central and side dashboard vents to ventilate the chest during the hot season. Airflow to the front and rear footwell vents. This air distribution setting heats the passenger compartment most quickly, giving a prompt sensation of warmth. Air flow towards windscreen. Maximum windscreen defrosting. 50 You can select the combination of several modes by pressing the buttons in sequence. Fan speed adjustment Press button (I) to increase/decrease the fan speed: press downwards: decrease speed; press upwards: increase speed. The speed is displayed on the A/C screen of the Uconnect™ system. A specific fan level can be selected by pressing the button : maximum fan speed: all bars are lit up; minimum fan speed: one bar is lit up. Air recirculation The air recirculation can be switched on/off by pressing the button (H) fig. 48. WARNING The engagement of the recirculation system makes it possible to reach the required heating/cooling conditions faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days, or with low external temperatures, as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting up inside rapidly (especially if the climate control system is off). When the outside temperature is low, recirculation could be switched off (air drawn from the outside) to prevent the windows misting up. To guarantee good air quality inside the passenger compartment, every 15 minutes of recirculation, the system takes in air from outside for 1 minute and then returns to recirculation. Climate control compressor Press button (B) fig. 48 to activate/deactivate the compressor. Switching off the compressor remains stored even after the ignition device has been turned to the STOP position. WARNING With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower than the external temperature. Moreover, under certain environmental conditions, windows could mist up rapidly since the air is not dehumidified. Heated rear window demisting/defrosting Press button (G) fig. 48 to activate heated rear window demisting/defrosting. Whenever the ignition device switches to the START position, the function switches off automatically after approx. 10 minutes the first time it is activated. The following activations have a duration of 5 minutes. If this function is provided, pressing also activates the button demisting/defrosting of door mirrors and heated vents (where provided). WARNING Do not apply stickers to the inside of the heated rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage that might cause them to stop working properly. SWITCHING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM OFF/BACK ON Switching off the climate control system Press the A/C button (B) fig. 48. With climate control system off: air recirculation is on, thus isolating the passenger compartment from the outside; the compressor is off; the fan is off; the heated rear window can be activated/deactivated. Switching on the climate control system To turn the climate control system back on press the A/C button (B) fig. 48. HEATER The heater activates automatically depending on the environmental conditions and with ignition device in the START position. System maintenance 4) In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at least once a month for about 10 minutes. Before summer, have the system checked at a Fiat Dealership. OPERATING LIMITATIONS With the car in "SHERPA" or "TURTLE" mode, climate control limitations are automatically introduced to preserve the range. In "SHERPA" mode, the climate control system and the mirror and seat heater are deactivated (but can be manually reactivated, if necessary). The "TURTLE" mode: Range from 8 to 24 km: The heated rear window, mirrors, windscreen and seats are deactivated automatically (but can be reactivated manually, if necessary). Range lower than 8 km: The climate control system is deactivated, the fan and quick defrosting may be activated. The heated rear window, mirrors, windscreen and seats are deactivated automatically (but can be reactivated manually, if necessary). NOTE Some climate control system functions may be unavailable in “Turtle” mode, in which case the LEDs on the buttons of the climate control system controls will flash. IMPORTANT 4) The system uses R1234yf coolant, which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances use R134a and R12 fluids, which are incompatible with the components of the system. 51 KNOWING YOUR CAR AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROLS ON THE CLIMATE CONTROL FRONT PANEL 51 F0S1126 A. temperature up/down button B. AUTO function activation button (automatic operation) C. climate control compressor on/off button D. air to feet button E. air to body button F. window demisting/defrosting button G. rapid window defrosting/demisting on/off button H. heated rear window on/off button I. internal air recirculation on/off button L. climate control system on/off button M. fan speed adjusting button 52 CONTROLS ON Uconnect™ 10.25" SYSTEM DISPLAY (where provided) N Comfort 52 F0S1127 There are graphic buttons on the Uconnect™ system that let you turn on the functions described in this paragraph. 53 KNOWING YOUR CAR CONTROLS ON Uconnect™ 7" SYSTEM DISPLAY (where provided) Off 53 F0S2070 There are graphic buttons on the Uconnect™ system that let you turn on the functions described in this paragraph. 54 Description of the controls Description The automatic climate control system maintains comfort inside the passenger compartment and compensates for possible variations in outside weather conditions. The reference temperature is 22°C for optimal comfort management. The automatically controlled parameters and functions are: air temperature at the driver/front passenger side vents; air distribution at the driver/front passenger side vents; fan speed (continuous variation of the air flow); compressor engagement (for cooling/dehumidifying the air); air recirculation. All these functions can be adjusted manually by operating the system and selecting one or more functions and modifying their parameters. Manual selections always have higher priority than automatic settings and are stored until the AUTO button is pressed, except for cases in which the system intervenes for safety reasons. The following operations do not deactivate the AUTO function: recirculation on/off; compressor on/off, compatibly with environmental conditions; variation of set temperature; heated rear window activation/deactivation. The amount of air introduced into the passenger compartment is not affected by car speed; it is electronically controlled by a fan. The temperature of the air sent is always automatically controlled according to the temperature set on the display (except for when the system is off or in certain conditions when the compressor is not running). The system allows the following to be set or adjusted manually: air temperature; fan speed has 7 positions; air distribution; compressor enabling; rapid defrosting/ demisting function; air recirculation; heated rear window; system deactivation. Operating mode The climate control system can be activated in different ways: it is advisable to press the AUTO button and press the button (A) fig. 51 to set the desired temperatures. In this way the system operates completely automatically to adjust the temperature, quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the passenger compartment. It also manages the air recirculation system and the enabling the air conditioning compressor. During automatic operation, you can change the set temperatures, activate/deactivate the rear window, activate/deactivate the compressor and the recirculation at any time by using the relevant buttons; the system will automatically change the settings to adjust to the new requirements. In this way the climate control system will continue to automatically manage all functions except for those that have been manually adjusted. The fan speed is the same in all the zones of the passenger compartment. Air temperature adjustment Press the (A) fig. 51button: press downwards: decrease temperature; press upwards: temperature rise. By repeatedly pressing the (A) button upwards or downwards the HI (maximum air temperature) and LO (minimum air temperature) functions are switched on respectively. To turn these 55 KNOWING YOUR CAR functions off, ask for a numerical air temperature. Air distribution selection You can manually set one of the following air distributions by pressing the (D), (E), (F), (G) fig. 51 buttons on the dashboard or the graphic buttons located on the Uconnect™ system display: Airflow at central and side dashboard vents to ventilate the chest during the hot season. Airflow to the front and rear footwell vents. This air distribution setting heats the passenger compartment most quickly, giving a prompt sensation of warmth. Air flow towards windscreen. Maximum windscreen defrosting. You can select the combination of several modes by pressing the buttons in sequence. In AUTO mode, the climate control system automatically manages the air distribution. The air distribution, when manually set, is displayed on the Uconnect™ system A/C screen. 56 Fan speed adjustment Press button (M) to increase/decrease the fan speed: press downwards: decrease speed; press upwards: increase speed. The speed is displayed on the A/C screen of the Uconnect™ system. A specific fan level can be selected by : pressing the button maximum fan speed: all bars are lit up; minimum fan speed: one bar is lit up. WARNING To restore automatic control of the fan speed after a manual adjustment, press the AUTO button. AUTO button When the AUTO button is pressed the climate control system is automatically adjusted in the corresponding zones: quantity and distribution of the air introduced into the passenger compartment; climate control compressor; air recirculation; cancelling any previous manual settings. If a manual intervention is made on the air distribution or on the fan speed the climate control system is no longer controlling all functions automatically. To restore automatic system control after one or more manual adjustments, press the AUTO button. Air recirculation The air recirculation can be switched on/off by pressing the button (I) fig. 51. WARNING The engagement of the recirculation system makes it possible to reach the required heating/cooling conditions faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use it on rainy/cold days, or with low external temperatures, as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting up inside rapidly (especially if the climate control system is off). When the outside temperature is low, recirculation could be switched off (air drawn from the outside) to prevent the windows misting up. In automatic operation inside air recirculation will be controlled automatically by the system according to outside environmental conditions. Climate control compressor Press button (C) fig. 51 to activate/deactivate the compressor. Switching off the compressor remains stored even after the ignition device has been turned to the STOP position. To restore automatic control of compressor engagement, press again button (C) or the AUTO button (B) fig. 51. WARNING With the compressor off, air cannot be introduced to the passenger compartment with a temperature lower than the external temperature. Moreover, under certain environmental conditions, windows could mist up rapidly since the air is not dehumidified. Heated rear window demisting/defrosting Press button (H) fig. 51 to activate heated rear window demisting/defrosting. Whenever the ignition device switches to the START position, the function switches off automatically after approx. 10 minutes the first time it is activated. The following activations have a duration of 5 minutes. If this function is provided, pressing the button also activates demisting/defrosting of door mirrors and heated vents (where provided). WARNING Do not apply stickers to the inside of the heated rear window over the heating filaments, to avoid damage that might cause them to stop working properly. SWITCHING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM OFF/BACK ON Switching off the climate control system Press the OFF button (L) fig. 51. With climate control system off: air recirculation is on, thus isolating the passenger compartment from the outside; the compressor is off; the fan is off; the heated rear window can be activated/deactivated. The climate control system control unit stores the temperatures set before the system was switched off and restores them when any button of the system is pressed. Switching on the climate control system To switch on the climate control system in fully automatic mode press the AUTO button (B) fig. 51. HEATER The heater activates automatically depending on the environmental conditions and with ignition device in the START position. System maintenance 5) In winter, the climate control system must be turned on at least once a month for about 10 minutes. Before summer, have the system checked at a Fiat Dealership. OPERATING LIMITATIONS With the car in "SHERPA" or "TURTLE" mode, climate control limitations are automatically introduced to preserve the range. In "SHERPA" mode, the climate control system and the mirror and seat heater are deactivated (but can be manually reactivated, if necessary). The "TURTLE" mode: Range from 24 to 8 km: The heated rear window, mirrors, windscreen and seats are deactivated automatically (but can be reactivated manually, if necessary). Range lower than 8 km: The climate control system is deactivated, the fan and quick defrosting may be activated. The mirror, windscreen and seat heater 57 KNOWING YOUR CAR are deactivated (but can be manually reactivated, if necessary). NOTE Some climate control system functions may be unavailable in “Turtle” mode, in which case the LEDs on the buttons of the climate control system controls will flash. IMPORTANT 5) The system uses R1234yf coolant, which does not pollute the environment in the event of accidental leakage. Under no circumstances use R134a and R12 fluids, which are incompatible with the components of the system. ELECTRIC WINDOWS 28) 29) They work with the ignition device in the ENGINE position and for about three minutes after the ignition device has been turned to the STOP position. When one of the front doors is opened this operation is disabled. The electric window control buttons are located on the armrest of the door panel and activate fig. 54: (A) Opening/closing of the left window. (B) Opening/closing of the right window. 58 54 F0S1095 Press and hold the button for a few seconds and the window winds down automatically. Where provided, keeping the button raised for a few seconds, will automatically wind the window up. CLOSING WITH PASSIVE ENTRY (where provided) On some versions equipped with Passive Entry, pressing the door lock button (C) fig. 55 the windows close automatically as long as the lock button is pressed by the user. 55 F0S1177 WINDOW OPENING/CLOSING BY MEANS OF A KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL (where provided) On some versions, the windows can be opened/closed by holding the unlock ( ) / lock ( ) buttons pressed, respectively. ANTI-PINCH DEVICE (where provided) According to the versions, the car is equipped with an anti-pinch safety function for the raising of the front windows. This safety system can recognise the presence of any obstacle during the window closing movement. If this occurs, the system stops the window's movement and reverts it, depending on its position. This device is also useful if the windows are activated accidentally by children on board the car. The anti-pinch safety function is activated both during the manual and the automatic operation of the window. When the anti-pinch system is activated the window travel is immediately interrupted. Then the window stroke is automatically inverted. 30) ELECTRIC WINDOWS SYSTEM INITIALISATION If power supply is interrupted when the window is moving, the electric window automatic operation must be reinitialised. The initialisation procedure described below must be carried out with the doors closed and for each door: fully close the window to be initialised, with manual operation; after the window has reached the upper end of travel, hold the up button down for at least 3 seconds. WARNING by personal objects getting caught in the mechanism or by being hit by it directly. 29) When leaving the car, always set the ignition device in the STOP position and take the electronic key with you to avoid the risk of injury of people still on board due to accidental operation of the power windows. 30) If the anti-pinch protection intervenes three consecutive times in one minute or is faulty, the automatic closing operation of the window is inhibited, only allowing it in "steps"; the button is released for the subsequent manoeuvre. In order to restore the correct operation of the system, the respective window must be wound down. ROOF FIXED GLASS SUNROOF (where provided) The roof comprises a wide fixed glass panel and a manually-operated sunshade. The blind can be used in the "all closed" or "all open" positions. To open the blind, grab the handle, press the tooth (A) fig. 56 and move it to the completely open position. To close it, grab the grip and move the blind to the closed position until catch (A) is attached. A 56 F0S1269 SUNROOF (where provided) 31) 12) 13) 14) To move the sunshade, follow the instructions in “fixed glass roof”. Opening Press button (A) located near the front ceiling light pressed fig. 57, to move the roof to “vent” position. With the roof open in “vent” position, hold button (A) pressed again to move the roof to all open position. 28) Improper use of the electric windows can be dangerous. Before and during their operation, ensure that any passengers are not at risk from the moving glass either 59 KNOWING YOUR CAR after full closing, wait for the sunroof motor to stop. A 57 B F0S1330 Closing Press button (B) fig. 57 from the all open position: the front glass panel will move into the “vent” position. Press button (B) again to reach the all closed position of the roof. ANTI-PINCH DEVICE The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety system capable of detecting the presence of an obstacle whilst the roof is closing. When this happens, the system stops and the movement of the roof is immediately reversed. INITIALISATION PROCEDURE The sunroof must be reinitialised after disconnecting the 12V battery or if the corresponding protective fuse is blown. Proceed as follows: keep the button (B) fig. 57 pressed so that the roof closes completely in stages 60 EMERGENCY OPERATION If the electrical device for moving the roof fails, the sunroof can be moved manually proceeding as described below: WARNING 31) When leaving the car, make sure to take the key with you to avoid the risk of injury to those still inside the car due to accidental operation of the sunroof. Improper use of the roof can be dangerous. Before and during operation, always check that no-one is exposed to the risk of being injured by the moving sunroof or by objects getting caught or hit by it. IMPORTANT 58 F0S1331 for manual activation remove the protective cap (A) fig. 58 from its housing which is located on the internal covering behind the sunshade take the hex wrench provided from the tool bag in the boot insert the key provided into housing (B) fig. 58and turn it clockwise to open the roof or anticlockwise to close the roof. 12) You are advised to use the sunroof only at "vent" position if a transverse roof rack is fitted. 13) Do not open the sunroof if there is snow or ice on it: you may damage it. 14) Be careful not to hit objects on the roof rack when you open the tailgate. SOFT TOP SOFT TOP MOVEMENT (where provided) The cabrio versions are provided with an automatically actuated electric soft top. The soft top can be opened and closed using the controls inside the car located near the ceiling light or the remote control buttons. The soft top can also be closed using the "Passive Entry" system. The soft top can be automatically opened from the closed position to the spoiler position, and from this position to the all open position fig. 59. 59 F0S1268 Suggestions it is advisable to close the soft top when the car is parked. The closed soft top effectively protects the car from bad weather and from theft; it is advisable to put valuables in the boot and lock the lid even when the soft top is closed. 32) 33) 34) 15) 16) 17) WARNING The motor may overheat if the soft top is repeatedly operated within a short space of time, thus causing the overheating protection to inhibit system operation. Wait for a minute and repeat. Opening By pressing the button (A) located near the front fig. 60 ceiling light for more than half a second, the soft top will automatically move to the "spoiler" position (automatic opening). By pressing the button for a shorter time, the soft top will move "jerky" to the "spoiler" position (manual opening). With the soft top automatically open in “spoiler” position, hold button (A) pressed again to move the soft top to all open position. From the "spoiler" position until all open, only automatic movement is allowed. A 60 B F0S1317 Closing Press button (B) fig. 60 from the all open position, the soft top will move into the “spoiler” position. By pressing the button again (B) the soft top can be all closed for more than half a second (automatic closing). From the "spoiler" position, by pressing the button for a shorter time, the soft top will move "jerky" to the all closed position (manual closing). From the all open position to the "spoiler" position, only automatic movement is allowed. Opening the tailgate with top all open Press the tailgate opening button (F) fig. 61 once to automatically close the roof to spoiler position. The tailgate can be opened in spoiler position. 61 KNOWING YOUR CAR 61 F0S1102 OPERATION BY MEANS OF REMOTE CONTROL The remote control can only be used with the ignition device in the STOP position and the doors closed. The soft top can only be moved using the remote control when it is between the all closed position and the spoiler position. It is not possible to move the soft top if it is between the spoiler position and the all open position. Continuously pressing the button on the key, the roof opens and stops in any position when the button is released. WARNINGS The horizontal and vertical parts of the soft top can be operated at any speed lower than 100 and 80 km/h respectively. 62 The soft top can be operated at any temperature in the range from -18 to +80 °C. If required, remove the 12V battery with the soft top either open or closed, but NOT while it is moving. Do not fix roof racks to the soft top and do not travel with objects resting on the open top. The activation of the heated rear windscreen, upon request by the user, is carried out only if the soft top is completely closed. If the soft top is closed incorrectly, the heated rear window will not function and the corresponding warning light will not turn on. When the soft top is opened using the relevant control, if the heated rear windscreen had been engaged it is automatically deactivated and the warning light switches off Do not remove ice from the soft top with a sharp item. To prevent damage, do not use scrapers or sprays to remove ice from the heated rear window. Do not put objects on the soft top: they could fall if the it is operated, causing damage and injury. It is advisable to cover the soft top with a protective sheet if the car is left parked in the open for a long time. Do not keep the soft top folded for a long time: this could cause folds and creases in the fabric. Before moving the soft top, check that there is enough room to carry out the operation and that there are no obstacles or people close to its moving parts. The cooled air flow into the passenger compartment may decrease if the automatic climate control system is on and the soft top is not completely closed. With the soft top open and the car travelling, the voice recognition system may not recognise voice commands because of the background noise: with the soft top closed and at a high speed, the voice function for number dialling may not be recognised. ANTI-PINCH DEVICE The soft top has an anti-pinch safety system capable of detecting the presence of an obstacle during the closing movement: if this happens, the system intervenes and the movement of the soft top is immediately reversed into opening. After five consecutive activations of the anti-pinching function in one minute, the soft top must be recalibrated. For recalibration, see the "Initialisation procedure" paragraph. CLOSING WITH PASSIVE ENTRY (where provided) If the car is equipped with Passive Entry function, by pressing the door lock button (C) fig. 62 the soft top will close as long as the user holds down the lock button. WARNING The soft top can only be moved from "Passive Entry" when the soft top is between the all closed position and the spoiler position. It is not possible to move the soft top if it is between the spoiler position and the all open position. 62 take the key (A) fig. 63 provided and located in the boot in combination with the tool bag or the Fix&Go kit; A 63 fit the key in position, visible from inside the boot beneath the parcel shelf in the point shown in fig. 64; turn: clockwise to open the soft top; anticlockwise to close it. F0S1177 EMERGENCY OPERATION If the buttons fail, the soft top can be moved manually proceeding as described below: F0S1311 A 64 F0S1344 If the tailgate fails to open because the 12V battery is flat, or following a fault in the tailgate electric lock, perform the emergency tailgate opening procedure as described in the “Boot” chapter of the “Knowing your car” section, then manually move the soft top as described above. To restore the automatic movement conditions, apply to Fiat Dealership. INITIALISATION PROCEDURE The soft top must be reinitialised after disconnecting the 12V battery or if the corresponding protective fuse is blown. Proceed as follows: with the ignition device in the ENGINE position, keep the opening button pressed until the soft top is completely open; when the soft top is completely open, keep the button pressed for at least 2 seconds; keep the closing button pressed until the soft top is completely closed; once the all closed position has been reached, continue to press the button until the soft top makes a full opening and closing run. If the soft top is already initialized, the user can perform a new initialisation by the following steps: keep the opening button pressed until the soft top is completely open; when the soft top is completely open, keep the button pressed for at 63 KNOWING YOUR CAR least 30 seconds (to force the loss of initialisation); keep the closing button pressed until the soft top is completely closed; once the all closed position has been reached, continue to press the button until the soft top makes a full opening and closing run. WIND STOP The Wind Stop fig. 65 is designed to improve driving comfort, by reducing air turbulence in the passenger compartment when travelling with the soft top down. To use the Wind Stop fig. 65: re-position the backrest correctly; the Wind Stop is locked between the seat and parcel shelf. FRONT SPOILER The car is provided with a front spoiler which can be raised to improve aerodynamic comfort inside the passenger compartment. To lift the spoiler, release the catch by means of the slider (A) moving it to position (2) as shown in fig. 66 With the spoiler raised, take care not to move the slider (A) from position (1) to position (2). 1 2 66 64 F0S1319 F0S1318 Release the backrest of the rear seat (single or split). Attach the Wind Stop by inserting the central part inside the rear screen guard, with the concave part in the direction of the passenger, as shown in fig. 65; F0S1320 It is advisable to raise the spoiler when the horizontal segment of the top is open and at speeds faster than 50 km/h. With the top completely open, it is advisable to keep the spoiler lowered to limit wind noise inside the passenger compartment. Raising the spoiler will reduce the flow of air to the rear seats. WASHING/CLEANING THE SOFT TOP A 65 67 To lower the spoiler, press and move the slider to position fig. 67 to lock it once the slider’s catch is positioned inside its housing (1) fig. 66. 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25) Use of specific products is recommended for washing the soft top cloth. The soft top fabric is treated with a special water-repellent, waterproof product. The water-repellent properties will degrade in time with exposure to the weather elements. Observe the following instructions. Remove as much dirt from the surface of the soft top with a soft brush or vacuum cleaning before washing it. This operation will considerably improve the final result. In lack of specific products, use water and neutral soap applied with a sponge (preferably in the shade) for washing. Rinse the soft top with clean water after having eliminated all the stains. Hand washing is recommended; modern automatic washing systems equipped with soft brushes which do not apply excessive pressure and employ specific soft top products may be used. Leave the car in the shade after washing avoiding direct sunlight. Waterproofing the soft top Use specific waterproofing products for fabric soft tops. Interior soft top fabric Remove dust with a soft brush. Avoid using hard brushes made of synthetic material to prevent damaging the fabric beyond repair. Clean the surface with a microfibre cloth or soft sponge dipped in a solution of water and neutral soap. Clean the entire surface, including the zones where cleaning is not needed, to prevent staining. Use common, care mild stain removers that can be purchased from car cleaning product ranges to remove more stubborn stains. Apply by blotting (never rubbing) directly on the area of the stain. WARNING 32) Keep hands away from the top mechanism while opening and closing the top or if the top stops in a position before completing the cycle to prevent damage and injury. 33) Keep children away from the area in which the top is folding during opening or closing operations. 34) When leaving the car, turn the ignition device to STOP and always take the electronic key with you to avoid the risk of injury due to accidental operation of the soft top. Improper use may be dangerous. Before and during operation, always check that no-one is at risk of being injured by the moving soft top or by objects getting caught and dragged by it. 18) Bird droppings and plant resins must be washed off immediately and thoroughly from the soft top as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. 19) Never use high-pressure washing systems. 20) When using steam washers or high-pressure water washers, maintain a suitable distance and do not exceed a maximum temperature of 60°C. Damage, alterations and water infiltration may occur if the distance is too small and the pressure is too high. 21) If a water jet is used, direct away from the edges of the fabric and the rear window frame to prevent water infiltration. 22) Never use alcohol, petrol, chemical products, detergents, stain removers, wax, solvents and "wash and polish" products. 23) Rinse immediately to remove soap to prevent stains. Repeat the operation if needed. 24) Follow the instructions on the waterproofing product container for perfect results. 25) The rubber seals on the soft top must be cleaned exclusively with water. If you notice that this trim is dry or is sticking, apply talcum powder or products specifically for rubber trim (silicone spray). IMPORTANT 15) Never open the top in presence of snow or ice to prevent damage. 16) Do not place objects on the rear window shelf to prevent damage while the top is closing. 17) Loads may not be secured on the roof. 65 KNOWING YOUR CAR BOOT fig. 68 if a valid key is detected near the rear of the car. A handle (B) fig. 69 is provided inside the tailgate to make it easier to close. 35) 36) ELECTRIC HANDLE (SOFT TOUCH) The tailgate can be opened at any time if the doors are unlocked. To open it, enable the handle, opening one of the front doors or unlocking the doors with the remote control. Operate the electric handle (F) fig. 68 to open the tailgate. To release the lock with the remote control, press button . For cars with the Passive Entry system, even if the doors are locked, the boot can be opened using the electric handle (F) with a valid key detected near the rear of the car. To close, use the handle located inside the tailgate. If the tailgate is not shut properly the dedicated instrument panel or colour display warning light (where provided) will switch on. 68 F0S1102 Opening the tailgate with soft top all open Pressing the tailgate opening onetouch button (F) fig. 68 to automatically close the soft top to spoiler position. The tailgate can be opened in spoiler position. WARNING It is not possible to open the boot if the soft top has not been initialised. Carry out the soft top initialisation procedure as described in the section "Initialisation procedure" in the chapter "Soft top" in this section. CLOSING To close, lower the tailgate by pressing near the lock until you hear it click. For cars equipped with the Passive Entry system, the boot and all doors can be locked with the button (G) 66 69 F0S1332 EMERGENCY TAILGATE OPENING To open the tailgate from the inside if the 12V battery in the car is flat or the electric lock on the tailgate is faulty, proceed as follows: take out the rear head restraints; tilt the backrests; to unlock the tailgate mechanically, working from the inside of the boot, remove the protective yellow cap and then use lever (A) fig. 70. inside a special bag, placed in the boot. move the lever (B) fig. 73 leftwards as shown in the figure; WARNING 70 F0S1312 CARGO BOX (mode 2 cable and mode 3 cable) Cargo box for Mode 2 cable The car is equipped with a "Mode 2" 230 Volt AC (A) fig. 71 charging cable located inside a special box placed in the boot. 71 Cargo box for Mode 3 cable (optional) The car may be equipped with a "Mode 3" charging cable , located 35) Never exceed the maximum permitted load in the boot; see the “Technical specifications” section. Also make sure that the objects you place in the boot have been properly secured, to avoid them from being thrown forward consequent to sharp braking and injuring your passengers. 36) Be careful not to hit objects on the roof rack when you open the tailgate. BONNET 37) 38) 39) OPENING Proceed as follows: pull the lever (A) fig. 72 in the direction indicated by the arrow; F0S1265 72 F0S1129 73 F0S1146 raise the bonnet completely: the operation is facilitated by the presence of two gas springs which hold it the all open position. Do not tamper with the gas shock absorber and accompany the bonnet while lifting it. CLOSING To close, lower the bonnet to approximately 20 centimetres from the motor compartment then let it drop. Make sure that the bonnet is completely closed and not only fastened by the locking device by trying to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do not try to press the bonnet down but open it and repeat the procedure. IMPORTANT Always check that the bonnet is closed correctly to prevent 67 KNOWING YOUR CAR 68 it from opening while the vehicle is travelling. INTERIOR FITTINGS STORAGE COMPARTMENTS 40) WARNING 37) Be very careful not to allow scarves, neck ties and other loose articles of clothing from touching, even accidentally, any moving parts. This may cause the clothing to be pulled into the part, resulting in serious risk to the wearer. 38) For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed while driving. Therefore, make sure that the bonnet is properly closed and that the lock is engaged. If you discover that the bonnet is not perfectly closed while driving, stop immediately and close the bonnet in the correct manner. 39) Use both hands to lift the bonnet. Before lifting, check that the windscreen wiper arms are not raised from the windscreen, that the car is stationary and that the parking brake is applied. Lower compartment To open the bottom drawer, pull the lever (A) fig. 74. The flap opens down automatically. 75 74 F0S1130 SUN VISORS They are located at the sides of the interior rear-view mirror (fig. 75). They can be adjusted forwards and sideways. To direct the visor laterally, detach the visor from the interior rear-view mirror side support and turn it towards the side window. Courtesy mirrors are located on the back of the sun visors. F0S1131 WARNING On both sides of the passenger side sun visor there is a label advising that it is compulsory to deactivate the airbag if a rear facing child restraint system is fitted. Always comply with the instructions on the sun visor (see the "Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag" chapter in the "Safety" section). USB INPUT (where provided) The car can be equipped with three USB ports. The port located on the dashboard ((A) fig. 76) for data transfer to the Uconnect™ system and for charging external devices, the USB port inside the central console ((B) fig. 77) and on the dashboard, next to the smartphone holder (where provided) (D) fig. 78 for charging external devices only. WARNING After using a USB charging port, we recommend disconnecting the device (smartphone), always removing the cable from the port of the car first, never from the device. Cables left flying or connected incorrectly could compromise correct recharging and/or the USB socket condition. 76 F0S1137 77 F0S1132 NOTE The USB port handles data transmission from the Pen Drive/Smartphone, etc. and slow recharging of an external device, which is not guaranteed as it depends on the device type/brand. POWER SOCKET This is located on the central console and only works with the ignition device in the ENGINE position. To use it, open cap (C) fig. 77. On versions provided with "smoker's kit" optional equipment, the cigar lighter is fitted instead of the power socket. COMPARTMENT ON CENTRAL TUNNEL 79 F0S1133 In the central tunnel there is a storage compartment. To access it, grab the handle (A) fig. 79 and push the cover back. A second USB port is provided inside the compartment on some versions. D WARNING Do not connect devices with power higher than 180W to the socket. Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable adaptors. 78 F0S1228 69 KNOWING YOUR CAR FRONT ARMREST (where provided) the control mutes the system, a long press turns it off. (B) - e-MODE. push or pull the lever to select the different driving modes (NORMAL, RANGE, SHERPA). 81 80 F0S1134 F0S1328 There may be an armrest with integrated storage compartment between the front seats. To access the compartment, pull the lever upwards (A) fig. 80 and lift the armrest. CUP HOLDERS / CANS AND HOLDERS On the central tunnel there are two cup/can holders, a retractable one on the front part of the armrest ((A) fig. 81) and one on the back ((B) fig. 82). To access the front cup holder/can holder open the door using the handle (A) fig. 81. 83 82 F0S1135 There is also a storage compartment on the back (C) fig. 82. SMARTPHONE MOUNT (CRADLE) (where provided) There is a mount (A) fig. 84 on the dashboard for your smartphone; always use it in order to interact with your smartphone safely. VOLUME AND "e-MODE" ADJUSTMENT CONTROLS There are the following controls (fig. 83) on the central console: (A) - VOL: Turn the wheel up or down to turn volume up or down of the Uconnect™system. A short press on A 84 70 F0S1136 F0S1210 WIRELESS CHARGING SYSTEM– WCPM (Wireless Charge Pad Module) (where provided) The wireless charger system is activated automatically when a mobile phone Qi® standard compatible is placed in the storage compartment (A) in fig. 85 on the central tunnel. 85 F0S1138 If the mobile phone is removed from the housing during the wireless charging phase, this will automatically be interrupted. The wireless charging system is enabled when the car is in running condition and the vehicle battery is sufficiently charged. By interacting with the wireless charger system and placing the mobile phone in the specific housing, the user will be informed by means from LED (A) fig. 86indicating the state of the wireless charging system: "Your phone is being charged" blue LED: this is displayed when the mobile phone is positioned correctly in the wireless charging compartment and the system is activated correctly; "Phone fully charged" green LED: this is displayed when the phone has completed charging its battery (if suitable to transmit the information); "Object not allowed" red LED: this is displayed when a phone that is not enabled for wireless charging or an object that is not permitted (e.g. the ignition key) is placed (e.g. ignition key, credit card, a coin); "System error" red LED: this appears when there is a malfunction in the wireless charger system; "System not active" LED off: there are no objects in the compartment and/or the ignition device of the car in the OFF position and/or the doors are not all closed correctly and the motor is not on. progress after having placed the phone in the charging compartment. Correct positioning of the mobile phone To start charging wirelessly correctly, make sure your mobile phone is positioned completely within the green dotted area in fig. 86 with the display facing up and that the device does not cover the alert LED (A). Correct positioning: see fig. 87 (the LED identifies the positioning limit of the device); incorrect positioning: see fig. 88; 86 F0S1360 WARNING Do not place contactless cards (RFID), credit cards or metal objects in the charging compartment. WARNING Not all mobile phone covers guarantee the correct charging of the phone. Check that charging is in 71 KNOWING YOUR CAR ROOF RACK/SKI RACK WARNING 41) 42) 43) 26) 27) 87 F0S1361 FASTENERS The fasteners are located in the zone indicated in fig. 89. Two use the attachments, two threaded nuts (A) are provided, which can be reached when the door is open. 41) Fully comply with the regulations in force concerning maximum clearance. Never exceed the maximum permitted loads (see "Technical specifications" section). 42) Evenly distribute the load and take into account, when driving, the increased responsiveness of the car to side wind. After travelling for a few kilometres, check to ensure that the fixing screws for the attachments are well tightened. 43) Before driving, make sure that the transversal bars have been fitted properly. IMPORTANT 88 F0S1362 WARNING 40) Do not travel with the storage compartments open: they may injure the front seat occupants in the event of an accident. 72 89 F0S1336 WARNING Follow the instructions contained in the assembly kit carefully. Assembly must be performed by qualified personnel. WARNING Travelling with the rack/ski rack fitted impacts on the life of the high-voltage battery. 26) The use of transversal roof bars prevents the use of the sunroof, because the latter, while opening, interferes with the bars. Therefore do not move the sunroof if transversal bars have been fitted. 27) The maximum load on the roof rack is 50 kg. RED SPECIAL SERIES (where provided) Some components of the car underwent antimicrobial treatments, as detailed below. No specific precautions are required for the normal use of the car and components treated with biocide substances. The boot mat was treated with a biocide substance having antiviral properties based on the active ingredient Silver Chloride. The seat fabrics were treated with a biocide substance having antiviral and antibacterial properties based on the active ingredient Alkyl (C12-C16) Dimethylbenzyl Ammonium Chloride. The steering wheel upholstery was treated with biocide substances having antibacterial and antifungal properties based on the active ingredients Zinc Pyrithione and Thiabendazole. The air cleaner of the climate control system was treated with a biocide substance having antibacterial and antiviral properties based on the active ingredient Dimethyltetradecyl[3(trimethoxysilyl)propyl]ammonium chloride. 73 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 74 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL This section of the handbook provides all information that is useful for getting to know, interpreting, and using the instrument panel correctly. INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES.................................. 75 DISPLAY ..................................... 76 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................ 84 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES B B A A D 90 C F0S1070 A. Warning lights B. Engaged gear, seat belt status and status of driver assistance and active safety systems notification area C. Speedometer D. Multi-function dial indicator: speedometer and driver assistance system indication 75 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAY MAIN SCREEN A B D OFF I L H D G 91 C F E F0S1071 The main screen fig. 91 shows the following information: A. Driving assistance system in operation indicator B. Traffic sign and speed limit indicator C. Driving style indicator D. Signalling symbols E. Distance travelled indicator F. Compass G. Temperature indicator H. Warning symbols I. High-voltage battery state of charge and range 76 A - Driving assistance and active safety system notifications This position displays the status icons of the various functions (where provided), such as ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control), AEB Control (Autonomous Emergency Brake Control) or Lane Control, active safety systems, such as ESC (Electronic Stability Control), TSR (Traffic Sign Recognition) and ISA (Intelligent Speed Assist) and thumbnails of the driving aid systems. Refer to the "Starting and Driving" section for more information about driving assistance systems. Refer to the "Safety" section for more information about active safety devices. B - High-voltage battery charge state of charge and range A 92 B F0S1072 In this position the state of charge of the high-voltage battery is indicated by a percentage and a vertical bar of height proportional to the state of charge of the battery (A) fig. 92. Both indications are coloured according to the state of charge: range greater than 24 km: blue range between 24 km and 16 km: yellow range lower than 16 km: red When charging via a power socket, the vertical bar is coloured green and the symbols and (B) fig. 92 appear. The height of the vertical bar is proportional to the state of charge of the battery. The estimated remaining range is indicated by a numerical value (in km or miles, depending on the display settings) and an indicator that indicates any changes in expected range: by means of an up arrow and a blue bar if the current driving style increases the range; by means of a down arrow and a red bar if the current driving style decreases the range. In case the driving style does not change the range, no graphic signals are displayed. C - Failure icons All failure icons are displayed in this position. In case of multiple failures, the display will be in succession. D - External temperature The external temperature is displayed in °C or °F depending on the display settings. Notifications bar The lower part of the display is reconfigurable via the display menu. The following information can be displayed on the left hand side: external temperature (default setting), time, date, compass (where provided) and car speed repeat (where provided). In the centre zone: odometer (default setting), Audio information (where provided), Phone information (where provided), time, external temperature, date, compass (where provided) and car speed repetition (where provided). 77 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 78 On the right side: time (default setting), odometer, external temperature, date, compass (where provided), car status (ON, OFF, RUN). E - Multifunctional dial indicator and driving assistance system notifications A (B): Alternative display of the state of charge indicator and charging conditions of the high-voltage battery. B B A C 70 94 km/h 93 F0S1075 km/h F0S1074 The following are displayed in this position: (A) fig. 93The current speed and whether one of the speed control systems (Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, Traffic Sign Recognition and Intelligent Speed Assist) is active. The round bar also provides visual signals for particular states of the selected speed control system. Refer to the "Starting and Driving" section for more information about driving assistance systems. Pressing and releasing the controls on the steering wheel / will open an alternative display that indicates the driving mode instead of speed. The driving style is indicated in real-time by a cursor that can be positioned in the following areas (see fig. 94): (A) "CHARGE": regeneration mode. (B) "ECO": energy-saving driving. (C) "POWER": more energy-efficient performance driving. F - "Compass (where provided) For versions with Uconnect™ system with integrated navigator, in position (F) fig. 91 the direction the car is travelling in is shown in real-time. G - Speedometer The instantaneous speed of the car (in km/h or mph) is displayed in this position, which can also be displayed at the top of the display. H - Odometer Kilometres or miles travelled (depending on the display settings) are displayed in position (H) fig. 91. I - Amber notification or failure indication icons The amber notification icons (e.g. brake pedal pressure request) or failure signal icons are displayed in succession (in case of several notifications) in position (I) fig. 91. L - Energy management Through the display customisation functions (see "Display Settings" section), the energy management can be displayed on the graduated scale (L) fig. 91: "POWER": the left side of the indicator turns orange in proportion to the power required by the electric motor. "CHARGE": the right side of the indicator turns turquoise in proportion to the amount of regeneration of the high-voltage battery. "ECO": the indicator turns orange and turquoise to indicate energy-saving driving. M - Gear engaged notifications, headlight alignment and SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) In position (M) fig. 91 the following information is displayed: driving mode ("NORMAL", "RANGE", "SHERPA"); gear engaged (D, N, R, P); headlight alignment; electrical system readiness at startup ("READY") warning; SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system notifications. Refer to the “SBR system” chapter in the “Safety” section for more information. N - TSR and ISA system indication (where provided) Traffic Signal Recognition (TSR) speed limit alerts set on the Intelligent Speed Assist (ISA) system are shown in position (N) fig. 91. O - Cruise Control / Adaptive Cruise Control / Speed Limiter / Intelligent Speed Assist target speed setting (where provided) The desired speed signal, set on Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control, Speed Limiter and Intelligent Speed Assist systems is displayed in position (O) fig. 91. CONTROL BUTTONS These are located on the left side of the steering wheel fig. 95. They can be used to scroll through the display screens. DISPLAY PAGES You can navigate through the following main and detail screens using the controls on the left side of the steering wheel: Screenshot list Main screen 95 By pressing and releasing / the user can choose to display: the multifunction dial indicator showing the speed of the car or: the use of motor power or the state of charge of the high-voltage battery F0S1139 / : Press and release the buttons to access the main menu and to scroll the menu and the submenus rightwards or leftwards. After selecting the desired screen, press the or button to access any detail screens. OK: Press the button to interact with the screens. Press the button once to confirm your selection. Hold the button pressed for 1 second to reset the displayed/selected functions. Trip A/B / Press and release Trip A Trip B / : Driver assist Vehicle info Press and release / : Tyre pressure Service (scheduled servicing) Audio repeat Phone repeat Repeat navigation 79 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Recorded messages / Tutorials Settings In the case of multiple screens, indicates the presence of screens to the right and/or left of those displayed. It is possible to navigate between the pages by pressing arrows or the dots on the / the page. Trip computer The "Trip computer" page (fig. 96) can be used to view several parameters relating to the operational status of the car. This function has two separate memories, "Trip A" and "Trip B", where the data for the car's "complete journeys" (trips) is recorded independently from each other. Press the or button to switch from "Trip A" to "Trip B" and vice versa. 96 F0S1077 The screen can be used to show the following items: "Current consumption", "Average consumption", "Distance", "Average speed", "Travel time". The sizes are displayed in "km"/"mi" and "km/h"/"mph" depending on the display settings. Both values can be reset: press and hold down the OK button on the steering wheel. NOTE The total consumption cannot be reset. The instantaneous consumption bar can take the following colours depending on energy consumption: Orange: very high consumption; Yellow: high consumption; Light green: low consumption; Dark green: very low consumption. Driver assist The screenshot shows messages and visual indication of the status of the 80 following driving aid systems in area (A) fig. 97: CC (Cruise Control) Co-Driver with Follow to Stop or CoDriver with Stop&Go; Lane Control; TSR (Traffic Sign Recognition); ISA (Intelligent Speed Assist). As more recent notifications are shown, previous notifications are overwritten. 97 F0S1078 For some driving assistance devices, pop-up warnings are marked in yellow or red at the bottom of the screen depending on the type of warning (B) fig. 98. 106 km/h D 75 % POWER 216 km RANGE 23° C 98 123456 km F0S1266 Refer to the "Starting and Driving" section for more information about driving assistance systems. Vehicle info The screen shows the following information: Tyre pressure Service (scheduled servicing) Press the or button to switch between the "Tyre pressure" screen and the "Service" screen. Audio repeat (where provided) This screen repeats the audio playback information shown on the Uconnect™ system: FM/DAB radio; Media (USB, Bluetooth®); Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, Baidu Carlife. Refer to the "Multimedia" section for more information. Phone repeat (where provided) This screen repeats the information displayed on the Uconnect™ system while interacting with a paired phone (see example screen in fig. 99). The following information is shown: Call status; connected phone status (battery state of charge, network reception, incoming/outgoing call notification, received text messages notification); recent call list. The system stores the last 10 received messages marked "read" or "unread". The user can select the desired message using the steering / and open it by wheel controls pressing the OK button on the steering wheel. Repeat navigation (where provided) This screen repeats the instructions provided by the Uconnect™ system navigator. The display can be pictogram or map. Refer to the "Multimedia" section for more information. Recorded messages This screen displays the recorded messages and pop-ups previously displayed by the user (fig. 100). (A) Symbol (where provided) (B) Message % 100 99 F0S1083 Refer to the "Multimedia" section for more information. F0S1085 Tutorials The Tutorials function is available on the car to obtain essential information on some of its features. The Tutorials also provides tips in the form of popups shown on the instrument panel display during the journey. 81 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 82 By selecting the corresponding icon in the instrument panel menu, you can access an environment where the user will be able to: activate/deactivate the display suggestions; the activation/deactivation is done by ticking the item corresponding to the type of suggestions you want to receive from the system; view stored suggestions: selecting this item will allow you to view the suggestions previously proposed to the user while driving; view in-depth information (not available with the car in motion): through this menu you will be able to consult the in-depth information on the functions available on board. Settings This screen allows you to customise the displays and notifications on the display and the various functions of the car. NOTE The tachograph components are illustrated below. The menus may vary depending on the equipment of the car. NOTE Some settings may be managed using the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). Display Screen settings: Setting the displays at the top of the display. Electric vehicle settings: "READY" pop-up display, power/recharge indicator display, motor start tones. "User's Guide" display: enable/disable. Language: this sets the display language. Screen brightness (on 8 levels). Automatic Trip B reset: enable/disable. Phone Repeat: enable/disable. Repeat navigation: map/ pictograms/disable. Units of measurement: metric/ imperial. Customisable sizes: Speed, Distance, Consumption, Pressure, Temperature. Date and Time Time adjustment. Format adjustment: 12 hours/24 hours. Date setting. Safety Passenger airbag: enable/disable. Speed alarm: volume adjustment. SBR (Seat Belt Reminder): enable/disable. Brakes Hold'n Go: enable/disable. Brake maintenance: electric parking brake EPB engagement. Auto Park Brake: enable/disable electric parking brake automatic engagement. Safety and Assistance Acoustic alert volume: off, low level, medium level, high level. Lane Control alert volume: early, medium, delayed. Lane Control strength: low, medium, high. Intelligent Speed Limiter: confirmation, automatic. Traffic Sign Assist: enable, disable. Traffic Sign Assist alert: off, visual, visual and acoustic. New speed limit zone detection: off, visual, visual and acoustic. Autonomous Emergency Brake Control (AEB): off/active braking only/active braking with alert. Autonomous Emergency Brake Control (AEB) sensitivity: near/medium/far. Park Assist: acoustic, acoustic and visual. Volume Rear Park Assist: near, medium, far. Attention Assist warning: enable, disable. Mirrors and windscreen wipers Rain sensor: enable, disable. Lights Dipped beam sensitivity: 1 to 3. Follow me Home: 0, 30, 60, 90 seconds. Automatic main beam: enable, disable. DRL (Daytime Running Lights): enable, disable. Cornering lights: enable, disable. Dipped beam auto power off: enable, disable. Doors & Locks Automatic locking: enable, disable. Automatic unlock on exit: enable, disable. Dipped beam when closing: enable/disable. Remote door unlocking: all doors, driver doors. Passive Entry: enable, disable. Scheduled charging Programming settings: list of days of the week. Passive Entry: list of days of the week. Activate programming: yes, no. Power level setting: 1 to 5. Start pairing process: start the procedure. Engine shutdown procedure: start the procedure. 83 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 84 WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES GENERAL WARNINGS WARNING Warning lights are accompanied by a specific message and/or sound when implemented on the instrument panel. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Handbook, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this section in the event of a failure indication. WARNING The failure indicators appearing on the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious failures. Serious faults are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious faults are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the malfunction is eliminated. WARNING LIGHTS ON INSTRUMENT PANEL Red warning lights Warning light What it means SEAT BELTS REMINDER The warning light switches on constantly with the car stationary and the driver's side or passenger side seat belt (when the passenger is present) not fastened. The warning light will flash and a buzzer will sound if the car is in motion and the front seat belts are not correctly fastened. For permanent deactivation of the acoustic signal (buzzer) of the SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system contact a Fiat Dealership. The system can be reactivated at any time using the Setup Menu. AIRBAG FAILURE The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light stays on constantly if there is a fault in the airbag system. On some versions the display shows the dedicated message. 44) 45) ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE / LOW BRAKE FLUID / ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE APPLIED The warning lights switch on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it should switch off after a few seconds. Electric parking brake failure The warning light flashes in conjunction with the yellow symbol fails. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. when the electric parking brake Low brake fluid level The warning light flashes together with the yellow symbol when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level, possibly due to leaks in the circuit. On some versions the display shows the dedicated message. 46) 85 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Warning light What it means Electric parking brake on The warning light switches on when the parking brake is engaged. On certain versions, if the car is moving the acoustic warning will also sound. WARNING If the warning light turns on while driving, check that the parking brake is not engaged. ELECTRIC POWER STEERING FAILURE The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it should switch off after a few seconds. If the warning light stays on, on some versions along with a dedicated message on the display, you may not have power steering and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be notably increased; steering is, however, possible. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership. If the warning light switches on while driving (on some versions, together with a dedicated message on the display) you may not have steering assistance. Although it will still be possible to steer the vehicle, the effort needed to operate the steering wheel could be increased: contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. WARNING In some circumstances, factors independent of the electric power steering could cause the warning light on the instrument panel to switch on. In this case, stop the car immediately (if you are moving), stop the motor for about 20 seconds (taking the ignition device to the STOP position) and then restart the motor ("READY" status). If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat Dealership. WARNING The steering must be initialised after disconnecting the 12V battery. The warning light turns on to indicate this. To carry out this procedure, slowly turn the steering wheel all the way from one end to the other or drive in a straight line for about a hundred metres. Amber warning lights Warning light What it means ESC SYSTEM The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it should switch off after a few seconds. ESC system activation Flashing of the warning light while driving indicates the intervention of the ESC system. 86 Warning light What it means ESC system failure If the warning light does not switch off or stays on while driving, on some versions along with a dedicated message on the display, contact a Fiat Dealership. Hill Holder failure This warning light switches on, on some versions together with a dedicated message on the display, in the event of a Hill Holder system failure. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. PARTIAL / TOTAL DEACTIVATION OF ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS The turning on of the warning light indicates that some safety systems have been partially deactivated by a driver's request. REAR FOG LIGHT The warning light switches on when the rear fog light is turned on. ABS FAILURE The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light comes on, on some versions along with a dedicated message on the display, when the system is inefficient or not available. In this case the braking system maintains its efficiency unaltered but without the advantage of the ABS system. Drive carefully and contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. iTPMS (where provided) Low tyre pressure The warning light switches on constantly to indicate that the tyre pressure is lower than the recommended value, in order to guarantee long tyre life and optical electrical energy consumption, or to indicate a slow loss of pressure. In this way the iTPMS warns the driver that one or more tyres may be flat and probably punctured. In this case it is advisable to restore the correct pressure value. Once the normal operating conditions of the car are restored, carry out the Tyre reset procedure. WARNING Do not continue driving with one or more flat tyres as handling of the car may be compromised. Stop the car, avoiding sharp braking and steering. 87 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Warning light What it means iTPMS failure/iTPMS temporarily deactivated The warning light flashes for about 75 seconds and then stays on constantly (along with a dedicated message on the display) to indicate that the system is temporarily deactivated or faulty. The system goes back to normal operation when the operating conditions allow it. If this is not the case, carry out the Tyre reset procedure after restoring the normal operating conditions. If the malfunction warning persists, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 47) 48) Green Warning Lights Warning light What it means SIDE/TAIL LIGHTS AND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS/FOLLOW ME HOME Side/tail lights and dipped beam headlights The warning light switches on when the side/tail lights or dipped headlights are turned on. Follow Me Home The warning light comes on, on some versions along with a dedicated message on the display, when the "Follow me home" device is used. LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved downwards or, together with the right indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed. RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR The warning light turns on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved upwards or, together with the left indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed. AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS This warning light comes on when the automatic main beam headlights are activated. 88 Blue warning lights Warning light What it means MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS The warning light switches on when the main beam headlights are turned on. Warning All warning lights flashing Message to have the warning light checked What it means DISPLAY FAILURE In the event of an instrument panel display failure, all of the warning lights flash. CONTROL SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT FAILURE A control system warning light failure is indicated by a message on the instrument panel display. WARNING warning light does not switch on or stays on whilst driving when the ignition device is turned to ENGINE, a failure may have 44) If the occurred in the restraint systems. In this case the airbags or pretensioners may not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower number of cases, they may be deployed accidentally. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. 45) A failure of the warning light is indicated by the symbol appearing on the display or by the warning light blinking, depending on the version. In this case, the warning light may not indicate a possible problem with the airbag restraint system. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. 46) If the warning light turns on when travelling (on certain versions together with the message on the display) stop the vehicle immediately and contact Fiat Dealership. 47) If the system signals a pressure drop on a specific tyre, it is recommended to check the pressure on all four tyres. The iTPMS does not relieve the driver from the obligation to check the tyre pressure every month; it is not to be considered a system to replace servicing or a safety system. Tyre pressure must be checked with tyres cold. Should it become necessary for whatever reason to check pressure with warm tyres, do not reduce pressure even though it is higher than the prescribed value, but repeat the check when tyres are cold. 48) The iTPMS cannot indicate sudden tyre pressure drops (for example when a tyre bursts). In this case, stop the car, braking with caution and avoiding abrupt steering. The system only warns that the tyre pressure is low: it is not able to inflate them. Insufficient tyre inflation increases electrical energy consumption, reduces the tread duration and may affect your ability to drive safely. 89 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING SYMBOLS Red Symbols Symbol What it means DOORS/BONNET/BOOT OPEN The symbols on the display switches on, together with a dedicated message, on some versions, when one or more doors, the tailgate or the bonnet are not properly closed. An acoustic warning is also emitted with the doors open and the car in motion. DOOR FAILURE The symbol switches on in the failure to the front door locking system. Contact a Fiat Dealership. AIRBAG FAILURE The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light stays on constantly if there is a fault in the airbag system. On some versions the display shows the dedicated message. 44) 50) VEHICLE CHARGING PROCEDURE FAILURE This symbol is shown on the instrument panel display, with the vehicle stationary, in the case of a fault during the high-voltage battery charging procedure. failures in the charging system, in this case disconnect and then reconnect the charging cable to the charging socket or, in the case of charging at a public charging station, look for another power supply point. If the symbol and the message on the display continue to be displayed, contact the Fiat Dealership. failures in the public charging station (because it may have been deactivated or there may be a failure). We recommend that you try charging your car at another public charging station. If the symbol and the message on the display continue to be displayed, contact the Fiat Dealership. HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY FAILURE The symbol appears on the instrument panel display in case of high-voltage battery failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership. 90 Symbol What it means LOW HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY CHARGE The symbol appears on the instrument panel display in case of state of charge of the high-voltage battery. Contact a Fiat Dealership. 12V BATTERY CHARGING CONDITIONS / DC-DC CONVERTER FAILURE / LOGISTICS MODE ACTIVATED / POWER SUPPLY MODE The symbol lights up if the 12V battery and/or DC-DC converter fails to charge. Contact a Fiat Dealership. ELECTRIC SYSTEM FAILURE The symbol appears on display of the instrument panel in case of electrical system failure. The display will also show a dedicated message. Contact a Fiat Dealership. PERFORMANCE LIMITATION The symbol is shown on the instrument panel display if the acceleration of the car is limited due to a reduction in electric motor performance. If the symbol remains on while driving, contact a Fiat Dealership. The heated seats will be switched off, if they are on. To switch them back on, press button again. NOTE If the automatic dual-zone climate control system is turned on, it will be turned off automatically. ATTENTION ASSIST SYSTEM INTERVENTION The symbol appears on display of the instrument panel if the Attention Assist system is activated. The system, after estimating the driver’s drowsiness level, through specific events, suggests to the driver to stop for a break, because continuing driving is risky. Stop to pause while driving, pulling the car over in safe conditions. EU eCall SYSTEM FAILURE Switching on the symbol and/or a dedicated message indicates a failure in the EU eCall system. In this case, an emergency call cannot be made. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the system repaired. EU eCall SYSTEM BATTERY FAILURE Switching on the symbol and/or a dedicated message indicates a failure of the EU eCall system battery or a low state of charge of the battery. In the first case, it will not be possible to make the emergency call, while in the second case the data transmission or connection may be subject to limitations. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the system repaired. 91 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Symbol What it means TRANSMISSION FAILURE The warning light switches on when the ignition device is brought to the ENGINE position but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light comes on flashing, along with a dedicated message on the display and an acoustic warning, to indicate transmission failure. Amber symbols Symbol What it means EXTERNAL LIGHTS FAILURE The symbol switches on to indicate a failure on the following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs); parking lights; side/tail lights; direction indicators; rear fog light; reversing light; number plate lights; stop lights. The anomaly may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown protection fuse or an interruption of the electrical connection. BRAKE FAILURE The symbol illuminates together with the red warning light failure or low brake fluid level. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. flashing in the event of a brake system ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE FAILURE The symbol comes on in case of an electric parking brake failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. PARKING SENSOR FAILURE (where provided) The symbol is shown on the display together with a dedicated message if there is a fault in the parking sensors. RAIN SENSOR FAILURE The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the rain sensor. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 92 Symbol What it means AUTOMATIC MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE The symbol switches on to report a failure of the automatic main beam headlights. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION SYSTEM FAILURE (where provided) The symbol comes on, on some versions together with a message, in the event of Traffic Sign Recognition system failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKE CONTROL (AEB) SYSTEM DEACTIVATION The symbol switches on if the Autonomous Emergency Brake Control (AEB) system has been deactivated or if the system is obstructed/dirty/unavailable. BLIND SPOT ASSIST FAILURE The symbol lights up in case of failure of the Blind Spot Assist device. Contact a Fiat dealership as soon as possible to have the failure repaired. LANE CONTROL FAILURE The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the Lane Control device. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated. POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD The symbol turns on when the external temperature falls to or below 3°C. WARNING In the event of external temperature sensor failure, the digits that indicate the value are replaced by dashes. FIAT CODE SYSTEM FAILURE The symbol switches on to indicate a failure of the Fiat CODE system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. BREAK-IN ATTEMPT The symbol switches on when the ignition device is moved to the ENGINE position, along with the displaying of a dedicated message, to report about a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system. 93 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Symbol What it means SERVICE (SCHEDULED SERVICING) EXPIRED When the scheduled servicing is nearly due ("scheduled service deadline"), the display will show the symbol followed by the number of kilometres/miles until the car must be serviced. This is displayed automatically, with ignition device at ENGINE, when there are 2000 km (or equivalent value in miles) left before servicing or, for some markets, 30 days left before servicing. It is also displayed whenever the ignition device is turned to ENGINE or, for some markets, every 200 km (or equivalent value in miles). Go to a Fiat Dealership, where the "Service Schedule" operations will be performed and the message will be reset. ATTENTION ASSIST SYSTEM FAILURE The symbol lights up in case of failure of the Attention Assist device. Contact a Fiat dealership as soon as possible to have the failure repaired. AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE The symbol switches on to report a failure of the sound system. INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST / SPEED LIMITER FAILURE The symbol switches on in the case of failure of the Intelligent Speed Assist or of the Speed Limiter device. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) FAILURE (where provided) The symbol lights up to indicate a failure of the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership. AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKE CONTROL (AEB) SYSTEM FAILURE The warning light switches on to alert the driver that the Autonomous Emergency Brake Control (AEB) system is not active due to sensor failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership. KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO SYSTEM FAILURE The symbol switches on in the event of Keyless Enter-N-Go system failure. HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY DISCONNECTED The symbol lights up to indicate that the high-voltage battery is disconnected from the system. Contact a Fiat Dealership. 94 Symbol What it means DUSK SENSOR FAILURE The symbol switches on along with a dedicated message on the display in the event of dusk sensor failure. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. PRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL This symbol turns on to indicate that the brake pedal must be pressed to enable starting. PEDESTRIAN ACOUSTIC SIGNALLING SYSTEM FAILURE This symbol is shown on the instrument panel display in case of failure of the pedestrian acoustic warning. Contact a Fiat Dealership. LOW WINDSCREEN WASHER LEVEL The symbol appears for some seconds to indicate that the level of the windscreen washing fluid is low. Refill the liquid: to do this, see the "Checking levels" chapter in the "Maintenance and care" section. Always use liquid with the features indicated in the "Fluids and lubricants" chapter in the "Technical specifications" section. Green Symbols Symbol READY What it means SYSTEM READY The symbol switches on to signal that the car is ready to start. CHARGING CABLE CONNECTED When this symbol is lit it indicates that the cable is connected to the charging port of the car, not that the charging procedure is in progress. The lighting of the symbol can also be displayed together with dedicated messages. These messages will indicate the connection status to the charging port until fully charged. IMPORTANT Starting the motor is not allowed until the charging procedure is complete. HOLD 'N' GO The symbol lights up when the "Hold 'n' go" function is active (automatic parking brake engaged). 95 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Symbol What it means ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL ON The symbol comes on when the electric Cruise Control system is on. SPEED LIMITER ON The symbol comes on when the Speed Limiter is on. INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST SYSTEM ON The symbol comes on when the Intelligent Speed Assist system is on. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACTIVATION The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control is on. INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACTIVATION The symbol comes on when the Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control system is on. Blue symbols Symbol What it means DRIVING MODES The instrument panel display shows the driving mode adopted (NORMAL, RANGE, SHERPA). SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED The symbol (in "km/h" or "mph", depending on the display settings) lights up when the speed limit defined by the Speed Limiter is exceeded. White symbols Symbol What it means HEADLIGHT HEIGHT The symbol indicates the height of the dipped beam headlights, set to four levels (0-4) using buttons and . 96 Symbol What it means ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL READY The symbol appears to indicate that the electronic Cruise Control is ready. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL READY The symbol appears when the Adaptive Cruise Control is ready. INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL READY The symbol appears when the Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control is ready. SPEED LIMITER READY The symbol appears to indicate that the Speed Limiter is ready. INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST READY The symbol appears when the Intelligent Speed Assist is ready. SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED The (white) symbol switches on when the speed limit (e.g. 110 km/h) set through the menu of the display is exceeded (the inner value updates according to the set speed). Grey symbols Symbol What it means ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL ON The symbol appears when the electronic Cruise Control is turned on. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ON The symbol appears when the Adaptive Cruise Control is on. INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ON The symbol comes on in the event of an Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control failure. 97 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 98 Symbol What it means SPEED LIMITER ON The symbol switches on if the Speed Limiter device is activated. INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST ON The symbol switches on if convenient the Intelligent Speed Assist is activated. WARNING 49) If the warning light does not switch on or stays on whilst driving when the ignition device is turned to ENGINE, a failure may have occurred in the restraint systems. In this case the airbags or pretensioners may not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower number of cases, they may be deployed accidentally. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. 50) A failure of the warning light is indicated by the symbol appearing on the display or by the warning light blinking, depending on the version. In this case, the warning light may not indicate a possible problem with the airbag restraint system. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. SAFETY The chapter that you are about to read is very important: it describes the safety systems with which the car is equipped and provides instructions on how to use them correctly. ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ......... DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS ................................. OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS ................................. SEAT BELTS ............................. SBR (SEAT BELT REMINDER) SYSTEM ................................... PRE-TENSIONERS..................... CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..... SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG ............ 100 104 114 114 115 116 118 129 99 SAFETY ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS The car has the following active safety systems: ABS (Anti-lock Braking System); DTC (Drag Torque Control); ESC (Electronic Stability Control); TC (Traction Control); PBA (Panic Brake Assist); HSA (Hill Start Assist); ERM (Electronic Rollover Mitigation); Hold 'n'Go For the operation of the systems, see the following pages. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) This system, which is an integral part of the braking system, prevents one or more wheels from locking and slipping in all road surface conditions, irrespective of the intensity of the braking action, ensuring that the car can be controlled even during emergency braking and optimising stopping distances. The system intervenes during braking when the wheels are about to lock, typically in emergency braking or lowgrip conditions, when locking may be more frequent. The system also improves control and stability of the car when braking on a 100 surface where the grip of the left and right wheels varies, or on corners. The Electronic Braking Force Distribution (EBD) system completes the system allowing the brake force to be distributed between the front and rear wheels. System intervention A slight pulsing of the brake pedal and noise indicates the intervention of the ABS: this is completely normal when the system intervenes. 51) 52) 53) 54) 55) 56) DTC (Drag Torque Control) SYSTEM The DTC (Drag Torque Control) system prevents the drive wheels from possibly locking, which could happen, for example, if the accelerator pedal is released suddenly in conditions of poor grip. In this conditions, the exhaust braking effect could cause the drive wheels to slip, resulting in a loss of stability of the car. In these situations, the DTC system intervenes, restoring torque to the motor in order to conserve car stability and increase car safety. ESC (Electronic Stability Control) SYSTEM The ESC system improves the directional control and stability of the car in various driving conditions. The ESC system corrects the car’s understeer and oversteer, distributing the brake force on the appropriate wheels. The torque supplied by the motor can also be reduced in order to maintain control of the car. The ESC system uses sensors installed on the car to determine the trajectory that the driver intends to follow and compares it with the car’s effective trajectory. When the real trajectory deviates from the desired trajectory, the ESC system intervenes to counter the car’s understeer or oversteer. Oversteer: occurs when the car is turning more than it should with respect to the angle of the steering wheel and the rear wheels lose grip. Understeer: occurs when the car is turning less than it should with respect to the angle of the steering wheel and the front wheels lose grip. System intervention The system intervention is signalled by the blinking of the instrument panel warning light , to inform the driver that the car is in critical stability and grip conditions. 57) 58) 59) 60) 61) TC (Traction Control) SYSTEM The system automatically operates in the event of slipping, loss of grip on wet roads (aquaplaning) and acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy roads, etc. on one or both drive wheels. Depending on the slipping conditions, two different control systems are activated: if the slipping involves both drive wheels, the system intervenes, reducing the power transmitted by the motor; if the slipping only involves one of the drive wheels, the BLD (Brake Limited Differential) function is activated, automatically braking the wheel which is slipping (the behaviour of a self-locking differential is simulated). This will increase the drive torque transferred to the wheel that is not slipping. This function remains active even if the "Systems partially disabled" and "Systems disabled" modes are selected (see description in the following pages). that the car is in critical stability and grip conditions. System intervention The system intervention is signalled by the blinking of the instrument panel warning light , to inform the driver HSA (Hill Start Assist) SYSTEM 62) 63) 64) 65) 66) PBA (Panic Brake Assist) SYSTEM The PBA system is designed to improve the car’s braking capacity during emergency braking. The system detects emergency braking by monitoring the speed and force with which the brake pedal is pressed, and consequently applies the optimal brake pressure. This can reduce the braking distance: the PBA system therefore completes the ABS. Maximum assistance from the PBA system is obtained by pressing the brake pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake pedal should be pressed continuously during braking, avoiding intermittent presses, to get the most out of the system. Do not reduce pressure on the brake pedal until braking is no longer necessary. The PBA system is deactivated when the brake pedal is released. 67) 68) 69) 70) 71) This is an integral part of the ESC system and facilitates starting on slopes, activating automatically in the following cases: uphill: car stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, motor running, brake pressed and the transmission in N or D; downhill: car stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, motor running, brake pressed and reverse gear engaged. When setting off, the ESC system control unit maintains the braking pressure on the wheels until the drive torque necessary for starting is reached, or in any case for a maximum of 2 seconds, allowing your right foot to be moved easily from the brake pedal to the accelerator. When the 2 seconds have elapsed, without starting, the system is automatically deactivated, gradually releasing the braking pressure. During this release stage, the typical mechanical brake release noise can be heard, indicating that the car is about to move. ERM (Electronic Rollover Mitigation) SYSTEM The system monitors the tendency of the wheels to rise from the ground if the driver performs extreme manoeuvres like quick steering to avoid 101 SAFETY an obstacle, especially in poor road conditions. If these conditions occur, the system intervenes on the brakes and motor power to reduce the possibility that the wheels are raised from the ground. It is not possible to avoid tendency to roll over if the phenomenon is due to reasons such as driving on high side gradients, collision with objects or other cars. 72) HOLD 'N' GO It is an integral part of the ESC system and keeps the car braked in all conditions. The Hold 'n' Go function can be activated from the panel in NORMAL mode; it is always active in RANGE and SHERPA modes. If activated, after detecting that the car is stationary and the brake pedal has been released, the Hold 'n' Go function keeps the vehicle braked. You can now remove your foot from the brake pedal. When the driver lightly touches the accelerator pedal, the Hold 'n' Go function releases the brake again, leaving the car free to move. If the car is stationary and one of the following conditions required by the Hold 'n' Go function is changed: 102 driver's door closed driver's seat belt not fastened the function is deactivated and the EPB is automatically engaged. 73) DISABLING ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS Depending on the versions, there are 3 configurations for the active safety systems on the car: systems enabled; systems partially disabled; systems disabled. Systems enabled All active safety systems are enabled. This mode should be used in most driving conditions. The system will be in "Systems enabled" mode every time the motor is started. WARNING You are advised to select "Systems partially disabled" or "Systems disabled" modes only for specific driving requirements. Systems partially disabled By pressing the button (A) fig. 101 on the control display located on the left side of the instrument panel (left-hand drive versions) for less than 5 seconds, while the car is running, it is possible to limit the intervention of the TC system to the braking action on the individual driving wheels only. The other systems remain enabled. Activation of this mode is indicated by the warning light on the instrument panel switching on (on some versions, together with a message on the display). 101 F0S1140 To restore the "Fully Enabled Systems" mode of operation, press the button on the control display located on the left side of the instrument panel (left-hand drive versions) again. "Systems completely enabled" mode will automatically reactivate every time the motor is started. WARNING When travelling on snowy roads with snow chains, it may be helpful to activate "Systems partially disabled" mode: in these conditions, slipping of the drive wheels when moving off makes it possible to obtain better traction. Systems disabled Pressing the button on the control panel on the left-hand side of the dashboard (left-hand drive versions) for more than 5 seconds completely deactivates the ESC system, as well as the ERM and FCW systems; the TC system will be limited to braking action on the individual drive wheels. The other systems remain enabled. Activation of this mode is indicated by on the instrument the warning light panel switching on (on some versions, together with a message on the display). WARNING If a speed of approximately 65 km/h is exceeded, the systems will behave as described for "Systems partially disabled" mode. To restore the "Systems Enabled" operating mode, press the button on the control display located on the left side of the instrument panel (left-hand drive versions) again. "Systems enabled" mode will automatically reactivate every time the motor is started. WARNING 51) If the ABS intervenes, this indicates that the grip of the tyres on the road is nearing its limit: you must slow down to a speed compatible with the available grip. 52) To achieve maximum efficiency of the braking system, a settlement period of about 500 km is required. During this time, avoid sudden, repeated and prolonged braking. 53) The ABS cannot overrule the natural laws of physics, and cannot increase the grip available according to the condition of the road. 54) The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. 55) The capability of the ABS must never be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such a way as to compromise personal safety and the safety of others. 56) For the correct operation of the ABS, the tyres must of necessity be the same make and type on all wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, of the prescribed type and dimensions. 57) The ESC system cannot overrule the natural laws of physics, and can’t increase the grip available according to the condition of the road. 58) The ESC system cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. 59) The capability of the ESC system must never be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such a way as to compromise personal safety and the safety of others. 60) For the correct operation of the ESC system, the tyres must necessarily be of the same make and type on all wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, of the prescribed type and size. 61) ESC performance features must not induce the driver to take unnecessary or unwarranted risks. Your driving style must always be suited to the road conditions, visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any case, responsible for safe driving. 62) For the correct operation of the TC system, the tyres must of necessity be the same make and type on all wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, of the prescribed type and dimensions. 63) TC performance features must not induce the driver to take unnecessary or unwarranted risks. Your driving style must always be suited to the road conditions, visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any case, responsible for safe driving. 64) The TC system cannot overrule the natural laws of physics, and cannot increase the grip available according to the condition of the road. 65) The TC system cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. 66) The capability of the TC system must never be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such a way as to compromise personal safety and the safety of others. 67) The PBA system cannot overrule the natural laws of physics, and cannot 103 SAFETY increase the grip available according to the condition of the road. 68) The PBA system cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. 69) The capability of the PBA system must never be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such a way as to compromise the safety of the driver, the other occupants of the car or any other road user. 70) The HSA system is not a parking brake; therefore, never leave the car without having engaged the electric parking brake and turned the motor off so that it is parked in safe conditions (for further information read the "When parked" chapter in the "Starting and driving" section). 71) There may be situations on small gradients (less than 8%), with vehicle laden, in which the Hill Start Assist system may not activate, causing a slight reversing motion and increasing the risk of collision with another vehicle or object. The driver is, in any case, responsible for safe driving. 72) The performance of a car with ERM must never be tested in imprudent or dangerous ways, with the possibility of putting the safety of the driver or other people at risk. 73) The intelligent technology of the Hold 'n' Go function cannot overcome the limits imposed by physical laws and only works within the limits of the system. The increased comfort offered by the Hold 'n' Go function must never cause the driver to take risks that could compromise safety. DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS The car can feature the following driving assistance systems: Blind Spot Assist; Autonomous Emergency Brake Control; iTPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System); Lane Control. For the operation of the systems, see the following pages. BLIND SPOT ASSIST SYSTEM 74) The Blind Spot Assist system uses ultrasound sensors, located in the front and rear bumpers (one for the rear side - see fig. 102), to detect the presence of cars in the rear side blind spots of the car. 102 104 The system warns the driver about the presence of cars in the detection area by lighting up, on the relevant side, the warning light located on the door mirror fig. 103, along with an acoustic warning (see "Blind spot alert" paragraph, "Visual and acoustic" mode). F0S1288 103 F0S1142 Sensors The sensors are activated when the car is travelling at a speed greater than approximately 15 km/h (9 mph) and are temporarily deactivated at a speed greater than approximately 140 km/h (84 mph). The detection area of the system covers the blind spot of the rear-view mirror. When the sensors are active the system monitors the detection areas on both sides of the car and warns the driver about the possible presence of cars in these areas. While driving the system monitors the detection area from three different input points (side, rear and front) to check whether a signal needs to be sent to the driver. The system can detect the presence of a vehicle in one of these three areas. WARNING The system does not signal the presence of fixed object (e.g. safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). However, in some circumstances, the system may activate in the presence of these objects. WARNING The system does not warn the driver about the presence of cars coming from the opposite direction, in the adjacent lanes. Warnings For the system to operate correctly, the bumper area where ultrasound sensors are located must stay free from water, snow, ice and dirt gathered from the road surface. The system may be disturbed in case of adverse weather conditions (rain, snow, hail, extreme heat, etc.) and in case of wet road surface. In these cases, the system may give some false signals or fail to detect the vehicles. Do not cover the area in which the sensors are located with any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.). The system may not recognise the presence of long vehicles in the blind spot. Rear view The system detects vehicles coming from the rear part of your car on both sides and entering the rear detection area with a difference in speed of less than approx. 30 km/h (18 mph) with respect to your car. Overtaking vehicles If another vehicle is overtaken (with a difference in speed of less than about 15 km/h), the warning light on the door mirror of the corresponding side lights up. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than about 15 km/h, the warning light does not light up. Operating Mode The system can be activated/deactivated by operating on the instrument panel display Menu, or via the Uconnect™ system (for further information, see the dedicated "Multimedia" section). The system will store the operating mode running when the motor was switched off. Each time the car is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and used. "Blind Spot Alert", "Visual" mode When this mode is active, system activates only a visual warning to the door mirror relating to the object detected. "Blind spot alert", "Visual and acoustic" mode When this mode is active, system activates a visual warning to the door mirror relating to the object detected. If the direction indicator on the side where an obstacle has been detected is activated, an acoustic warning is emitted as well. When the acoustic warning is emitted, the Uconnect™ volume is also lowered. "Blind Spot Alert" function deactivation When the system is deactivated ("Blind Spot Alert" mode at "OFF"), the system will not emit neither acoustic nor visual warnings. Startup status check With the ignition device in the ENGINE position, if the system is enabled, the LEDs on the exterior mirrors will light up during the check phase. If the system is working properly, they will switch off after a few seconds. 105 SAFETY AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM (AEB Control) (where provided) 75) 76) 77) 78) 79) 28) 29) 30) 31) 32) This is a driving assistance system consisting of a camera mounted in the middle of the windscreen fig. 104 capable of intervening in case of vehicles, cyclists and pedestrians. In the event of an imminent collision the system intervenes by automatically braking the car to prevent the impact or reduce its effects. 104 F0S1286 The system provides the driver with audible and visual signals through specific messages on the instrument panel display. The system may lightly brake to warn the driver if a possible frontal accident 106 is detected (limited braking). Signals and limited braking are intended to allow the driver to react promptly, in order to prevent or reduce the effects of a potential accident. In situations with the risk of collision, if the system detects no intervention by the driver, it provides automatic braking to help slow the car and mitigate the potential frontal accident (automatic braking). If intervention by the driver on the brake pedal is detected but not deemed sufficient, the system may intervene in order to improve the reaction of the braking system, therefore reducing vehicle speed further (additional assistance in braking stage). The system will not intervene if the driver takes control of the car and is recognised as being aware of the situation and possible collision. The car is equipped with the "creeping" function. It could then restart after a few seconds from automatic stop. WARNING After the car is stopped, the brake callipers may be locked for about 2 seconds for safety reasons. Press the brake pedal if the car should advance slightly. Engagement / disengagement The Autonomous Emergency Brake Control can be deactivated (and then switched back on again) using the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section), or using the instrument panel (see "Settings" in the "Display" paragraph in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section). The system can be turned off even with the ignition device in the ENGINE position. The system can be set to three activation levels: System active: the system (if active), in addition to the visual and acoustic warnings, provides limited braking, automatic braking and additional assistance in braking stage, where the driver does not brake sufficiently in the event of a potential frontal impact; System partially active: the system (if active) does not provide limited braking, but guarantees automatic braking or additional assistance in braking stage, where the driver does not brake at all or not sufficiently in the event of a potential frontal accident. The visual and acoustic warnings are deactivated, and will not be provided; System deactivated: the system does not provide visual and acoustic warnings, limited braking, automatic braking or additional assistance in braking stage. The system will therefore provide no indication of a possible accident. WARNING Visual signals will indicate the direction of detection of the obstacle (vehicles, pedestrians or cyclists). Activation / deactivation If Autonomous Emergency Brake Control has been correctly activated, it will be active each time the motor is started. The system is deactivated if this is selected on the instrument panel or Uconnect™ system menu. Following a deactivation, the system will not warn the driver about the possible accident with the preceding vehicle, regardless of the setting selected. The system activation status will not be kept in the memory when the motor is switched off: if the system is deactivated when the motor is switched off, it will be active when it its next started. After a deactivation, the system can be reactivated from the Uconnect™ system or instrument panel menu. The function is not active at speed above 5 km/h. The system is only active if: it has been activated correctly; it has not been deactivated using the instrument panel or Uconnect™ system menu; the ignition device is in the ENGINE position; car speed is higher than 5 km/h. Changing the system sensitivity The sensitivity of the system can be changed through the Uconnect™ system or instrument panel menu, choosing from one of the following three options: "Near", "Med" or "Far". See the description in the "Multimedia" section for how to change the settings. The default option is "Med". With this setting, the system warns the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a standard distance, between that of the other two settings. This setting offers the driver reaction time longer than that of the "Near" setting but shorter than that of the "Far" setting in the event of a potential accident. By setting system sensitivity to "Near", the system warns the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is a short distance away. With the system sensitivity set to "Far", the system will warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a greater distance, thus providing the possibility of acting on the brakes more lightly and gradually. This setting provides the drivers with the maximum possible reaction time to prevent a potential accident. The system sensitivity setting is kept in the memory when the motor is switched off. Function temporarily not available warning If the warning light comes on and the dedicated message is displayed, a condition temporarily disabling operation of the system may have occurred. The main possible causes of this temporary blinding are weatherrelated (heavy rain, fog, sun low down on the horizon, etc.). Although the car can still be driven in normal conditions, the system may be temporarily not available. When the conditions limiting the system functions end, this will go back to normal and complete operation. Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat Dealership. 107 SAFETY Warning of system disabling due to an obstruction If the dedicated message is displayed, a condition disabling operation of the system may have occurred. The possible cause of this disabling is a camera obstruction. If an obstruction is signalled, clean the area of the windscreen indicated in fig. 104 and check that the message has disappeared. Although the car can still be driven in normal conditions, the system is not available. When the conditions disabling the system functions end, it will return to normal and complete operation. Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat Dealership. System Fault Message If the system switches off and a dedicated message is shown on the display, it means that there is a fault on the system. In this case, it is still possible to drive the car, but you are advised to contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Driving in special conditions In certain driving conditions, such as, for example: driving close to a bend; vehicles with small dimensions and/or not aligned in the driving lane; 108 lane change by other vehicles; vehicles travelling at right angles to the vehicle. System intervention might be unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore be very careful, keeping control of the car to drive in complete safety. Vehicles with small dimensions and/or not aligned in the driving lane The system cannot detect vehicles in front of the car but outside the camera's field of vision and may therefore not react in the presence of small vehicles, such as motorbikes. fig. 106. WARNING In particularly complex traffic conditions, the driver can deactivate the system manually through the Uconnect™ system or the instrument panel. Driving close to a bend When entering or leaving a wide bend, the system may detect a vehicle that is in front of you, but that is not driving in the same lane fig. 105. In cases such as these, the system may intervene. 105 F0S1181 106 F0S1182 Pedestrian/cyclist detection While driving, when there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian or cyclist, the system will display the relevant warning message indicating the direction of obstacle detection and, if necessary, apply the brakes. Lane change by other vehicles cars suddenly changing lane, entering the same lane as your car and this moving into the camera's field of vision, may cause the system to intervene fig. 107. CORRECT TYRE PRESSURE If no flat tyres are detected, the outline of the car will be shown in the dedicated display screen. 107 F0S1183 Warnings The system has not been designed to prevent impacts and cannot detect possible conditions leading to an accident in advance. Failure to take into account this warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries. In case of complex scenarios, unexpected or unnecessary warnings or braking may occur. iTPMS (indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) 80) 81) 82) 83) 84) 85) The car can be equipped with the iTPMS (indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) which monitors the tyre inflation status thanks to wheel speed sensors. LOW TYRE PRESSURE The system warns the driver if one or more tyres are flat by switching on the warning light on the instrument panel and a warning message on the display, along with an acoustic warning. This warning is displayed also when turning the engine off and on again until the RESET procedure is carried out. RESET PROCEDURE The iTPMS needs an initial "selflearning" phase (with length depending on the driving style and road conditions: optimal conditions being driving on a straight road at 80 km/h for at least 20 minutes) which starts when the RESET procedure is carried out manually. The RESET procedure must be carried out: each time tyre pressure is modified; when even only one tyre is changed; when tyres are rotated/inverted; when the space-saver wheel is fitted. Before carrying out the RESET procedure, inflate the tyres to the rated pressure values specified in the inflation pressure table (see the "Wheels" chapter in the "Technical specifications" section). If the RESET is not carried out, in all above cases, the warning light may give false indications on one or more tyres. To carry out the RESET procedure, with the car stopped and the ignition device at ENGINE, use the Main Menu as follows: go to "Vehicle info" and then to "Reset tyre pressure"; press the "OK" and hold down (more than 2 seconds); the display will show the procedure progress (with a graphic bar) till the RESET is completed. At the end of the RESET procedure the display will show the "Reset saved" message, indicating that the self-learning has been started and you will hear an acoustic warning. If the self-learning procedure of the iTPMS system has not been carried out correctly, no warning is provided. OPERATING CONDITIONS The system is active for speeds above 15 km/h. In a few situations such as sporty driving, particular conditions of the road surface (e.g. icy, snowy, unsurfaced roads) the signalling may be delayed or 109 SAFETY 110 partial in detecting the contemporary deflation of more than one tyre. Under special conditions (e.g. car loaded asymmetrically on one side, towing a trailer, damaged or worn tyre, fitting the space-saver wheel, use of the "Fix&Go" tyre repair kit, fitting snow chains, fitting different tyres on the axles) the system may provide false indications or be temporarily deactivated. If the system is temporarily deactivated the warning light flashes for about 75 seconds and then is continuously on; at the same time, the display shows a warning message and the symbols "– –" will appear next to the shape of the car next to each tyre. This warning is displayed also after the engine has been switched off and then on again if the correct operating conditions are not restored. In the case of abnormal signals, it is recommended to perform the RESET procedure. If the indications appear again after a successful RESET, check that the tyres used on all four wheels are the same and that the tyres are not damaged. As soon as possible, refit the standard tyre instead of the space-saver wheel, remove the snow chains, if possible, check correct load distribution and repeat the RESET procedure by driving on a clean, tarmacked road. If the indications persist, contact a Fiat Dealership. ATTENTION ASSIST SYSTEM (where provided) This is an auxiliary driving assistance system that detects when the driver is tired. ACTIVATION / DEACTIVATION The system can be activated/deactivated via the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section) or via the instrument panel (see "Settings" in the "Display" paragraph in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section). SYSTEM INTERVENTION The system intervenes if the camera in the middle of the windscreen fig. 108 detects that the driver is tired, based on variations in car trajectory and getting too close to the side of the road. 108 F0S1286 The (red) symbol appears on the instrument panel screen with a dedicated message suggesting the driver to stop and take a break. An acoustic signal is also emitted. If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the system and stops for a pause, by pressing the OK button on the left side of the steering wheel, the message will disappear from the display and the symbol will be displayed in the dedicated area of the instrument panel display up to the next time the motor is started/stopped. If the driver ignores the warning provided by the system and does not stop, the message will remain on the instrument panel display until the OK button located on the left hand side controls of the steering wheel is pressed. The symbol , will remain displayed in the dedicated area of the instrument panel display. IMPORTANT In the event of a system symbol appears on fault, the amber the instrument panel display together with a dedicated message. LANE CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The Lane Control makes use of a camera located on the windscreen to detect the lane limits and calculate the position of the car within such limits, in order to make sure that it remains inside the lane. When the one of the lane lines is detected and the car crosses it without the awareness of the driver (direction indicator off), the Lane Control system provides a tactile warning in form of torque applied to the steering wheel (vibration) when the lane limit is approached, thus advising the driver that he must take an action to remain in the lane. WARNING The torque applied to the steering wheel by the system is sufficient for the driver to notice it, but always limited, so that they can easily override it, and the driver always maintains control of the car. The driver can therefore turn the steering wheel as required at all times. If the car continues going beyond the line of the lane without any intervention from the driver, the warning light (or the icon on the reconfigurable multifunction display) will be displayed on the instrument panel to urge the driver to bring the car back into the limits of the lane. SYSTEM ON/OFF When the car is started the system is disabled. To disengage the system, press the (A) fig. 109 on the lever on the left steering wheel twice. If the button is not pressed twice within 5 seconds, the system will remain enabled. On some versions, a specific message indicating disabling is shown on the display. 109 F0S1338 Activation conditions Once switched on, the system becomes active only if the following conditions are met: the driver always keeps at least one hand on the steering wheel; car speed ranges between 60 km/h and 150 km/h; the lane is delimited at least on one side; there are suitable visibility conditions; the road is straight or with wide radius bends; the direction indicator (lane departure) is not activated in the same lane departure direction as the vehicle. WARNING The system does not apply the torque to the steering wheel when a safety system is activated (brakes, ABS, ASR system, ESC system, Autonomous Emergency Brake Control (AEB) system, etc.). SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON THE DISPLAY The Lane Control also warns the driver when the car strays out of lane by displaying symbols and messages on the instrument panel display. 111 SAFETY Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display When the system is active and the lane limits have not been detected, the lane lines are grey and a dedicated icon is shown in the dedicated top area of the display. Exiting a lane with detection of a single limit When the system is active and only, for example, the left lane limit has been detected, the car icon is shown in the dedicated area of the display; the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the event of unintentional exiting (direction indicator not activated) of the lane to the left. When the system detects that the car has approached the lane line, the left line on the display turns yellow and the car icon shown on the display becomes yellow. When the system detects that the car has approached the lane line and is about to pass it, the left line on the display (yellow) flashes and the car icon shown on the display turns yellow. The system operates in the same way, but mirrored, in the event of exiting the right lane when only the right lane limit has been detected. 112 Exiting a lane with detection of both limits When the system is active, the lane lines on the display become white to indicate the successful detection of the limits. When both lane limits have been detected, the car shown in the graphic icon on the display changes green and the system is ready. In accordance with the different conditions detected, the system can attract the attention of the driver by altering the lines that identify the lanes on the display. In particular, the system can alter their colour (from white to yellow and vice versa), and make them flash. Equally, the system alters the colour of the car icon shown on the display. Changing the system settings The settings of the system can be changed through the Uconnect™ system (see description in the dedicated supplement). System limited operation warning 33) 34) If the dedicated message is shown on the display, a condition limiting the system operation may have occurred. The possible reasons of this limitation are something blocking the camera view or a fault. If an obstruction is signalled, clean the area of the windscreen by the interior rear-view mirror and check that the message has disappeared. Although the car can still be driven in normal conditions, the system may be not completely available. When the conditions limiting the system functions end, this will go back to normal and complete operation. Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat Dealership. No hands on steering wheel detection If the system detects no hands from the steering wheel during active system intervention, the system will produce an escalation of visual-acoustic warnings, which will take 15 seconds to invite the driver to put the hands on the steering wheel. If you do not put your hands on the wheel within this time, the system will disconnect and provide an additional warning for 5 seconds. System Fault Message If the system switches off and a dedicated message is shown on the display, it means that there is a fault on the system. In this case, it is still possible to drive the car, but you are advised to contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. WARNING 74) The system is an aid for car driving, it DOES NOT warn the driver about incoming cars outside of the detection areas. The driver must always maintain a sufficient level of attention to the traffic and road conditions and for controlling the trajectory of the vehicle. 75) The system is an aid for the driver, who must always pay full attention while driving. The responsibility always rests with the driver, who must take into account the traffic conditions in order to drive in complete safety. The driver must always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. 76) The capability of the Autonomous Emergency Brake Control system must never be tested irresponsibly or dangerously, in such a way as to compromise personal safety and the safety of others. 77) If the driver presses the accelerator pedal fully or steers abruptly during system operation, the automatic braking function may stop (e.g. to allow a possible manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle). 78) The system intervenes on vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists travelling in the same lane. Animals and things (e.g. pushchairs) are not taken into consideration. 79) If the car must be placed on a roller bench for maintenance or if it is washed in an automatic car wash with an obstacle in the front part (e.g. another vehicle, a wall or another obstacle), the system may detect its presence and activate. Therefore, in this case the system must be deactivated. 80) If the iTPMS system signals a pressure drop on the tyres, it is recommended to check the pressure on all four tyres. 81) The iTPMS does not relieve the driver from the obligation to check the tyre pressure every month; it is not even to be considered a replacement system for maintenance or a safety system. 82) Tyre pressure must be checked with tyres cold. Should it become necessary for whatever reason to check pressure with warm tyres, do not reduce pressure even though it is higher than the prescribed value, but repeat the check when tyres are cold. 83) The iTPMS cannot indicate sudden tyre pressure drops (for example when a tyre bursts). In this case, stop the vehicle, braking with caution and avoiding abrupt steering. 84) The system only warns that the tyre pressure is low: it is not able to inflate them. 85) Insufficient tyre inflation increases electrical energy consumption, reduces the tread duration and may affect your ability to drive safely. IMPORTANT 28) The system may have limited operation or not work at all in weather conditions such as, low sun, heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow. 29) System intervention might be unexpected or delayed when other cars transport loads projecting from the side, above or from the rear, with respect to the normal size of the car. 30) Operation can be adversely affected by any structural change made to the car, such as a modification to the front geometry, tyre change, or a heavier load than the standard load of the car. 31) Incorrect repairs in the zone where the camera is mounted may interfere with its field of vision and reduce its performance (e.g. application of fillers or glues to remove scratches). Go to a Fiat Dealership for any operation of this type. 32) Do not tamper with nor operate on the camera on the windscreen. In the event of a sensor failure, contact a Fiat Dealership. 33) The camera may have limited or absent operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, formation of ice layers on the windscreen glass. 34) Camera operation may also be compromised by the presence of dust, condensation, dirt or ice on the windscreen glass, by traffic conditions (e.g. cars that are driving not aligned with yours, car driving in a transverse or opposite way on the same lane, bend with a small radius of curvature), by road surface conditions and by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make sure the windscreen is always clean. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the windscreen. The camera operation may also be limited or absent in some driving, traffic and road surface conditions. 113 SAFETY 114 OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety equipment of the car comprise the following protection systems: seat belts; SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system; head restraints; child restraint systems; front airbags and side bags. Read the information given the following pages with the utmost care. It is of fundamental importance that the protection systems are used in the correct way to guarantee the maximum possible safety level for the driver and the passengers. For the description of the head restraint adjustment, see the "Head restraints" chapter in the "Knowing your car" section. SEAT BELTS All car seats are equipped with seat belts with three anchorage points and a retractor. The reel mechanism operates locking the belt in the event of sharp braking or strong deceleration due to a collision. This allows the belt strap to slide freely and to adapt to the body of the occupant. In the event of an accident, the belt will lock reducing the risk of impact inside the passenger compartment and of being projected outside the car. The driver is responsible for respecting, and ensuring that all the other occupants of the vehicle also respect, the local laws in force in relation to the use of the seat belts. Always fasten the seat belts before setting off. USING THE SEAT BELTS Always fasten the seat belts before setting off. The belt should be worn keeping the torso straight and rested against the backrest. To fasten the seat belts, hold fastening tongue (A) fig. 110 and insert it into buckle (B), until it clicks into place. On removal, if the belt jams, let it rewind for a short stretch, then pull it out again without jerking. Press button (C) fig. 110 to release the belt. Guide the belt while it is rewinding to prevent it from twisting. Through the retractor, the belt automatically adapts to the body of the passenger wearing it, allowing freedom of movement. 110 F0S1201 The retractor may lock when the car is parked on a steep slope: this is perfectly normal. Furthermore, the reel mechanism locks the belt if it is pulled sharply or in the event of sudden braking, collisions and high-speed bends. The rear seat is fitted with inertia seat belts with three anchoring points and a retractor. WARNING For the rear door version, the passenger side seat belt is installed on the rear side door. Always make sure the door is closed before fastening the seat belt. WARNING Wear the rear seat belts as shown in fig. 111. 111 F0S1259 WARNING When putting the back seat to its normal position, make sure the seat belts are positioned so they are ready to use. 86) 87) WARNING 86) Never press button (C) fig. 110 when travelling. 87) Remember that in the event of an accident, the rear seat passengers not wearing seat belts are exposed to a very serious risk and also represent a serious danger for the front seat occupants. SBR (SEAT BELT REMINDER) SYSTEM (where provided) The SBR system warns the passengers of the front and rear (for versions/markets, where provided) seats if their seat belt is not fastened. The system warnings unfastened seat belts with visual warnings (warning lights on in the instrument panel and icons on the display) and an acoustic warning (see the following paragraphs). NOTE Contact a Fiat Dealership to deactivate this acoustic warning permanently. The acoustic warning can be reactivated at any time through the display Setup Menu. Seat belts warning light operation When the ignition device is turned to ENGINE, the warning light comes on for a few seconds, regardless of the status of the front seat belts. With car moving slower than 20 km/h, if the driver side seat belt or the passenger side seat belt (with occupant seated) is unfastened, the warning light stays on constantly. As soon as a speed threshold of 20 km/h is reached, with driver side seat belt or the passenger side seat belt (with occupant seated) unfastened, an acoustic warning is activated simultaneously with warning light flashing for about 105 seconds. Once activated, this indication cycle stays active for the entire time if the car is moving faster than 8 km/h or if reverse gear is not engaged or until the seat belts are fastened. If the car speed drops to less than 8 km/h or if reverse gear is engaged during the warning cycle, the tone will be interrupted and the warning light switches on fixed. If the entire time has not elapsed and reverse gear is not engaged, the indication cycle is reactivated as soon as the car speed exceeds 20 km/h again. Operation of rear seat belt icons The icons are shown on the display fig. 112. P A B POWER 112 F0S1176 The icons shown on the display indicate: A: rear left seat belt; 115 SAFETY B: rear right seat belt. With the car travelling as speed lower than 20 km/h, if a rear seat belt is unbuckled, the icon stays on with fixed light for a total of approximately 65 seconds. The icons are displayed according to the corresponding seat belts in the rear seats, and stay on for about 65 seconds from the last seat belt status change: if the seat belt is fastened the corresponding icon will be green; if the seat belt is unfastened the corresponding icon will be red. If the car is travelling at a speed faster than 20 km/h and reverse is not engaged, if a rear seat belt is unbuckled, an acoustic warning is sounded when the icon blinks for approximately 35 seconds. Successively, the acoustic warning is deactivated and the icon lights up with fixed light until the end of the entire cycle. Furthermore, the icons lights up for a few seconds whenever one of the rear doors is opened. WARNING As far as the rear seats are concerned, the SBR system will only indicate whether the seat belts are unfastened (red icon) or fastened (green icon), not the presence of any passengers. 116 The icons all stay off if all seat belts (front and rear) are fastened when the ignition device is set to the ENGINE position. For the rear seats, the icons will activate a few seconds after the ignition device has been turned to ENGINE regardless of the status of the seat belts (even if the seat belts are all fastened). All the icons will come on when at least one belt changes from fastened to unfastened status or vice versa. PRE-TENSIONERS The car is equipped with front and rear seat belts pretensioners, that reduce slack in the belts in the event of a severe frontal collision. This guarantees the perfect adherence of the seat belts to the occupants' bodies before the restraining action begins. It is evident that the pretensioners have operated when the belt withdraws towards the retractor. This car is also equipped with a second pretensioner (fitted in the kick plate area). Its activation is signalled by the shortening of the metal cable. A slight discharge of smoke may be produced during the activation of the pretensioner which is not harmful and does not involve any fire hazard. The pretensioner does not require any maintenance or lubrication: any changes to its original conditions will invalidate its efficiency. If, due to unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device has been affected by water or mud, have it replaced. WARNING To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioner, wear the seat belt tight to the chest and pelvis. 88) 89) 90) 35) LOAD LIMITERS To increase occupant safety, the retractors of the safety belts contain a load limiter to dose the force acting on the chest and shoulders during the belt restraining action in the case of frontal collisions. GENERAL WARNINGS FOR USING THE SEAT BELTS 91) Seat belts are also to be worn by pregnant women: the risk of injury in the case of collision is greatly reduced for them and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Pregnant women must position the lower part of the belt very low down so that it passes over the pelvis and under the abdomen (see fig. 113). While pregnancy increases, the driver must adjust both seat and steering wheel to have full control over the car (pedals and steering wheel should be easily accessed). The maximum clearance should be kept between the abdomen and the steering wheel. 114 F0S1251 Each seat belt must be used by only one person. Never travel with a child sitting on the passenger's lap and a single belt to protect them both fig. 115. In general, do not place any objects between the person and the belt. 113 F0S1258 The seat belt strap must not be twisted. The upper part must pass over the shoulder and cross the chest diagonally. The lower part must adhere to the pelvis (as shown in fig. 114) rather than the abdomen of the passenger. Never use devices (clips, clamps, etc.) that hold the seat belt away from your body. 115 F0S1252 SEAT BELTS MAINTENANCE For keeping the seat belts in efficient conditions, carefully observe the following warnings: always use the seat belt with the strap well stretched and not twisted; make sure that it is free to run without obstructions; check seat belt operation as follows: attach the seat belt and pull it hard; replace the seat belt after an accident of a certain severity even if it does not appear to be damaged. Always replace the seat belt if the pretensioners were deployed; prevent the retractors from getting wet: their correct operation is only guaranteed if water does not get inside replace the seat belt when it shows wear or cuts. WARNING 88) The pretensioner may be used only once. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have it replaced after it has been deployed. 89) For maximum safety, keep the backrest upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat belt fits closely across your chest and pelvis. Always fasten the seat belts on both the front and the rear seats! Travelling without wearing seat belts will increase the risk of serious injury and even death in the event of an accident. 90) Removing or tampering with seat belt and pretensioner components is strictly prohibited. Any intervention on these components must be performed by qualified and authorised technicians. Always go to a Fiat Dealership. 117 SAFETY 91) If the belt has been sharply pulled, for example as the result of an accident, the seat belt, together with the anchoring devices, the anchoring device fixing screws and the pretensioner must be completely replaced. Even if the belt does not present any exterior signs of wear or damage, it may have lost its restraining properties. IMPORTANT 35) Operations which lead to impacts, vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C for a maximum of six hours) in the area around the pretensioners may damage or deploy them. Contact a Fiat Dealership should intervention be necessary on these components. 118 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY 92) 93) 94) 95) For optimal protection in the event of an impact, all occupants must be seated and wearing adequate restraint systems, including newborn and children! This prescription is compulsory in all EC countries according to EC Directive 2003/20/EC. Children below the height of 1.50 metres and up to 12 years must be protected with suitable restraint systems and be seated on the rear seats. Statistics on accidents indicate that the rear seats offer greater safety for children. Compared with an adult, a child's head is larger and heavier in proportion to their body and the child's muscular and bone structures are not fully developed. Therefore, correct restraint systems other than adult seat belts are necessary, to reduce as much as possible the risk of injuries in the event of an accident, braking or sudden manoeuvre. Children must be seated safely and comfortably. As far as the characteristics of the child seats used allow, you are advised to keep children in rear facing child seats for as long as possible (at least until 3–4 years old), since this is the most protected position in the event of a collision. The choice of the most suitable child restraint system depends on the weight and size of the child. There are various types of child restraint systems, which can be secured to the car by means of the seat belts or with the ISOFIX anchorages. It is recommended to always choose the restraint system most suitable for the child; for this reason always refer to the Owner Handbook provided with the child restraint system, to be sure that it is of the right type for the children it is intended for. For correct installation on the car, some universal child restraint systems require an accessory (base) sold separately by the restraint system's producer. Therefore, FCA advises customers to check that their chosen child restraint system can be installed on their vehicle by performing a trial installation, on the vendor's premises, before purchase. WARNING 92) SEVERE DANGER When a front passenger airbag is fitted, do not install rearward facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Deployment of the airbag in a crash could cause fatal injuries to the child regardless of the severity of the collision. It is advisable to always carry children in a child restraint system on the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the event of a collision. 93) On the sun visor there is a label with suitable symbols reminding the user that it is compulsory to deactivate the airbag if a rearward facing child restraint system is fitted. Always comply with the instructions on the passenger side sun visor (see the "Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Airbag" paragraph). 94) Should it be necessary to carry a child on the passenger side front seat in a rearward facing child restraint system, the passenger side front airbag and side bag must be deactivated through the display main menu (see the "Display" chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section), verifying deactivation by checking whether the OFF LED has switched on in the trim located on centre ceiling light. Move the passenger's seat as far back as possible to avoid contact between the child restraint system and the dashboard. 95) Do not move the front or rear seat if a child is seated on it or on the dedicated child restraint system. 119 SAFETY In Europe the characteristics of child restraint systems are ruled by the regulation ECE-R44, dividing them into five weight groups: Group Age Weight groups Size class/Fixing ISO/L1 Group 0 Indicatively up to 9 months Up to 10 kg in weight ISO/L2 ISO/R1 ISO/R1 Group 0+ Indicatively up to 2 years Up to 13 kg in weight ISO/R2 ISO/R3 ISO/R2 ISO/R3 Group 1 Indicatively from 8 months to 4 years 9-18 kg ISO/F2 ISO/F2X ISO/F3 Group 2 Indicatively from 3 to 7 years 15 - 25 kg – Group 3 Indicatively from 6 to 12 years 22 - 36 kg – All restraint devices must bear the type-approval data, together with the control mark, on a label solidly fixed to the child restraint system which must never be removed. Lineaccessori MOPAR® includes child restraint systems for each weight group. These devices are recommended having been specifically designed for Fiat vehicles. 120 INSTALLING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM WITH SEAT BELTS child’s chest and not the neck, and the lower part is snug on the pelvis not the abdomen. 96) 97) 98) 99) The Universal child restraint systems installed with the seat belts only are type-approved on the basis of the ECE R44 standard and are divided into various weight groups. 116 WARNING The figures are indicative and provided for assembly purposes only. Fit the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included. F0S1253 Group 1 Children weighing from 9 to 18 kg may be transported in forward facing child restraint systems fig. 117. WARNING Following an accident of a certain importance, it is recommended to replace both the child restraint system and the seat belt to which it was bound. Group 0 and 0+ Infants up to 13 kg must be carried with a rearward facing child restraint system of the type shown in fig. 116 which, supporting the head, does not induce stress on the neck in the event of sudden decelerations. The child restraint system is restrained by the car seat belts, as shown in fig. 116 and it must restrain the child in turn with its own belts. 117 118 F0S1257 Group 3 For children between 22 and 36 kg, there are dedicated restraint systems that allow the seat belt to be worn correctly. The fig. 119 shows the correct child positioning on the rear seat. F0S1255 Group 2 Children from 15 to 25 kg may be restrained directly by the car seat belts fig. 118. In this case, the child restraint system is used to position the child correctly with respect to the seat belts so that the diagonal belt section crosses the 119 F0S1256 Children over 1.50 m in height can wear seat belts like adults. 121 SAFETY 122 INSTALLING AN ISOFIX CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM A 100) 101) 102) 103) 104) The car is equipped with ISOFIX anchorages (European standard which makes the installation of the seats quick and safe), on the rear seats and on the front passenger seat. The ISOFIX system lets you install the ISOFIX child restraint system without using the car seat belts but connecting them directly to the car seat with three anchorages in the car. Traditional child restraint systems can be fitted alongside ISOFIX child restraint systems on different seats in the same car. To install an ISOFIX child restraint system, attach it to the two metal anchorages (A) fig. 120 located in the back of the passenger front seat and of the rear seats indicated by the symbol in the point where the seat cushion meets the backrest, remove the parcel shelf and fix the upper strap (provided with the child restraint system) to the dedicated anchoring (B) fig. 121 located at the bottom of the seat back. fig. 122 shows an example of a Universal ISOFIX child restraint system for weight group 1. 120 F0S1321 122 F0S1254 WARNING Following an accident of a certain severity, it is recommended to replace both the child restraint system and the ISOFIX anchorages. The other weight groups are covered by specific ISOFIX child restraint systems, which can be used only if specifically tested for this car (see list of cars provided with the child restraint system). 121 F0S1322 WARNING The diagram is indicative and for fitting purposes only. Fit the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included. NOTE When a Universal ISOFIX child restraint system is used, only ECE R44 "ISOFIX Universal" (R44/03 or further upgrades) type-approved child restraint systems can be used. For any further details on installation/use, refer to the instruction manual for the child restraint system. SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR i-SIZE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM USE (where provided) These child restraint systems, built and type-approved according to the i-Size (ECE R129) standard, ensure better safety conditions to carry children on board a vehicle: the child must be transported rearward facing until 15 months; child restraint system protection is increased in the event of a side collision; the use of the ISOFIX system is promoted to avoid faulty installation of the child restraint system; efficiency in the choice of the child restraint system, which isn't made according to weight any more but according to the child's height, is increased; compatibility between the car seats and the child restraint systems is better: the i-Size child restraint systems can be considered as "Super ISOFIX"; this means that they can be perfectly fitted in type-approved i-Size seats, but can also be fitted in ISOFIX (ECE R44) type-approved seats. NOTE If your car seats are i-Size approved, the symbol shown in fig. 123 will appear on the seats near the ISOFIX attachments. 123 J0A0450 NOTE See the table shown on the following page to check whether your car is approved for installing i-Size child restraint systems. WARNING 96) Child restraint systems with Isofix attachments are available for safe anchoring to the seat without using the car seat belts. For this type of seats see paragraph "Installation of an Isofix child restraint system" in this chapter. 97) Incorrect fitting of the child restraint system may result in an inefficient protection system. In the event of an accident the child restraint system may become loose and the child may be injured, even fatally. When fitting a restraint system for newborns or children, strictly comply with the instructions provided by the Manufacturer. 98) When the child restraint system is not used, secure it with the seat belt or with the ISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from the car. Do not leave it unsecured inside the passenger compartment. In this way, in the event of sudden braking or an accident, it will not cause injuries to the occupants. 99) After installing a child restraint system, do not move the seat: always remove the child restraint system before making any adjustment. 100) Always make sure that the chest section of the seat belt does not pass under the arms or behind the back of the child. In the event of an accident the seat belt will not be able to secure the child, with the risk of injury, including fatal injury. Therefore the child must always wear the seat belt correctly. 101) Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. 102) If a Universal ISOFIX child restraint system is not fixed to all three anchorages, it will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously or fatally injured. 103) Fit the child restraint system when the car is stationary. The child restraint system is correctly fixed to the brackets when you hear the click. Follow the instructions for assembly, disassembly and positioning that the Manufacturer must supply with the child restraint system. 104) The diagram is indicative and for fitting purposes only. Fit the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included. 123 SAFETY Child restraint system installation The following table provides guidelines on positioning child restraint systems on the car seats. Each child restraint system position complies with the UNECE standards Number of seats 3 124 Seat number 1 Airbag ENABLED Airbag DISABLED 4 6 Seat suitable for universal rearward facing child restraint systems X NO YES (U) YES (U) YES (U) Seat suitable for universal forward facing child restraint systems X YES (UF)(a) NO YES (UF) YES (UF) i-Size rearward facing seat X NO YES (i-U) NO YES ** (i-U) i-Size forward facing seat X YES (i-UF) (a) NO NO YES** (i-UF) Seat suitable for ISOFIX side child restraint systems (L1| L2) X NO NO NO NO Seat suitable for ISOFIX rearward facing child restraint system (R1 | R2 | R3) X NO YES (Only R1 and R2) * (IL) NO YES (Only R1 and R2) ** (IL) Number of seats 3 Seat number 1 Airbag ENABLED Airbag DISABLED 4 6 Seat suitable for ISOFIX forward facing child restraint system (F2 | F2X | F3) X YES (IUF)(a) NO YES (IUF) YES (IUF) Seat suitable for ISOFIX auxiliary child restraint systems (B2/B3) X YES (Only B2) (IUF) (a) NO YES (Only B2) (IUF) YES (Only B2) (IUF) U = Position suitable for a "universal" child restraint system approved for this weight category. UF = Position suitable for a "universal" forward facing child restraint system approved for this weight category. IUF = Position suitable for an "ISOFIX" universal forward facing child restraint system approved for this weight category. i- U = Position suitable for an i-Size "universal" rearward facing child restraint system. i-UF = Position suitable for an i-Size "universal" forward facing child restraint system. IL = Position suitable for specific listed ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS). These ISOFIX CRS are classified as "vehicle-specific", "restricted use" and "semi-universal". X = Not applicable. The seat is not approved for installation of child restraint systems. * = Installation only possible by moving the seat backwards. ** = Installation only possible by moving the corresponding front seat forwards. In this configuration, the front seat must not be occupied. (a) = With forward facing child restraint system, the seat must be positioned no more forward than the longitudinal halfway point. NOTE It may be necessary to remove the head restraints when installing the seats. 125 SAFETY CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS RECOMMENDED BY FIAT FOR YOUR CAR In the markets for which they are available, Lineaccessori MOPAR ® offers a complete range of child restraint systems to be fixed using the seat belt with three anchor points or the ISOFIX anchorages. IMPORTANT FCA recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included. Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system Child restraint system installation Peg Perego Primo Viaggio iSize Fiat order code: 50290501 Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg from 40 cm to 80 cm + + Peg Perego Base i-Size Fiat order code: 50290505 126 i-Size universal child restraint system. It is installed in the opposite direction to the direction of travel with the mandatory use of the i-Size sub-base (can be purchased together with the child restraint system or separately) and the ISOFIX anchorages of the car. It must be fitted on the right rear seat. Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system Child restraint system installation Peg Perego Viaggio FF105 Fiat order code: 50290502 Group 0+/1: from 9 to 18 kg, from 67 cm to 105 cm + + i-Size approved child restraint system. It must be installed on the car absolutely together with the Peg Perego Base i-Size sub-base (to be purchased separately or together with the Peg Perego Primo Viaggio i-Size child restraint system). It must be fitted on the right rear seat. Peg Perego Base i-Size Fiat order code: 50290505 127 SAFETY Weight group Group 2: from 15 to 25 kg, from 95 cm to 135 cm Group 3: from 22 to 36 kg from 136 cm to 150 cm 128 Child restraint system Type of child restraint system Child restraint system installation Peg Perego Viaggio 2 3 Shuttle Plus collezione 500 (where provided) Fiat order code: 50290503 It can only be fitted facing forwards, using the three-point seat belt and the ISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle, if present. Fiat recommends installing it using the ISOFIX anchorage points of the car. Advisable, it should be fitted on the rear outer seats. Peg Perego Viaggio 2 3 Shuttle Plus collezione 500 (where provided) Fiat order code: 50290503 It can only be fitted facing forwards, using the three-point seat belt and the ISOFIX anchorages of the vehicle, if present. Fiat recommends installing it using the ISOFIX anchorage points of the car. Advisable, it should be fitted on the rear outer seats. Main recommendations to carry children safely Install the child restraint systems on the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the event of a collision. Keep children in rearward facing child restraint systems for as long as possible, until 3–4 years old if possible. If the passenger's front airbag is deactivated always check the dedicated warning light on the trim located on the dashboard to make sure that it has actually been deactivated. Carefully follow the instructions supplied with the child restraint system. Keep the instructions in the car along with the other documents and this handbook. Do not use second-hand child seats without instructions. Only one child is to be strapped into each restraint system; never carry two children using one child restraint system. Always check that the seat belts do not rest on the child’s neck. Always check that the seat belt is well fastened by pulling on it. While travelling, do not let the child sit incorrectly or unfasten the belts. Never allow a child to put the belt's diagonal section under an arm or behind their back. Never carry children on your lap, even newborns. No-one can hold a child in the case of a collision. If the car has been involved in a road accident, replace the child restraint system with a new one. In addition, and depending on the type of child restraint system installed, replace the ISOFIX anchorages or the seat belt with which the child restraint system was connected. The rear head restraint can be removed if needed to install a child restraint system. The head restraint must always be present in the car and fitted if the seat is used by an adult passenger or a child sitting in a child restraint system without backrest. SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG The car may be equipped with: front driver airbag; front passenger airbag; driver and passenger front side bags for pelvis, chest and shoulder protection; window bags for head protection of front seat passengers and rear side seat passengers. 105) 106) 107) 108) 109) 110) FRONT AIRBAGS 111) The front (driver and passenger) airbags protect the front seat occupants in the event of head-on crashes of medium-high severity, by placing the cushion between the occupant and the steering wheel or dashboard. Therefore non-activation of airbags in other types of collisions (side impacts, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) does not indicate a system malfunction. An electronic control unit will make the bag inflate in the event of a frontal impact. The bag will inflate instantaneously placing itself between the front occupants body and the structures 129 SAFETY 130 which could cause injury. It will deflate immediately afterwards. Front airbags are not a replacement of but complementary to the seat belts, which you are recommended to always wear, as specified by law in Europe and most non-European countries. In the event of a collision, someone not wearing a seat belt could move forward and come into contact with a bag which is still opening. The protection offered by the bag is compromised in these circumstances. The front airbags may not be deployed in the following cases: frontal impact against highly deformable objects not involving the front surface of the car (e.g. wing collision against guard rail); in the case of the car wedging under other cars or protective barriers (e.g. under trucks or guard rails). Failure to activate in the conditions described above is due to the fact that they may not provide any additional protection compared with seat belts, so their activation would be inappropriate. In these cases, non-deployment does not indicate a system malfunction. The driver's and passenger's front airbags have been designed and calibrated to protect front seat occupants wearing seat belts. At their maximum inflation, their volume fills most of the space between the steering wheel and the driver and between the dashboard and the passenger. The airbags are not deployed in the event of minor frontal impacts (for which the restraining action of the seat belts is sufficient). Seat belts must always be worn. In the event of a frontal collision, they ensure the correct positioning of the occupant. fig. 125: this bag has a larger volume than the driver's. Driver's side front airbag 125 112) This consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in a special compartment A in the centre of the steering wheel fig. 124. 124 F0S1145 Passenger front airbag This consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in a special compartment in the dashboard F0S1147 Passenger's front airbag and child restraint systems 113) Rearward facing child restraint systems must NEVER be fitted on the front seat with an active passenger side bag since in the event of a collision the airbag deployment may cause fatal injuries to the transported child. ALWAYS comply with the instructions on the label stuck on both sides of the sun visor (fig. 126). 126 F0S1261 WARNING 105) The front airbags and/or side bags may be deployed if the car is subject to heavy knocks or accidents involving the underbody area, such as for example violent shocks against steps, pavements or low obstacles, the car falling in big holes or dips in the road. 106) A small amount of dust will be released when the airbags are deployed. The dust is not harmful and does not indicate the beginning of a fire. Furthermore, the surface of the deployed bag and the interior of the car may be covered by a dusty residue: this may irritate skin and eyes. Wash with mild soap and water in the event of exposure. Every control, repair and replacement operation concerning the airbags must only be carried out at a Fiat Dealership. If the car is scrapped, have the system deactivated at a Fiat Dealership. 107) Every control, repair and replacement operation concerning the airbags must only be carried out at a Fiat Dealership. 108) If the car is scrapped, have the system deactivated at a Fiat Dealership. 109) Pretensioners, front airbags and side bags are deployed according to different logics on the basis of the type of collision. Failure to activate one or more of the devices does not indicate a system malfunction. 110) Should an accident occur in which any of the safety devices are activated, take the car to a Fiat Dealership to have the activated devices replaced and to have the whole system checked. 111) Do not apply stickers or other objects on the steering wheel, on the dashboard in the passenger side airbag area, on the side upholstery on the roof and on the seats. Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones) on the passenger's side dashboard since they could interfere with correct inflation of the airbag and also cause serious injury to the passengers. 112) The airbag must be able to inflate without obstruction in the event of deployment. It is therefore recommended not to drive with the body bent forward, but to sit up resting your back and shoulders on the backrest of the seat. Adjusting the position of the seat so that you can reach and manoeuvre the steering wheel comfortably with your arms slightly bent being as far away as possible from the steering wheel. Being too close to the steering wheel when the airbag is deployed may cause serious injury. 113) When there is an active passenger airbag, DO NOT install rearward facing child restraint systems on the front seat. Deployment of the airbag in a crash could cause fatal injuries to the child regardless of the severity of the collision. It is advisable to always carry children in a child restraint system on the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the event of a collision. 131 SAFETY Passenger's front airbag and child restraint systems: WARNING 127 132 F0S1025 Deactivating the passenger side airbags: front airbag and front side bag 114) 115) 116) (where provided) Warning light (A) fig. 128 indicates that the front passenger airbag and the front side bag (where provided) are active. In this case, it is forbidden to install a rearward-facing seat on the passenger seat. Warning light (B) fig. 128 indicates the deactivation of the front passenger airbag and the front side bag (where provided) and remains lit until they are reactivated. 128 SIDE BAGS - WINDOW BAGS To help increase occupant protection in the event of a side collision, the car is equipped with front side bags (for versions/markets, where provided) and window bags (where provided). Side bags protect occupants from side-on crashes of medium/high severity by placing the bag between the occupant and the internal parts of the side structure of the car. Non-activation of side bags in other types of collisions (front collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction. Side bag These comprise two instantly inflating bags located in the front seat backrests fig. 129, which protect the pelvis, chest and shoulder area of the occupants in the event of a side collision of medium/high severity. Window bag These consist of two "curtain" bags housed behind the side upholstery of the roof fig. 130 and covered with finishing elements, which protect the heads of front and rear occupants and of rear side seat occupants in the event of a side collision thanks to a wide bag deployment area. 130 F0S1149 Warnings In the event of a side collision, the system provides best protection if the passenger sits on the seat in a correct position, thus allowing correct window bag deployment. F0S1148 117) 118) 119) 120) 121) 122) 123) 124) 125) 126) 127) 128) WARNING To manually deactivate the passenger side front airbag and the front side bag (where provided), see the "Display" chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section. 129 F0S1289 133 SAFETY 134 WARNING 114) In some versions, in the event of LED (located on the a failure of the centre ceiling light), the warning light on the instrument panel turns on and the passenger side airbags are deactivated. 115) The warning light indicates the passenger airbag protection status. If the warning light is off, passenger side protection is active: to deactivate it, use the Setup Menu (in this case the LED lights up). When the car is started (ignition device turned to in the ENGINE position), the warning light turns on for about 8 seconds, provided that at least 5 seconds have elapsed from when it was switched off. If the passenger airbag protection is activated after 8 seconds, the warning light will go out. If not, contact a Fiat Dealership. If the motor is started/stopped again in less than 5 seconds the warning light may remain off. In this case, to check correct warning light operation, switch the motor off, wait for at least 5 seconds and switch the engine on again. The warning light may light up with various intensity levels depending on the car conditions. The intensity may also vary during the same key cycle. On moving the ignition device to the ENGINE position, the warning light switches on for 8 seconds. Afterwards, in the event of active passenger airbag protection, the warning light goes out. 116) If a child must be carried on the front seat in a rearward facing child restraint system, it is compulsory to deactivate the passenger side front airbag, making sure that it is deactivated by checking the dedicated warning light on the instrument panel. Move the passenger's seat as far back as possible to avoid contact between the child restraint system and the dashboard. 117) If the warning light does not switch on or stays on whilst driving when the ignition device is turned to ENGINE, a failure may have occurred in the restraint systems. In this case the airbags or pretensioners may not be deployed in an impact or, in a lower number of cases, they may be deployed accidentally. Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. 118) Malfunction of the warning light is indicated by the activation of an airbag failure symbol and a dedicated message on the instrument panel display (or, for versions where provided, by the activation of a blinking generic failure warning light). In this case, the warning light may not indicate a possible problem with the airbag restraint system. Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. 119) Do not use seatcovers on front seats featuring side airbags. 120) Do not travel with objects in your lap, in front of your chest or held in your mouth (e.g., pipe, pencil etc.). They could cause severe injury if the airbag is deployed in a crash. 121) If the car has been stolen or in the case of attempt to steal it, if it has been subjected to vandalism or floods, have the airbag system checked by a Fiat Dealership. 122) With the ignition device at ENGINE, airbags may be deployed when the car is stationary and hit by another car even if the motor is switched off. Therefore, even if the car is stationary, when an active front passenger airbag is fitted, DO NOT install rearward facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Deployment of the airbag following a collision could cause fatal injuries to the child. Therefore, always deactivate the passenger side airbag when a rearward facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. The front passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to prevent the child restraint system from coming into contact with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate the passenger airbag as soon as the child restraint system has been removed. Also remember that, if the ignition device is set to STOP, none of the safety devices (airbags or pretensioners) will be deployed in the event of collision. Non-deployment in such cases does not indicate a system malfunction. 123) Do not wash the seats with water or pressurised steam (wash by hand or at automatic seat washing stations). 124) The airbag deployment threshold is higher than that of the pretensioners. For collisions in the range between the two thresholds, it is normal for only the pretensioners to be activated. 125) Do not affix rigid objects to the coat hooks or support handles. 126) The airbag does not replace seat belts but increases their efficiency. Furthermore, since front airbags are not deployed in low-speed frontal impacts, side impacts, rear shunts or roll-overs, the passengers are protected only by the seat belts which must therefore be fastened at all times. 127) Do not rest your head, arms or elbows on the door, on the windows or in the window bag area to prevent injury during deployment. 128) Never lean your head, arms or elbows out of the window. 135 STARTING AND DRIVING 136 STARTING AND DRIVING We have now reached the "heart" of the car: let's see how to use the car to its full potential. We will look at how to drive it safely in any situation, so that it can be a welcome companion, with our comfort and our wallets in mind. ENGINE STARTING .................... WHEN PARKED ......................... SPEED LIMITER ......................... ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL ................................ CO-DRIVER SYSTEM ................. PARK ASSIST SYSTEM .............. SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM ................................... TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION..... INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST...... ® PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .................................. DRIVING TIPS............................ CHARGING ............................... POWER SOURCES THAT CAN BE USED .................................. ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) CHARGING AT HOME ................ QUICK DOMESTIC CHARGING PROCEDURE FROM THE WALLBOX CHARGING STATION .................................. CHARGING PROCEDURE FROM PUBLIC CHARGING STATION (AC)............................ 137 140 142 143 145 165 169 172 174 175 176 178 182 197 200 201 CHARGING FROM PUBLIC CHARGING STATION (DC) PROCEDURE - MODE 4 ............. CHARGE CABLE EMERGENCY UNLOCK................................... CHARGING FUNCTIONS ............ "eCoasting" mode (ENERGY SAVING) ................................... "eBraking" MODE (HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY CHARGING) .............................. ONE-PEDAL DRIVING................. TOWING TRAILERS.................... MOPAR® CONNECT.................. 203 204 204 206 207 207 207 208 ENGINE STARTING Before starting the car, adjust the seat, the interior rear view mirrors, the door mirrors and fasten the seat belt correctly. The transmission must be in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. Press the brake to shift to a gear when the transmission is in position P (Park). NOTE The brake pedal must be pressed while shifting. Starting the engine 129) The gearbox must be in position P or N. Proceed as follows: fully depress the brake pedal without touching the accelerator; press the ignition device to take it to the START position. Hold it fully depressed for a couple of seconds. At the end of the procedure, an acoustic warning will be heard and the message "READY" will appear on the instrument panel display to indicate that the electric traction system of the car has started. When the "READY" message appears, the car is ready to go. P READY 75 % 216 POWER 0 km/h km RANGE 23° c 131 CHARGE NW 123456 km F0S1089 WARNING If the "READY" message does not appear on the instrument panel despite the correct start-up procedure, contact a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT If start-up is requested with the transmission in a position other than N without the brake pedal pressed, the display will show a dedicated message (see “Warning lights and messages” chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section). In this case, repeat the starting manoeuvre, pressing the brake pedal. IMPORTANT If start-up is requested but the transmission is faulty, carry out the “Delayed start-up” procedure (see "Warning lights and messages" chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section). Turn the ignition device to the START position for at least 7 seconds with the brake pressed to start the motor. The system will remain in “recovery” condition. If the engine does not start, contact a Fiat Dealership. Starting the motor with insufficiently charged electronic key battery If the ignition device does not respond when the ignition device button is pressed or the car doors must be unlocked using the metal insert supplied with the key, it could mean the battery of the electronic key may not be sufficiently charged. Therefore, the system does not detect the presence of the electronic key on board the car and displays a dedicated message. In this case, place the rear end of the key (on the side where the 500 logo is located) next to the moulding on the bottom of the console fig. 132 and press the start button. 132 F0S1225 137 STARTING AND DRIVING PEDESTRIAN ACOUSTIC WARNING SYSTEM The car is provided with a pedestrian acoustic warning system. This system uses different sounds to warn pedestrians of the approach of the car. The acoustic warning system is provided with a speaker located in the motor compartment. The system is automatically activated when a gear other than P (Park) is engaged and remains active as long as the car is travelling at a speed of 25 km/h or less. Any malfunction of the acoustic warning system is indicated by the symbol on the display. yellow ONE-SPEED GEARBOX The New 500 uses a one-speed gearbox to transmit the power developed by the electric motor. The one-speed gearbox is operated by push buttons instead of the traditional gear lever. The buttons (A) fig. 133 are located on the lower dashboard. 133 F0S1090 36) NOTE Hold the brake pedal pressed while changing from the P (Park) position. NOTE If all button LEDs are lit when the ignition device is in ENGINE position, contact a Fiat Dealership. 130) 131) 132) 133) 134) Transmission ratios Press required button to engage the gear. NOTE To select a gear, the brake pedal must be pressed. NOTE After selecting a gear, wait a few moments to allow the selected gear to be engaged before accelerating. P (PARK) Selecting P (Park) integrates the functionality of the parking brake by locking the transmission. It is advisable to start the car in this gear engaged. 138 Never try to engage P (Park) when the car is moving. Apply the parking brake when leaving the car in position P (Park). When parking on flat surfaces, you can first shift the transmission to P (Park) and then apply the parking brake. When parking on sloping roads, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to P (Park). For added safety, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. NOTE Refer to the gear position shown on the instrument panel display and check that it indicates P (Park). 135) 136) 137) 131) 138) 133) 134) R (Reverse) The car can be moved backwards in this position. Select position R (Reverse) only with the car at a standstill. N (Neutral) You can start the car with this gear engaged. Apply the parking brake and move the transmission to position P (Park) if you wish to exit the car. 139) D (DRIVE) Use this gear driving in towns and on motorways. Car movement To move the car, from position P press the brake pedal and, select the desired gear using the control panel (1) fig. 133 on the dashboard: D to move forwards or R to engage reverse. The display will show the gear engaged. In "NORMAL" driving mode, when the brake pedal is released, the car starts moving forwards or backwards ("creeping" effect). The accelerator should not be pressed in this case. Automatic shift to P function The function automatically put the transmission in P (Park) if there is any indication that the driver may leave the car while the transmission is in D (Drive), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse). Operation with the ignition device to the ENGINE position The Auto Park function is activated when the transmission is in position D (Drive), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse) and the following conditions are detected: Seat belt not fastened Brake pedal released Accelerator pedal released Driver's door open Car speed is below 3 km/h. Operation with the ignition device to the STOP position The Auto Park function is activated when the transmission is in position D (Drive), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse), the car speed is less than 3 km/h and the user requests the car to be turned off by turning the ignition device to the STOP position. Gear engagement inhibition This system prevents shifting the transmission from position P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the brake pedal has not been previously pressed. With ignition device in the ENGINE position: the brake pedal must be pressed in order to shift the transmission from position P (Park) to positions R, N or D; to shift the transmission from position N (Neutral) to positions R or D the brake pedal must be pressed. Stopping the engine The system automatically engages P (Park) when the car is shut down (ignition device in STOP position). To stop the engine at speeds higher than 2.5 km/h hold the button of the ignition device pressed or press it three times in a row within a few seconds. The ignition device is in the ENGINE position. WARNING 129) The brake servo is not active until the engine is started, so you would need to apply much more force than usual to the brake pedal. 130) Only engage a gear while keeping the brake pedal fully pressed. 131) The unexpected movement of the car could injure the occupants or people nearby. As a general rule, do not get out of the car when it is in "READY" mode. Before leaving the car, always apply the parking brake, put the transmission in the P (Park) position and turn the ignition device to the STOP position. In this mode, the transmission remains locked in position P (Park), thus preventing any accidental movement of the car. 132) When you get out of the car, always turn the ignition device to the STOP position and lock all the doors. 133) NEVER leave children unattended inside the car, let alone leave the car with the doors unlocked in a place that children can access easily. Children may seriously, or even fatally, injure themselves. Also ensure that children do not inadvertently operate the electric parking brake, the brake pedal or the transmission button. 134) Do not leave the electronic key inside or near the car (or in a place accessible to children). A child could activate the electric window winders, other controls or even start the car. 135) Never use position P (Park) instead of the electric parking brake. Always engage the electric parking brake when parking the 139 STARTING AND DRIVING vehicle to avoid the acciental movement of the vehicle. 136) If the P (Park) position is not engaged, the car could move and injure people. Before leaving the car, make sure that the transmission is in position P and that the electric parking brake is engaged. 137) Putting the transmission to a position different from P (Park) or N (Neutral) without pressing the brake is dangerous. The car could quickly accelerate forwards or backwards. You risk losing control of your car and crash into something or someone. Only engage a gear while keeping the brake pedal fully pressed. 138) When you get out of the car, always remove the ignition key and lock all the doors. 139) Do not put the gear in N (Neutral) and do not stop the motor when driving on a downhill road. This type of driving is dangerous and reduces the possibility of intervening in the case of variation of the road traffic or surface. You risk losing control of your car and causing accidents. IMPORTANT 36) Failure to observe the following precautions can have serious consequences for the transmission. Put the transmission in the P (Park) position only when the car is completely stationary; engage R (Reverse) or disengage only when the car is completely stationary. Keep the brake pedal fully pressed before engaging any gear. 140 WHEN PARKED When parking and leaving the car, proceed as follows: with your foot on the brake pedal, put the transmission to position P and, if you are on a sloping road, leave the wheels steered. Before releasing the brake pedal, wait until P appears on the display; apply the electric parking brake and stop the motor; block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the car is parked on a steep slope. Do not leave the ignition device in the ENGINE position to prevent running down the 12V battery. IMPORTANT NEVER leave the car before having put the transmission in P. ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (EPB) The electric parking brake (EPB) guarantees better use and optimal performance compared to a manually operated parking brake. The electric parking brake features a switch, located on the central tunnel (A) fig. 134, a motor with calliper for each rear wheel and an electronic control module. 134 F0S1091 IMPORTANT Always check that the electric parking brake is applied before leaving the car. IMPORTANT In addition to parking the car with the parking brake always engaged, the wheel steered, chocks or stones positioned in front of the wheels (when on a steep slope), you must always put the transmission in P (Park). WARNING Should the 12V battery of the car be faulty, to unlock the electric parking brake the battery must be replaced. The parking brake can be engaged in two ways: manually by pressing the switch on the central tunnel fig. 134; automatically in "Safe Hold" or "Auto Park Brake" conditions. Engaging the parking brake manually 140) 141) 142) Briefly pull the switch located on the central tunnel to manually engage the electric parking brake when the car is stationary. Noise may be heard from the rear of the car when engaging the electric parking brake. With the electric parking brake on the engaged, the warning light instrument panel and the LED on the switch turn on. A slight movement of the brake pedal may be detected when engaging the electric parking brake with the brake pedal pressed. WARNING With the EPB failure warning light on, some functions of the electric parking brake are deactivated. In this case the driver is responsible for brake activation and car parking in complete safety conditions. If, under exceptional circumstances, the use of the brake is required with the car in motion, keep the switch on the central tunnel pulled as long as the brake action is necessary. The warning light may switch on with the hydraulic system temporarily unavailable; in this case braking is controlled by the motors. The brake lights (stop) will also automatically switch on in the same way as for normal braking with the use of the brake pedal. Release the switch on the central tunnel to stop the braking action with the car in motion. If, through this procedure, the car is braked until a speed below 3 km/h is reached and the switch is kept pulled, the parking brake will definitively engage. WARNING Driving the car with the electric parking brake engaged, or using it several times to slow down the car, may cause severe damage to the braking system. Disengaging the electric parking brake manually The ignition device must be ENGINE position in order to manually release the parking brake. Moreover, you need to press the brake pedal, then press the switch on the central tunnel briefly. Noise may be heard from the rear of the car and a slight movement of the brake pedal may be detected during disengagement. Each automatic parking brake engagement can be cancelled by pressing the switch on the central tunnel and shifting the transmission to position P (Park) at the same time. After disengaging the electric parking brake, the warning light on the instrument panel and the LED on the switch turn off. If the warning light on the instrument panel remains on with the electric parking brake disengaged, this indicates a fault: in this case contact a Fiat Dealership. WARNING Never use position P (Park) instead of the electric parking brake.Always engage the electric parking brake when parking the car to prevent injury or damage caused by the unexpected movement of the car. ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE OPERATING MODES The electric parking brake may operate as follows: "Dynamic operating mode": this mode is enabled by pulling the switch continuously whilst driving; "Static engagement and release mode": with the car stationary, the electric parking brake can be activated by pulling the switch on the central tunnel once. 141 STARTING AND DRIVING 142 On the other hand, press the switch and the brake pedal at the same time to disengage the brake; "Drive Away Release": (where provided) the electric parking brake will automatically disengage with the driver side seat belt fastened and the detection of an action performed by the driver to move the car (forward gear or reverse gear); "Safe Hold": if the car speed is lower than 3 km/h and the transmission is not in P (Park) position and the driver intention of leaving the car is detected, the electric parking brake will automatically engage to hold the car in safety conditions; "Auto Park Brake": if the car speed is below 3 km/h, the electric parking break will automatically engage when the transmission is in P (Park) position. The LED on the switch located on the central tunnel fig. 134 switches on together with the warning light on the instrument panel when the parking brake is engaged and applied to the wheels. Each automatic parking brake engagement can be cancelled by pressing the switch on the central tunnel and shifting the transmission to position P (Park) at the same time. The mode can be managed using the menu of the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). SAFE HOLD It is a safety function that automatically engages the electric parking brake in the event of a dangerous condition for the car. If: the car speed is below 3 km/h; The transmission is not in the P (Park) position; the driver's seat belt is not fastened; the driver side door is open; no attempted operation of the brake pedal or of the accelerator pedal; the electric parking brake engages automatically to prevent car movement. The Safe Hold function can be temporarily disabled by pressing the switch located on the central tunnel and the brake pedal at the same time, with the car stationary and the driver side door open. Once disabled, the function will activate again when the car speed reaches 20 km/h or the ignition device is moved to STOP and then the ENGINE position. WARNING 140) In the case of parking manoeuvres on roads on a gradient, the front wheels must be steered towards the pavement (when parking downhill), or in the opposite direction if the car is parked uphill. Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the car is parked on a steep slope. 141) Never leave children alone in an unattended car; make sure that when you move away from the car, you have the electronic key with you. 142) The electric parking brake must always be engaged when leaving the car. SPEED LIMITER (where provided) DESCRIPTION This device allows the speed of the car to be limited to values which can be set by the driver. The maximum speed can be set both with car stationary and in motion. The minimum speed that can be set is 30 km/h. When the device is active, the car speed depends on the pressure at the accelerator pedal, until the programmed speed limit is reached (see "Speed limit programming" paragraph). ACTIVATING THE DEVICE To activate the device press button (A) on the steering wheel fig. 135. 135 F0S1179 When the device is enabled, it is indicated by the "LIM" symbol being shown on the display along with the last speed set. If the electronic Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control has been activated previously, button (A) fig. 135 must be pressed twice. The first press switches off the function activated previously; the second press activates the Speed Limiter. SPEED LIMIT PROGRAMMING The speed limit can be programmed without necessarily activating the device. To store a speed value higher than the displayed one, briefly press the SET + button. Each time the button is pressed, the speed increases by about 1 km/h while keeping the button pressed, the speed increases by 10 km/h. To store a speed value lower than the displayed one, press the SET – button. Each time the button is pressed, the speed decreases by about 1 km/h while keeping the button pressed, the speed decreases by 10 km/h. DEVICE ACTIVATION/ DEACTIVATION Device activation: press the SET + or SET – buttons. The activation of the device is indicated by the green "LIM" symbol on the display. Device deactivation: press the CANC button. The last set speed is crossed out and displayed in grey. Device reactivation: press the RES button. The last set speed will be restored. EXCEEDING THE PROGRAMMED SPEED By fully depressing the accelerator pedal, the programmed speed can be exceeded even with the device active (e.g. in the event of overtaking). The device is disabled until the speed drops below the set limit, after which it reactivates automatically. DEACTIVATING THE DEVICE To disengage the system press button (A) fig. 135. WARNING Activating the electronic Cruise Control or Adaptive Cruise Control function deactivates the device. Automatic off of the device The device switches off automatically in the event of a system failure and the grey "LIM" symbol appears on the display. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership. ELECTRONIC CRUISE CONTROL This is an electronically controlled driving assistance device that allows the desired car speed to be maintained, without having to press the accelerator pedal. This device can be used at a speed above 30 km/h on long stretches of dry, straight roads with few variations (e.g. motorways). It is therefore not recommended to use this device on extra-urban roads with traffic. Do not use the device in town. The electronic Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. 143 STARTING AND DRIVING To ensure correct operation, the electronic Cruise Control is designed to deactivate if more than one function is operated simultaneously. In this case the system can be reactivated pressing button and setting the desired speed of the car. ACTIVATING THE DEVICE To activate the device press button (A) fig. 136. 143) 144) 145) 136 F0S1180 Activation of the device is indicated by the symbol on the instrument panel switching on and, on some versions, by a message on the display. On versions with Speed Limiter, if the device is activated, button must be pressed twice to activate the Cruise Control (because the first press deactivates the Speed Limiter, and the second press activates the Cruise Control). 144 The device cannot be turned on in either reverse or in neutral. WARNING It is dangerous to leave the device on when it is not used. There is a risk of inadvertently activating it and losing control of the car due to unexpected excessive speed. SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED Proceed as follows: operate the device (see the previous instructions); when the car has reached the desired speed, press button SET + (or SET –) and release it to activate the device. When the accelerator is released, the car will keep the selected speed automatically. If needed (when overtaking for instance), you can accelerate simply by pressing the accelerator; when you release the pedal, the car goes back to the speed stored previously. When travelling downhill with the device active, the car speed may slightly exceed the stored one. WARNING Before pressing the SET + (or SET –) buttons, the car must be travelling at a constant speed on a flat surface. INCREASING / DECREASING SPEED Increasing speed Once the electronic Cruise Control has been activated, the speed can be increased by pressing button SET +. Keeping the button pressed, the set speed will increase until the button is released, then the new speed will be stored. Each time button SET + is pressed the set speed will be fine tuned. Decreasing speed With the device activated, the speed can be decreased by pressing button SET –. Keeping the button pressed, the set speed will decrease until the button is released, then the new speed will be stored. Each time button SET – is pressed the set speed will be fine tuned. WARNING Pressing the button SET + (or SET –) the speed is adjusted depending on the selected unit of measurement ("metric" or "imperial") set through the Menu of the instrument panel display or, depending on the versions, in the menu of Uconnect™ (see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). WARNING On steeply sloping roads, the system may not be able to maintain the set speed, which may increase the speed of the car. It is, therefore, preferable to switch the device off under these conditions. The device keeps the speed stored even uphill and downhill. A slight variation in the speed on slight rises is completely normal. RECALLING THE SPEED With transmission operating in D (Drive), press and release the RES button to recall the previously set speed. DEACTIVATING THE DEVICE Pressing the CANC button or pressing the brake pedal as the car is slowing down deactivates the electronic Cruise Control without deleting the stored speed. The Cruise Control can also be deactivated if the electric parking brake (EPB) is activated or if the braking system intervenes (e.g. the ESC system) or in other particular conditions. The stored speed is deleted in the following cases: pressing button or switching off the motor; if there is a malfunction in the electronic Cruise Control. DEACTIVATING THE DEVICE The electronic Cruise Control is or deactivated by pressing button bringing the ignition device switch to STOP. WARNING 143) While driving with the device active, never move the gear lever to neutral. 144) In case of a malfunction or failure of the device, contact a Fiat Dealership. 145) The electronic Cruise Control can be dangerous if the system cannot keep a constant speed. In specific conditions speed may be excessive, resulting in the risk of losing control of the vehicle and causing accidents. Do not use the device in heavy traffic or on winding, icy, snowy or slippery roads. CO-DRIVER SYSTEM (where provided) 146) 147) 148) 149) 150) 151) 152) 153) 154) 155) 156) 157) 158) 159) 160) 161) 37) 38) 39) 40) 41) 42) 43) 44) 45) ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) WITH FOLLOW TO STOP (where provided) DESCRIPTION The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is an electronic driver assist system that uses the camera located in the middle of the steering wheel fig. 137, to detect the presence of a vehicle close ahead. It combines the Cruise Control function with the ability to control the distance to the vehicle ahead. The system allows the car to be held at the desired speed without needing to press the accelerator. It also allows holding the distance set by the driver from the vehicle ahead. 145 STARTING AND DRIVING 146 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL ACTIVATION To activate the system, press and release the button (A) fig. 138. A B 137 139 F0S1286 However, the driver is responsible for adapt the speed to the traffic, type of road and weather conditions. WARNINGS The system controls the speed of the vehicle to reach or hold the set speed. If the sensor detects a vehicle, the vehicle is adapted to the speed of the vehicle ahead while hold the distance and without exceeding the set speed. It is advisable to turn the system off in the following cases: driving in fog, heavy rain, snow, heavy traffic and in complex driving situations; driving near a bend (winding roads), icy, snowy, slippery roads or with steep slopes and descents; entering a turn lane or on a slip road; when circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. 138 F0S1372 When the system is activated and ready for operation, a graphic indicating the "readiness" of the system (A) and a dedicated icon (B) depicted as illustrated in fig. 139 will appear on the display. The symbol (A) fig. 139 is grey with system enabled and turns white when the system is activate (set speed). F0S1152 WARNING It is dangerous to leave the system activated when it is not used. There is a risk of inadvertently activating it and losing control of the car due to unexpected excessive speed. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL DEACTIVATION With the system active, press and release the button (A) fig. 138 to deactivate it. The display will show a dedicated message. SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED The system can only be set with the speed over 5 km/h (3 mph) and under 150 km/h (93 mph). NOTE For the Low Range version, the maximum speed of the ACC is limited to 135 km/h (84 mph). When the car reaches the desired speed, press and release the button SET + or SET - to set the speed to the current speed. The display will show the set speed. Then take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Press the accelerator pedal to make the car go faster than the set speed. While the accelerator pedal is pressed: a dedicated graphic fig. 140 with the symbol (A) flashing will appear on the display for a few seconds; A 140 F0S1363 the system will not be able to control the distance between the car and the vehicle ahead. In this case the speed will be determined only by the position of the accelerator pedal. The system regains control of the car as soon as the accelerator pedal is released. The system cannot be set: when pressing the brake pedal; when the brakes are overheated; when the electric parking brake is engaged; when the transmission in P (Park), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral); when the car speed is not within the settable speed range; when the ESC (or ABS or other stability control systems) are operating or have just operated; when the Autonomous Emergency Brake Control (AEB) system is braking automatically; when the Speed Limiter is active: press the button (A) fig. 138 to deactivate the Speed Limiter. Press the (A) button again to set the system to "ready" status; in case of failure of the system; when the motor is off; in case of blinding or obstruction of the front camera. In case of system set, the conditions described above also cause a cancellation or deactivation of the system with times that may vary according to the conditions. WARNING The device is not deactivated when speeds higher than those set are reached with the accelerator pedal pressed. In these conditions, the device may not work correctly and it is advisable to deactivate it. INCREASING/DECREASING OF SPEED After having set the system, the stored speed can be increased or decreased by holding the SET + and SET - button pressed. Press the SET + or SET - button once: the set speed will increase or decrease by 1 km/h (1 mph). Each subsequent press of the button will result in an increase or decrease of 1 km/h (1 mph). Hold the SET + or SET - button pressed: the set speed will increase or decrease in 10 km/h steps (or 5 mph) until the button is released. The set speed increase or decrease is shown on the display. WARNINGS When the SET – button is pressed to reduce the speed, the braking system intervenes automatically if the exhaust brake does not slow the car down sufficiently to reach the set speed. The system holds the set speed uphill and downhill; however a slight variation is entirely normal, particularly on steep gradients. SPEED VARIATION WITH ROAD SIGN (INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL) The "Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control" system can be used to set a speed limit equal to that indicated on 147 STARTING AND DRIVING the road sign detected by the “Traffic Sign Recognition” system (see the respective paragraph in this section). When a new speed limit is recognised, the "Traffic Sign Information" system will suggest the new limit, which will be shown with a message on the instrument panel display. The driver can accept the new limit by pressing the RES button to set the Adaptive Cruise Control speed to that suggested by the road sign. The activation of the Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control is indicated by the symbol on the display and the green circle around the speed limit sign. REACHING A STANDSTILL The system can decelerate the car to a standstill when the vehicle in front of it slows down and stops. For speeds below 60 km/h (36 mph) and if visibility permits, the system can detect stopped cars and slow down to a safe distance. Once the car is stopped, the function will be deactivated. The system can be restarted from speeds above 5 km/h (3 mph) and by pressing one of the SET+, SET- or RES buttons. If the system keeps the vehicle stationary for two minutes, the electric parking brake will activate and the system will be deactivated. 148 RECALLING THE SPEED Once the system has been cancelled by pressing the brake pedal or the CANC button but not deactivated by pressing button (A) fig. 138, simply press the RES button and take your foot off the accelerator pedal to recall a previously set speed. The system will be set to the last stored speed. WARNING The recall function must only be used if the road and traffic conditions so allow. Recalling an excessively high or low speed for the current traffic and road conditions could cause a sudden acceleration or a deceleration of the car. Failure to comply with these precautions may cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. SETTING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN CARS 162) 163) 164) 165) The distance between your car and the vehicle ahead may be set to 1 bar (short), 2 bars (medium), 3 bars (long), 4 bars (maximum) fig. 141. 141 F0S1078 The distance from the vehicle ahead is proportional to speed. The interval of time showing ithe safe distance with respect to the vehicle ahead remains constant and varies from 1 second (for the short distance 1-bar setting) to 2 seconds (for the maximum distance 4-bar setting). The set distance is shown on the display by means of a dedicated icon (or in the “Driver Assist” area). The setting is 4 (maximum) the first time the system is used. After the distance has been modified by the driver, the new distance will be stored also after the system is deactivated and reactivated. To decrease the distance Press and release the button to decrease the distance setting (B) fig. 138. The distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter) every time the button is pressed. Once the shortest distance has been reached, a further press of the button will set the longest distance. The set speed is held if there are no cars ahead. If a vehicle is detected ahead in the same lane, travelling at slower speed, will appears page fig. 141 and icon on the display (where provided). The system will automatically adjust the car speed to hold the distance setting regardless of the set speed. The car holds the set distance until: the vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed higher than the set speed; the vehicle ahead leaves the lane or the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise Control system sensor; the distance setting is changed; the Adaptive Cruise Control System is deactivated or switched off; If the driver does not press the accelerator pedal. WARNING The maximum braking force applied by the system is limited. The driver may always apply the brakes, if needed. WARNING If the system predicts that the braking level is insufficient to maintain the set distance, it signals the driver to pay attention when approaching the vehicle ahead by displaying an alert message on the display. An acoustic signal is also emitted. In this case, it is advisable to brake immediately as necessary to hold a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. WARNING The driver is responsible for ensuring that there are no pedestrians, other cars or objectives along the direction of the car. Failure to comply with these precautions may cause serious accidents and injuries. WARNING The driver is fully responsible for holding a safe distance from the vehicle ahead respecting the highway code in force in the respective country. OVERTAKING AID FUNCTION 166) The Adaptive Cruise Control system, when traffic conditions permit, allows additional acceleration to be given to the vehicle to facilitate overtaking by simply activating the direction indicator. This additional acceleration is provided as long as the distance to the vehicle to be overtaken is guaranteed. Once acceleration is perceived, the driver must make sure that the traffic and cars coming from behind allow it, and to make the lane change manoeuvre. Once the trajectory is clear of vehicles, Adaptive Cruise Control will regain control of the selected speed, or reduce it to maintain the desired distance from the vehicle ahead. NOTE The overtaking aid function is only available on the side where overtaking is permitted according to the highway code (left in countries with traffic on the right side of the carriageway, right in countries with traffic on the left side). SPEED REDUCTION ON BENDS The Adaptive Cruise Control system CAN decelerate slightly on bends to improve vehicle stability and comfort. The functionality can be a valid help in roundabouts or with gradual bends, faced with increasing curvature; it cannot compensate for sudden steering or in general medium/high lateral accelerations. However, the driver is responsible, depending on the traffic scenario, to apply the brake, where necessary, to further reduce the speed of the vehicle, 149 STARTING AND DRIVING ensuring its stability in sharp bends or descending radius. EXTENSION OF ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL: CO-DRIVER The Adaptive Cruise Control system can work in conjunction with the Co-Driver system (see the respective paragraph in this chapter) to offer "Autonomous Level 2 Assistance". The Co-Driver will be able to maintain constant speed and distance, adaptable to the cars in front, and keep the car in the middle of the lane. NOTE The system is an aid for the driver, who must always pay full attention while driving. The responsibility always rests with the driver, who must take into account the traffic conditions in order to drive in complete safety. The driver is always required to pay attention to the road and keep his hands on the steering wheel. DEACTIVATION The system is deactivated and the set speed is cancelled if: the button (A) fig. 138 is pressed on the Adaptive Cruise Control; the Speed Limiter button is pressed; the starting system switch is in the STOP position; 150 the system is deactivated: when the CANC button is pressed; when the conditions shown in the “Setting the desired speed” paragraph occur; when the car reaches a stop behind a stopped vehicle. If these conditions occur while the system is decelerating with respect to a vehicle ahead, the system could continue the deceleration, if necessary, also after it is cancelled. NOTE The system always remembers the last distance desired and selected by the user. The system keeps the speed stored until you deactivate the system by pressing the (A) fig. 138 Adaptive Cruise Control button or turning the car off. SYSTEM LIMITED OPERATION WARNING If the dedicated message is shown on the display, a condition limiting the system operation may have occurred. The possible reasons of this limitation are something blocking the camera view or a fault. In case of camera blinding (e.g. caused by low sun in front of the windscreen), wait until the light and glare conditions cease and allow the system to operate fully. If an obstruction is signalled, clean the area of the windscreen indicated in fig. 151 and check that the message has disappeared. When the conditions limiting the system functions end, this will go back to normal and complete operation. Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat Dealership. PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING The system may not work correctly in some driving conditions (see below): the driver must control the car at all times. Vehicle not aligned The system may not detect a vehicle travelling on the same lane but which is not aligned along the same direction of travel or a vehicle which is cutting in from a side lane. Sufficient distance from the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in these cases. The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and out of the driving direction causing the car to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. Steering and curves On bends fig. 142 with the system set, it could limit speed and acceleration to guarantee car stability even if no cars are detected ahead. When leaving the bend, the system resets the previously set speed. 142 the utmost attention at all times and be always ready to press the brakes if needed. F0S1181 143 WARNING In case of narrow bends, the performance of the system could be limited. In this case, it is advisable to deactivate the device. Using the system on gradient When driving on roads with variable gradient, the system may not detect the presence of a vehicle on the lane. The system performance be limited according to speed, load of the car, traffic conditions and gradient steepness. Lane change The system may not detect the presence of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane fig. 143. In this case, sufficient distance from the vehicle which is changing lane may not be guaranteed: it is advisable to pay F0S1182 Small cars Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and motorcycles fig. 144) travelling near the outer edges of the lane or which enter the lane from kerbside are not detected until they are fully in the lane. Sufficient distance from the cars ahead may not be guaranteed in these cases. Stationary objects and vehicles The system cannot detect the presence of stationary objects and vehicles if you are travelling at a speed exceeding 60 km/h (37 mph). For example, the system may not operate if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a car stopped on the lane ahead of if. Pay the utmost attention at all times and be always ready to press the brakes if needed. Objects and cars moving in opposite or crosswise direction The system cannot detect the presence of objects or cars travelling in opposite or crosswise direction fig. 145 and consequently will not be operated. 145 144 F0S1184 F0S1183 151 STARTING AND DRIVING CO-DRIVER SYSTEM WITH FOLLOW TO STOP Traffic Jam Assist 168) To activate the system, press button (A) fig. 146 on the steering wheel. To deactivate the system press the button again. 167) The Co-Driver system combines the functions of the Active Cruise Control (ACC) and lane centring logic to control the trajectory of the car holding it as close as possible in the middle of the lane and also managing speed. It is a driving assistance system that can be activated on all road types. The system uses information from the front camera to help you keep the car in the middle of the lane at a constant speed. OPERATION The system only works if the driver keeps his or her hands on the steering wheel. If the system detects that hands have been removed from the steering wheel, it will alert you of the need to put your hands back on the steering wheel (see following pages). WARNING The Co-Driver system can take a few seconds to activate once all conditions are met. During this time, a grey indication will appear on the instrument panel display and the system will be activated automatically as soon as all conditions are met, without any intervention by the driver. 152 ACTIVATION / DEACTIVATION 146 F0S1373 The following conditions must be met before the Co-Driver system turns on: the Co-Driver system must be switched on by pressing the button (A) fig. 146 on the steering wheel; the Adaptive Cruise Control device (ACC) must be on; the car speed must be between 60 and 150 km/h; no anomaly related to the camera must be present; the direction indicators must not be activated; no anomaly related to the system must be present; if the set speed is less than 60 km/h the Co-Driver system will not work; if the speed of the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) device can be set to a higher value (top speed 150 km/h), the Co-Driver system is only available as long as the car speed is comprised between 60 and 150 km/h. Suspension conditions System operation is temporarily paused in the following cases: ACC system deactivation or inhibition (see paragraph the Adaptive Cruise Control function); if there are very tight bends; if the lines are not detected correctly; one of the two lines is broken or ruined; the sun is low and is dazzling the camera on the windscreen; if the left or right direction indicator is activated; if the driver intentionally changes lanes without switching on the direction indicator on the corresponding side; if there are system anomalies; if the car speed exceeds the maximum limit; if lateral acceleration is high. Automatic deactivation The Co-Driver system is automatically deactivated if you take your hands off the steering wheel for 45 seconds. WARNING When the Co-Driver is paused the related graphics in the dedicated area will turn grey. WARNING Hands on the steering wheel are detected by a capacitive sensor installed in it. When the suspension conditions are over, the Co-Driver will be available again without requiring any reactivation action by the driver. INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY The system status can always be viewed through a dedicated area on the instrument panel display. The system status is indicated by the symbol. colour of the If the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel, a series of warnings will appear on the instrument panel display to alert the driver that he needs to reposition his hands on the steering wheel. Acoustic signals will also be emitted. After a certain period of time, the CoDriver system will be disabled if the driver has not repositioned his or her hands on the steering wheel. When the system does not detect hands on the steering wheel for a few seconds, it will warn the driver by displaying a dedicated screen at the centre of the instrument panel display (see the description in the following pages). SYSTEM STATUS System active: The active and correctly operating system status is indicated by the following screen on the instrument panel display fig. 147 in the "Driver Assistance" menu. When the hands are removed from the steering wheel, the system does not deactivate automatically, but after a few seconds: some dedicated screens appear on the instrument panel display in sequence, to warn the driver to return his or her hands to the steering wheel (see the description below). 147 F0S1116 System active (hands removed from the steering wheel for a short time): As soon as you remove your from the steering wheel, this screen fig. 148 appears on the instrument panel display: in this case, the system remains active. If the driver has not returned his or her hands to the steering wheel within a few seconds, this screen fig. 149 will appear on the instrument panel display. 148 F0S1117 149 F0S1118 Active system (hands removed from the steering wheel for a long time): If you do not place your hands on the steering wheel, the following screen will appear on the display of the 153 STARTING AND DRIVING instrument panel, fig. 150. An acoustic warning will sound also in this case. If you do not put your hands back on the steering wheel after an extended period of time, a deactivation message will appear on the instrument panel. The steering wheel control will then be deactivated. 150 F0S1119 When the Co-Driver system is active, Lane Control (where provided) is temporarily paused. When the Co-Driver system is not active, Lane Control (where provided), if previously activated, is still available. For more information on the Lane Control system, see the “Driving assistance systems” chapter in the "Safety" section. SYSTEM AVAILABILITY External factors and conditions may affect the proper operation of the CoDriver system. 154 The main ones are listed below: narrow, winding and curvy streets; poor visibility (due to heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.); front lights of incoming cars or direct sunlight or shade; damage or obstructions caused by mud, ice, snow, etc.; interference with other equipment that causes electromagnetic waves; presence of roadworks/road construction sites; if the indications given by the navigation system (where provided) of the Uconnect™ system are not yet ready and/or if the navigation system is recalculating the route. SYSTEM LIMITED OPERATION The Co-Driver may have limited or reduced functionality when one of the following conditions occurs: The main ones are listed below: lane marking lines are not clear or in conditions of poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.); the camera is damaged, covered or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.); when driving in the hills or on roads with narrow turns; near motorway toll-gates; when the motorway entrance or exit is more than 6 meters wide; if the camera is exposed to dazzling light (e.g. reflection or direct sunlight). CO-DRIVER SYSTEM WITH STOP&GO Adaptive Cruise Control with Stop&Go (where provided) 169) DESCRIPTION The Adaptive Cruise Control with Stop&Go is a driver assistance device which combines the Cruise Control functions with one for controlling the distance from the vehicle ahead. The system allows the car to be held at the desired speed without needing to press the accelerator. It also allows holding the distance set by the driver from the vehicle ahead. The system uses a radar sensor, located behind the front bumper and a camera, located in the middle area of the windscreen fig. 151, to detect the presence of a vehicle close ahead. ACTIVATION 168) To activate the device, press and release the button (A) fig. 152. A B 151 153 F0S1286 WARNINGS If the sensor does not detect any vehicle ahead, the device will maintain a fixed set speed. If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the device automatically intervenes by braking (or accelerating) slightly in order not to exceed the original set speed, so that the car keeps the preset distance, seeking to adapt to the speed of the vehicle ahead. It is advisable to turn the device off in the following cases: driving in fog, heavy rain, snow and in complex driving situations; driving near a bend (winding roads), icy, snowy, slippery roads or with steep slopes and descents; entering a turn lane or on a slip road; when circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed. 152 F0S1372 When the system is enabled and ready for operation, a graphic indicating the "readiness" of the system (A) and a dedicated icon (B) depicted as illustrated in fig. 153 will appear on the display. The symbol (A) fig. 153 is grey with system enabled and turns white when the system is activate (set speed). F0S1152 WARNING It is dangerous to leave the device activated when it is not used. There is a risk of inadvertently activating it and losing control of the car due to unexpected excessive speed. DEACTIVATION With the device active, to deactivate it press and release the button (A) fig. 152. SETTING THE DESIRED SPEED The desired speed can be set even when the vehicle is stationary, from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 135 km/h (83 mph) for the "Low range" version or 150 km/h (93 mph) for the "High range" version. When the car reaches the desired speed, press and release the button SET + or SET - to set the speed to the current speed. The display will show 155 STARTING AND DRIVING 156 the set speed. Then take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Press the accelerator pedal to make the car go faster than the set speed. While the accelerator pedal is pressed: a dedicated message will appear on the display for a few seconds; the device will not be able to control the distance between the vehicle and the one ahead. In this case the speed will be determined only by the position of the accelerator pedal. The device will return to normal operation as soon as the accelerator pedal is released. The system cannot be set: when pressing the brake pedal; when the brakes are overheated; when the electric parking brake is engaged; when the transmission in P (Park), R (Reverse) or N (Neutral); when the ESC (or ABS or other stability control systems) are operating or have just operated; when the Autonomous Emergency Brake Control (AEB Control) system (where provided) is braking automatically; when the Speed Limiter is active: press the button (A) fig. 152 to deactivate the Speed Limiter. Press the (A) button again to set the system to "ready" status; in case of failure of the device; when the motor is off; on very steep slopes; in case of radar sensor obstruction: in this case, clean the sensor. Use a clean cloth for cleaning. Do not use solvents or abrasive paste. In case of system set, the conditions described above also cause a cancellation or deactivation of the system with times that may vary according to the conditions. WARNING The device is not deactivated when speeds higher than those set are reached with the accelerator pedal pressed. In these conditions, the device may not work correctly and it is advisable to deactivate it. INCREASING/DECREASING OF SPEED After having set the system, the stored speed can be increased or decreased by holding the SET + and SET buttons pressed. Press the SET + or SET - button once: the set speed will increase or decrease by 1 km/h (1 mph). Each subsequent press of the button will result in an increase or decrease of 1 km/h (1 mph). Hold the SET + or SET - button pressed: the set speed will increase or decrease in 10 km/h steps (or 5 mph) until the button is released. The set speed increase or decrease is shown on the display. WARNINGS By keeping the accelerator pedal depressed, the car can continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. In this case, press the SET + (or SET – ) button to set the speed to the current speed of the car. When the SET – button is pressed to reduce the speed, the braking system intervenes automatically if the exhaust brake does not slow the car down sufficiently to reach the set speed. The system holds the set speed uphill and downhill; however a slight variation is entirely normal, particularly on steep gradients. The device is switched off while driving if the brakes overheat. SPEED VARIATION WITH ROAD SIGN (INTELLIGENT ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL) The "Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control" system can be used to set a speed limit equal to that indicated on the road sign detected by the “Traffic Sign Recognition” system (see the respective paragraph in this section). When a new speed limit is recognised, the "Traffic Sign Information" system will suggest the new limit, which will be shown with a message on the instrument panel display. The driver can accept the new limit by pressing the RES button to set the Adaptive Cruise Control speed to that suggested by the road sign. The activation of the Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control is indicated by the on the display and the symbol green circle around the speed limit sign. COMING TO A STOP AND RESTARTING The system can decelerate the car to a standstill when the vehicle in front of it slows down and stops. The system will automatically restart the car if the car comes to a stop and the vehicle in front restarts within 3 seconds. If the vehicle in front restarts after 3 seconds, the RES button or the accelerator pedal must be pressed to reactivate the system and restart. If the system keeps the car at a standstill for 2 minutes, the electric parking brake will activate and the system will be deactivated. NOTE The electric parking brake will be activated and the system will be deactivated at speeds close to stopping, if the driver unbuckles the seat belt or opens the door. cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. WARNING The driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or other obstacles in front of the car when the system is reactivated. Failure to comply with this precaution may cause serious accidents and fatal injuries. SETTING THE DISTANCE BETWEEN CARS RECALLING THE SPEED Once the system has been cancelled by pressing the brake pedal or the CANC button but not deactivated by pressing button (A) fig. 152, simply press the RES button and take your foot off the accelerator pedal to recall a previously set speed. The system will be set to the last stored speed. Before returning to the previously set speed, bring the speed close to that value, then press the RES button and release it. WARNING The recall function must only be used if the road and traffic conditions so allow. Recalling an excessively high or low speed for the current traffic and road conditions could cause a sudden acceleration or a deceleration of the car. Failure to comply with these precautions may 162) 163) 164) 165) The distance between your car and the vehicle ahead may be set to 1 bar (short), 2 bars (medium), 3 bars (long), 4 bars (maximum) fig. 154. 154 F0S1078 The distances from the vehicle ahead are proportional to speed. The interval of time with respect to the vehicle ahead remains constant and varies from 1 second (for the short distance 1-bar setting) to 2 seconds (for the maximum distance 4-bar setting). The set distance is shown on the display by means of a dedicated icon (A) fig. 155 (or in the “Driver Assist” area). 157 STARTING AND DRIVING The setting is 4 (maximum) the first time the device is used. After the distance has been modified by the driver, the new distance will be stored also after the system is deactivated and reactivated. A 155 F0S1363 To decrease the distance Press and release the button to decrease the distance setting (B) fig. 152. The distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter) every time the button is pressed. Once the shortest distance has been reached, a further press of the button will set the longest distance. The set speed is held if there are no cars ahead. If a vehicle shown on the instrument panel proceeds in the same lane, travelling at slower speed, an icon appears on the display (where provided). The device will automatically 158 adjust the car speed to hold the distance setting regardless of the set speed. The car holds the set distance until: the vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed higher than the set speed; the vehicle ahead leaves the lane or the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise Control device sensor; the distance setting is changed; the Adaptive Cruise Control device is deactivated/cancelled. WARNING The maximum breaking applied by the device is limited. The driver may apply the brakes in all cases if needed. WARNING If the system predicts that the braking level is insufficient to maintain the set distance, it signals the driver to pay attention when approaching the vehicle ahead by displaying an alert message on the display. An acoustic signal is also emitted. In this case, it is advisable to brake immediately as necessary to hold a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. WARNING The driver is responsible for ensuring that there are no pedestrians, other cars or objectives along the direction of the car. Failure to comply with these precautions may cause serious accidents and injuries. WARNING The driver is fully responsible for holding a safe distance from the vehicle ahead respecting the highway code in force in the respective country. OVERTAKING AID FUNCTION 166) The Adaptive Cruise Control system, when traffic conditions permit, allows additional acceleration to be given to the vehicle to facilitate overtaking by simply activating the direction indicator. This additional acceleration is provided as long as the distance to the vehicle to be overtaken is guaranteed. Once acceleration is perceived, the driver must make sure that the traffic and cars coming from behind allow it, and to make the lane change manoeuvre. Once the trajectory is clear of vehicles, Adaptive Cruise Control will regain control of the selected speed, or reduce it to maintain the desired distance from the vehicle ahead. NOTE The overtaking aid function is only available on the side where overtaking is permitted according to the highway code (left in countries with traffic on the right side of the carriageway, right in countries with traffic on the left side). SPEED REDUCTION ON BENDS The Adaptive Cruise Control system CAN decelerate slightly on bends to improve vehicle stability and comfort. The functionality can be a valid help in roundabouts or with gradual bends, faced with increasing curvature; it cannot compensate for sudden steering or in general medium/high lateral accelerations. However, the driver is responsible, depending on the traffic scenario, to apply the brake, where necessary, to further reduce the speed of the vehicle, ensuring its stability in sharp bends or descending radius. DEACTIVATION The device is deactivated and the set speed is cancelled if: the (A) fig. 152 button is pressed on the Adaptive Cruise Control; the Speed Limiter button is pressed; the ignition device switch is in the STOP position; The device is cancelled (the set speed and distance are stored): when the CANC button is pressed; when the conditions shown in the “Setting the desired speed” paragraph occur. If these conditions occur while the system is decelerating with respect to a vehicle ahead, the system could continue the deceleration, if necessary, also after it is cancelled or deactivated within the minimum speed settable on the system. SYSTEM LIMITED OPERATION WARNING If the dedicated message is shown on the display, a condition limiting the system operation may have occurred. The possible reasons of this limitation are something blocking the camera view or a fault. In case of camera blinding (e.g. caused by low sun in front of the windscreen or in the conditions of fog or heavy rain), wait until the light and glare conditions cease and allow the system to operate fully. If an obstruction is signalled, clean the area of the windscreen indicated in fig. 151 and check that the message has disappeared. When the conditions limiting the system functions end, this will go back to normal and complete operation. Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat Dealership. PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING The system may not work correctly in some driving conditions (see below): the driver must control the car at all times. Vehicle not aligned The system may not detect a vehicle travelling on the same lane but which is not aligned along the same direction of travel or a vehicle which is cutting in from a side lane. Sufficient distance from the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in these cases. The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and out of the driving direction causing the car to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. Steering and curves On bends fig. 156 with the system set, it could limit speed and acceleration to guarantee car stability even if no cars are detected ahead. When leaving the bend, the system tends to reset the previously set speed. 156 F0S1374 159 STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING In case of narrow bends, the performance of the system could be limited. In this case, it is advisable to deactivate the device. Using the system on gradient When driving on roads with variable gradient, the system may not detect the presence of a vehicle on the lane. The system performance be limited according to speed, load of the car, traffic conditions and gradient steepness. Lane change The system may not detect the presence of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane fig. 157. In this case, sufficient distance from the vehicle which is changing lane may not be guaranteed: it is advisable to pay the utmost attention at all times and be always ready to press the brakes if needed. 157 160 F0S1182 Small cars Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and motorcycles fig. 158) travelling near the outer edges of the lane or which enter the lane from kerbside are not detected until they are fully in the lane. Sufficient distance from the cars ahead may not be guaranteed in these cases. Objects and cars moving in opposite or crosswise direction The system cannot detect the presence of objects or cars travelling in opposite or crosswise direction fig. 159 and consequently will not be operated. 159 158 F0S1183 Stationary objects and vehicles The system cannot detect the presence of stationary objects and vehicles if you are travelling at a speed exceeding 60 km/h (37 mph). For example, the system may not operate if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a car stopped on the lane ahead of if. Pay the utmost attention at all times and be always ready to press the brakes if needed. F0S1184 CO-DRIVER SYSTEM WITH STOP&GO - Traffic Jam Assist (where provided) The system combines Active Cruise Control (ACC) functions and lane centring logic to control the trajectory of the car holding it as close as possible in the middle of the lane and also managing speed. It is a driving assistance system that can be activated on all road types. The system uses information from the front camera and radar to help you keep the car in the middle of the lane at a constant speed. If the event that the lane marking line is missing or not correctly recognised, the Co-Driver system may also use information from adjacent and preceding vehicles. This condition may occur in congested traffic, when the car in front and/or objects around the car obstruct the lane markings. In this case, the system can use the queues of cars in the traffic to define the driving trajectory. Alternatively, the system can use the "lock-on" strategy, which allows it to automatically follow the car in front. OPERATION The system only works if the driver keeps his or her hands on the steering wheel. If the system detects that hands have been removed from the steering wheel, it will alert you of the need to put your hands back on the steering wheel (see following pages). WARNING The Co-Driver system can take a few seconds to activate once all conditions are met. During this time, a grey indication will appear on the instrument panel display and the system will be activated automatically as soon as all conditions are met, without any intervention by the driver. 160 F0S1373 The following conditions must be met before the Co-Driver system turns on: the Co-Driver system must be switched on by pressing the button (A) fig. 160 on the steering wheel; the Adaptive Cruise Control device (ACC) must be on; the car speed must be between 0 and 150 km/h; no anomaly related to the camera or the radar must be present; the road lane width must be between 2.7 metres and 4.2 metres; the direction indicators must not be activated; no anomaly related to the system must be present. ACTIVATION / DEACTIVATION To activate the system, press button (A) fig. 160 on the steering wheel. To deactivate the system press the button again. Suspension conditions System operation is temporarily paused in the following cases: ACC system deactivation or inhibition (see paragraph the Adaptive Cruise Control function); if there are very tight bends; one of the two lines is broken or ruined; the sun is low and is dazzling the camera on the windscreen; if the left or right direction indicator is activated; if the driver intentionally changes lanes without switching on the direction indicator on the corresponding side; when there is no surrounding traffic and there are no horizontal markings or they cannot be detected; if there are system anomalies; if the car speed exceeds the maximum limit; if lateral acceleration is high; poor visibility (due to heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.); Automatic deactivation The system is deactivated if you take your hands off the steering wheel for 45 seconds. WARNING When the Co-Driver is paused the related graphics in the dedicated area will turn grey. 161 STARTING AND DRIVING 162 WARNING Hands on the steering wheel are detected by a capacitive sensor installed in it. When the suspension conditions are over, the Co-Driver will be available again without requiring any reactivation action by the driver. INDICATIONS ON THE DISPLAY The system status can always be viewed through a dedicated area on the instrument panel display. The system status is indicated by the symbol. colour of the If the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel, a series of warnings will appear on the instrument panel display to alert the driver that he needs to reposition his hands on the steering wheel. Acoustic signals will also be emitted. After a certain period of time, the CoDriver system will be disabled if the driver has not repositioned his or her hands on the steering wheel. When the system does not detect hands on the steering wheel for a few seconds, it will warn the driver by displaying a dedicated screen at the centre of the instrument panel display (see the description in the following pages). SYSTEM STATUS System active: The active and correctly operating system status is indicated by the following screen on the instrument panel display fig. 161 in the "Driver Assistance" menu. When the hands are removed from the steering wheel, the system does not deactivate automatically, but after a few seconds: some dedicated screens appear on the instrument panel display in sequence, to warn the driver to return his or her hands to the steering wheel (see the description below). 161 F0S1116 System active (hands removed from the steering wheel for a short time): As soon as you remove your from the steering wheel, this screen fig. 162 appears on the instrument panel display: in this case, the system remains active. If the driver has not returned his or her hands to the steering wheel within a few seconds, this screen fig. 163 will appear on the instrument panel display. 162 F0S1117 163 F0S1118 Active system (hands removed from the steering wheel for a long time): If you do not place your hands on the steering wheel, the following screen will appear on the display of the instrument panel, fig. 164. An acoustic warning will sound also in this case. If you remove your hands from the steering wheel, a countdown will begin which will result in the activation of visual and audible alerts (see the description provided in the "Co-Driver with Stop&Go - Traffic Jam Assist" section in this chapter). Furthermore, the system will initiate a minimum risk manoeuvre to bring the car to safety if no hands are detected. The Adaptive Cruise Control system will braking slightly 23 seconds after your hands have been removed from the steering wheel to warn you and encourage you to regain control of the car. If the driver does not regain control of the vehicle after a further 3 seconds, the system will brake again lightly. Subsequently, the system will automatically braking to bring the vehicle to a stop if you still do not put your hands back on the steering wheel persists. The hazard warning lights will be activated as soon as the system activates the automatic braking. When the vehicle is at a standstill, the system will unlock the doors (if previously locked) and keep the hazard lights on. If you regain control of the vehicle during the minimum risk manoeuvre, placing your hands on the steering wheel or pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the system to behave normally and the minimum risk manoeuvre will be aborted. 164 F0S1119 When the Co-Driver system is active, Lane Control (where provided) is temporarily paused. When the Co-Driver system is not active, Lane Control (where provided), if previously activated, is still available. For more information on the Lane Control system, see the “Driving assistance systems” chapter in the "Safety" section. SYSTEM LIMITED OPERATION The Co-Driver may have limited or reduced functionality when one of the following conditions occurs: The main ones are listed below: lane marking lines are not clear or in conditions of poor visibility (e.g. in heavy rain, snow, fog, etc.); either the camera or radar are damaged, covered or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, snow, etc.); when driving in the hills or on roads with narrow turns; near motorway toll-gates; when the motorway entrance or exit is more than 6 meters wide; if the camera is exposed to dazzling light (e.g. reflection or direct sunlight). WARNING 146) Pay the utmost attention while driving at all times and be always ready to press the brakes if needed. 147) The system is an aid for the driver, who must always pay full attention while driving. The responsibility always rests with the driver, who must take into account the traffic conditions in order to drive in complete safety. The driver must always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. 148) The system is an aid for car driving, it DOES NOT warn the driver about incoming cars outside of the detection areas. The driver must always maintain a sufficient level of attention to the traffic and road conditions and for controlling the trajectory of the vehicle. 149) The device is not activated in presence of pedestrians, oncoming vehicles in the opposite direction of travel or moving in the crosswise direction and stationary objects (e.g. a vehicle standing in a queue or a broken down vehicle). 163 STARTING AND DRIVING 164 150) The device cannot take account of road, traffic and weather conditions and conditions of poor visibility (e.g. fog). 151) The device does not always fully recognise complicated driving conditions which could cause incorrect or nonexisting determination of the safe distance to be held. 152) When driving on two-way roads where there is no lane dividing centre line (e.g. on country roads), the use of the ACC and Co-Driver systems is strongly discouraged as this system could detect the entire carriageway as single-lane dividing lines. 153) Do not place any objects on the steering wheel (e.g. steering wheel covers of any type or material) which could interfere with the capacitive hand detection sensor on the steering wheel. 154) Many unpredictable situations can arise, affecting the performance of CoDriver system. The driver must be ready to react immediately and take control of the car in place of Co-Driver system. 155) If the car approaches a bend that is too tight with respect to the current speed, the Co-Driver system turns off. The driver must therefore be ready to immediately regain control of the car at any time. To avoid this situation it is important that the car speed set does not exceed the current road speed limit. 156) The Co-Driver system uses a hands on steering wheel detection sensor: the driver must keep his hands on the steering wheel at all times. If the hands are removed from the steering wheel for a certain period of time, the system disengages. 157) When using Co-Driver system, hold the steering wheel and consider the road conditions and surrounding traffic. The driver must therefore be ready to immediately regain control of the car at any time. Failure to observe these instructions can cause severe injuries with even lethal consequences. 158) The Co-Driver system is an aid for the driver, who must always pay full attention while driving. The responsibility always rests with the driver, who must take into account the traffic conditions in order to drive in complete safety. The driver must always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. 159) If the windscreen must be replaced due to scratches, chipping or breakage, contact exclusively a Fiat Dealership. Do not replace the windscreen on your own, risk of malfunction! It is advisable to replace the windscreen if it is damaged in the area of the camera. 160) Driving the car on urban routes could significantly change the sensitivity of the system, due to the limited and/or lack of vertical and horizontal signs and variable traffic conditions. 161) External factors and conditions may affect the proper operation of the Co-Driver system: damage or obstructions caused by mud, ice, snow, etc., damaged or misaligned bumpers, interference with other equipment that causes electromagnetic waves. 162) The maximum breaking applied by the device is limited. The driver may apply the brakes in all cases if needed. 163) If the device predicts that the level of braking is not sufficient to maintain the set distance, the word “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message on the instrument panel display warns the driver that the vehicle ahead is too close. An acoustic signal is also emitted. In this case, it is advisable to brake immediately as necessary to hold a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. 164) The driver is responsible for ensuring that there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or objectives along the direction of the vehicle. Failure to comply with these precautions may cause serious accidents and injuries. 165) The driver is fully responsible for holding a safe distance from the vehicle ahead respecting the highway code in force in the respective country. 166) The device detects the direction of traffic automatically when the car passes from left-hand traffic to right-hand traffic. In this case, the overtaking assist function is only active when the reference vehicle is overtaken on the right. The additional acceleration is activated when the driver uses the right direction indicator. In this condition, the device no longer provides the overtaking assist function on the lefthand side until it determines that the car has returned to left-hand traffic conditions. 167) The device cannot apply the maximum braking force: the car will not be stopped completely. 168) It is dangerous to leave the device on when it is not used. There is a risk of inadvertently activating it and losing control of the car due to unexpected excessive speed. 169) The device can take the car to a standstill but the driver must always be ready to apply the brakes, if necessary. IMPORTANT 37) The system may have limited operation or not work at all in weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, low sun, blinded camera, thick fog, heavy snow. 38) The camera on the windscreen must not be covered with stickers or any other object. 39) Operation can be adversely affected by any structural change made to the car, such as a modification to the front geometry, tyre change, or a heavier load than the standard load of the car. 40) Incorrect repairs in the zone where the camera is mounted may interfere with its field of vision and reduce its performance (e.g. application of fillers or glues to remove scratches). Go to a Fiat Dealership for any operation of this type. 41) Do not tamper with nor operate on the camera on the windscreen. In the case of damage, contact a Fiat Dealership. 42) Do not wash with high-pressure jets in the bumper lower area: in particular do not operate on the system's electrical connector. Do not use solvents or abrasive paste. 43) Be careful in case of repairs and painting in the zone around the sensor. In the event of a frontal impact the sensor may automatically deactivate and display a warning to indicate that the sensor needs to be repaired. Even without a malfunction warning, deactivate the system operation if you think that the position of the radar sensor has changed (e.g. due to low-speed frontal impact as during parking manoeuvres). In these cases, go to a Fiat Dealership to have the radar sensor realigned or replaced. 44) Do not use the Co-Driver off-road, where the road surface is not well defined or on roads where the road markings are missing (e.g. work in progress, roads with temporary tarmac). The system is designed for use on perfectly tarmacked roads only. 45) In case of strong variations in light (e.g. tunnel entrances and exits), the sensor may not function correctly due to temporary blinding and therefore the system may not be active. PARK ASSIST SYSTEM VERSIONS WITH 3 SENSORS (where provided) 170) 46) 47) 48) The parking sensors, located in the rear bumper fig. 165, detect the presence of any obstacles and warn the driver about them, through an acoustic warning and, where provided, visual warnings on the instrument panel display. 165 F0S1154 System activation The system is automatically activated when reverse is engaged. System deactivation The system is automatically deactivated whenever a gear other than reverse is engaged. Acoustic warning When reverse is engaged and there is an obstacle behind the car, an acoustic warning with variable frequency is activated: increases as the distance between the car and the obstacle decreases; becomes continuous when the distance between the car and the obstacle is less than 30 cm and stops if the distance increases; is constant if the distance between the car and the obstacle is unchanged. If this situation concerns the exterior sensors, the signal will stop after approximately 3 seconds to avoid, for 165 STARTING AND DRIVING 166 example, indications in the event of manoeuvres along a wall. If several obstacles are detected by the sensors, only the nearest one is considered. Warning on display The warnings regarding the Park Assist system are shown on the instrument panel display only if the "Acoustic warning and display" item in the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system is selected (see "Settings" in the section "Vehicle mode" in the "Multimedia" section). In addition to the acoustic warning, the system indicates the presence of an obstacle in the rear area by displaying a single arc blinking in one of the possible areas, in accordance with the distance of the object and the position in relation to the car. In general, the car is closer to the obstacle when a single flashing arc is shown on the display and the acoustic warning becomes continuous. If several obstacles are detected simultaneously in the rear area, the display will show all of them, regardless of the area in which they were detected. The colour on the display depends on the distance from and position of the obstacle. Fault indication Parking sensor faults, if any, will be indicated by a message on the display (see description in the "Warning lights and messages" chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section). General warnings When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles that may be above or under the sensor. Objects close to the car are not detected under certain circumstances and could therefore cause damage to the car or be damaged. Some conditions may influence the performance of the parking system: reduced sensor sensitivity and a reduction in the parking assistance system performance could be due to the presence of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint, on the surface of the sensor; the sensor may detect a non-existent obstacle ("echo interference") due to mechanical interference, for example when washing the car, in rain (strong wind), hail; the signals sent by the sensor can also be altered by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle; the performance of the system can be influenced by the position of the sensors, e.g. by changing the setup of the car (due to wear of shock absorbers or suspensions), replacing the tyres with others of different sizes, travelling with a laden car, installing specific set-ups to lower the car; the presence of adhesives on the sensors. Therefore, take care not to place stickers on the sensors. VERSIONS WITH 11 SENSORS The parking sensors, located in the front bumper fig. 166 e fig. 167 (one per side) and rear bumper fig. 168, detect the presence of any obstacles and warn the driver through an acoustic warning and, where provided, visual warnings on the instrument panel display. 166 F0S1185 WARNING The Park Assist system keeps its activation/deactivation status in memory. After manually deactivating it, it remains in this condition until it is reactivated by a button, even after the car has been switched off and then on again. Manual system activation/deactivation 167 F0S1270 169 168 F0S1186 F0S1215 To deactivate the system, press button (A) fig. 169 located on the left side of the dashboard (left-hand drive versions). The change from active system to deactivated and vice versa is always indicated by an appropriate message on the instrument panel display. The LED on the button indicates the system on or off status: The LED is off when the system is active; The LED is on when the system was manually deactivated by the user or in a fault or temporary disable condition. If the off button is pressed with the system faulty, the LED flashes for about 5 seconds, then it stays off. Activation/deactivation of acoustic and visual signals With the system active, the acoustic and visual signals are activated automatically in the following cases: when the transmission is in position (D) and an obstacle is detected; when the transmission is in reverse (R); when the transmission is in neutral (N) and an obstacle is detected with the car in motion. The acoustic and visual signals are deactivated automatically in the following cases: when the transmission is in position (D) or in neutral (N) and the car exceeds a speed of about 13 km/h; when the transmission is in reverse (R) and the car exceeds a speed of approximately 11 km/h (this will cause the LED on the on/off button to illuminate); when the transmission is in position (N) and the car is at a standstill; 167 STARTING AND DRIVING 168 when the transmission is in parking position (P). Acoustic warning When the sensors detect an obstacle within the trajectory of the car, an acoustic warning is activated with a frequency that increases as the distance from the obstacle decreases and then becomes a continuous tone when this distance becomes less than about 30 cm. The acoustic warning is interrupted in the following situations: when external sensors detect an obstacle at a constant distance (example: manoeuvring along a wall); if car is at a standstill with the transmission in a position other than reverse (R); when the obstacle is not within the trajectory of the car. If the sensors detect several obstacles at the same time, both in the front and rear area, the acoustic warning of the obstacle in the nearest trajectory is reproduced. When the system emits an acoustic warning, the volume of the Uconnect™system, if activated, is automatically lowered. The acoustic indications are only activated when the obstacle is on the trajectory of the car and so there is a real risk of collision. Visual warnings ("Display warning", see below) are always given to the driver, even when the obstacle is not in the trajectory of the car and will be of a different colour depending on whether it has been detected inside or outside the trajectory. In case of failure of the car audio system, the acoustic warnings will be provided by the buzzer of the instrument panel and will not be directional (the acoustic warning will not be from the side where the obstacle has been detected). Warning on display The warnings regarding the system are shown on the instrument panel display only if the "Acoustic warning and display" item in the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system is selected (see "Settings" in the section "Vehicle mode" in the "Multimedia" section). The system indicates the presence of an obstacle by displaying a single arc in one of the possible areas, in accordance with the distance of the object and the position in relation to the car. As you approach an obstacle within the front or rear coverage area, the display will show a single arc in the corresponding area, either flashing or steady. The colour depends on the distance and position of the obstacle inside or outside the trajectory of the car. An obstacle detected in a continuous tone area is always marked with a red arc. If several obstacles are detected simultaneously in the front and rear area, the display will show all of them, regardless of the area in which they were detected. Fault indication Parking sensor faults, if any, will be indicated by a message on the display (see description in the "Warning lights and messages" chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section). Messages on the display In case of system failure an acoustic warning is emitted and the display shows a dedicated message for about 5 seconds. If the display shows messages requiring the front or rear sensor cleaning, make sure that the outer surface and the underside of the bumper is free of dirt (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). After performing this check, place the ignition device in STOP position, then turn it to the ENGINE and check whether the messages are no longer displayed. If messages are still displayed, contact a Fiat Dealership. General warnings When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles that may be above or under the sensor. Objects close to the car are not detected under certain circumstances and could therefore cause damage to the car or be damaged. Some conditions may influence the performance of the parking system: reduced sensor sensitivity and a reduction in the parking assistance system performance could be due to the presence of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint, on the surface of the sensor; the sensor may detect a non-existent obstacle ("echo interference") due to mechanical interference, for example when washing the car, in rain (strong wind), hail; the signals sent by the sensor can also be altered by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle; the performance of the system can be influenced by the position of the sensors, e.g. by changing the setup of the car (due to wear of shock absorbers or suspensions), replacing the tyres with others of different sizes, travelling with a laden car, installing specific set-ups to lower the car; the presence of adhesives on the sensors. Therefore, take care not to place stickers on the sensors. 46) WARNING 170) Parking and other potentially dangerous manoeuvres are, however, always the driver’s responsibility. When performing these operations, always make sure that there are no other people (especially children) or animals on the route you want to take. The parking sensors are an aid for the driver, but the driver must never allow their attention to lapse during potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even those executed at low speeds. IMPORTANT 46) The sensors must be clean of mud, dirt, snow or ice in order for the system to operate correctly. Be careful not to scratch or damage the sensors while cleaning them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The sensors should be washed using clean water with the addition of car shampoo if necessary. When using special washing equipment such as high pressure jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors very quickly keeping the jet more than 10 cm away. 47) Have interventions on the bumper in the area of the sensors carried out only by a Fiat Dealership. Interventions on the bumper that are not carried out properly may compromise the operation of the parking sensors. 48) Only have the bumper repainted or any retouches to the paintwork in the area of the sensors carried out by a Fiat Dealership. Incorrect paint application could affect the operation of the parking sensors. SIDE DISTANCE WARNING SYSTEM (where provided) The Side Distance Warning system has the function of detecting the presence of side obstacles using the sensors located in the front bumper fig. 170 (one per side) and rear bumper fig. 171, and of warning the driver through an acoustic warning and, where provided, visual warnings on the instrument panel display. 170 F0S1270 169 STARTING AND DRIVING 171 F0S1288 ACTIVATION/ DEACTIVATION The system can operate only after driving a short distance and if the car speed is between 0 and 13 km/h. The system can be activated/deactivated via the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system (see the Multimedia section for further information). ACOUSTIC WARNING If there is an obstacle at the side of the vehicle, an acoustic warning is emitted and the signal varies as the distance of the obstacle from the bumper varies. The frequency of the acoustic warning: increases as the distance between the car and the obstacle decreases; becomes continuous when the distance between the car and the obstacle is less than 30 cm and stops if the distance increases; 170 is constant if the distance between the car and the obstacle is unchanged. The acoustic warning is interrupted after about 3 seconds if the car is stationary or manoeuvring along a wall. If the sensors detect several obstacles at the same time, both in the front and rear zones the acoustic warning of the obstacle in the nearest trajectory is reproduced. When the system emits an acoustic warning, the volume of the Uconnect™system, if activated, is automatically lowered. The acoustic indications are only activated when the obstacle is on the trajectory of the car and so there is a real risk of collision. Visual warnings ("Warnings on the display", see below) are always given to the driver, even when the obstacle is not in the trajectory of the car and will be of a different colour depending on whether it has been detected inside or outside the trajectory. In case of failure of the car audio system, the acoustic warnings will be provided by the buzzer of the instrument panel and will not be directional (the acoustic warning will not be from the side where the obstacle has been detected). WARNINGS ON THE DISPLAY The indications regarding the Side Distance Warning system are shown on the instrument panel display only if the respective item in the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system is selected (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). The system indicates the presence of an obstacle by displaying a single arc in one of the possible areas, in accordance with the distance of the object and the position in relation to the car. If the obstacle is detected in the right or left side area, a single flashing arc will be displayed as the obstacle approaches, in addition to an acoustic warning. If several obstacles are detected simultaneously in the side area, the display will show all of them, regardless of the area in which they were detected. In general, the car is closer to the obstacle when a single or several flashing arcs are shown on the display and the acoustic warning becomes continuous. The colour of the arches shown on the display according to the distance and position of the obstacle inside or outside the trajectory of the car. An obstacle detected in a continuous tone area is always marked with a red arc. GENERAL WARNINGS FAULT INDICATION Parking sensor faults, if any, will be indicated by the switching on of the symbol on the instrument panel together with the message on the display (see description in the "Warning lights and messages" chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section). Some conditions may influence the performance of the Side Distance Warning system: reduced sensor sensitivity and a reduction in the parking assistance system performance could be due to the presence of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint, on the surface of the sensor; the sensor may detect a non-existent obstacle ("echo interference") due to mechanical interference, for example when washing the car, in rain (strong wind), hail; the signals sent by the sensor can also be altered by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle; the performance of the Side Distance Warning system can be influenced by the position of the sensors, e.g. by changing the set-up of the car (due to wear of shock absorbers or suspensions), replacing the tyres with others of different sizes, travelling with a loaded car, installing specific set-ups to lower the car; the presence of stickers on the sensors can adversely affect the correct operation of the system. Therefore, take care not to place stickers on the sensors. MESSAGES ON THE DISPLAY If the system detects a failure, a dedicated message is shown on the display for about 5 seconds. If the display shows messages requiring the front or rear sensor cleaning, make sure that the outer surface and the underside of the bumper is free of dirt (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). After performing this check, turn the ignition device in STOP position, then turn it to the ENGINE position and check whether the messages are no longer displayed. If messages are still displayed, contact a Fiat Dealership. 49) 50) IMPORTANT 49) The sensors must be clean of mud, dirt, snow or ice in order for the system to operate correctly. Be careful not to scratch or damage the sensors while cleaning them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The sensors should be washed using clean water with the addition of car shampoo if necessary. When using special washing equipment such as high pressure jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors very quickly keeping the jet more than 10 cm away. 50) Only have the bumper repainted or any retouches to the paintwork in the area of the sensors carried out by a Fiat Dealership. Incorrect paint application could affect the operation of the parking sensors. 171 STARTING AND DRIVING TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION The TSR (Traffic Sign Recognition) system is a driver assistance system that alerts the user to the most plausible road limits. It is able to recognise both unconditional speed limits and those in rain, snow and fog (shown only when they are valid). Where available, a speed limit of these types represents the applicable road limit, always visible at the top of each screen fig. 172. 172 F0S1364 Road limits in other categories (e.g. time restrictions, exit signs, etc.) and the prohibition of overtaking are only visible in the "Driver Assist" screen of the instrument panel (see the "Display" chapter in the "Knowing the instrument panel" section). 172 NOTE The rain, fog or snow type limits are only displayed if these conditions are likely to occur, i.e. if the windscreen wipers (in case of rain), the fog lights/fog lights (in case of fog) or the windscreen wipers with low external temperature (in case of snow) are activated. The Traffic Sign Recognition system is automatically active when the car is started. Using the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system the user can: deactivate the system by removing the check mark from the relevant menu item select the type of signalling when the detected road limit is exceeded (off, visual, visual and acoustic signalling). See the "Uconnect™" chapter in the "Multimedia" section for more information. If Speed Limiter or Adaptive Cruise Control is active, the applicable road limit (unconditional or rain/snow/fog type) is made available and by pressing the RES button can be accepted as a speed for Intelligent Speed Assist or alternatively for Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control (fig. 173). 173 F0S1189 The recognition of valid road limits depends very much on road conditions, the positioning of signs, visibility conditions and various other factors. The system supplies and reminds the driver of the most plausible road limit. The TSR system cannot provide an applicable speed limit in the following cases: if an end-of-limit sign is recognised and if the navigator (where provided) is unable to provide a valid limit on that stretch of road. The symbol appears on the display. in case of system fault or unavailability, the symbol appears on the display. NOTE In some cases, the system when may show this symbol recalculating the route by the navigation system (where provided). With Uconnect™ without navigation system The TSR system uses the camera, located in the central area of the windscreen fig. 174 and reminds the user of the last road limit recognised by the camera. 174 F0S1286 NOTE Without a navigator, the system cannot provide: the implicit limits (e.g. the general speed limit on motorways). In these cases the system can show the last road sign encountered (e.g. the speed limit of the entrance ramp); in general, the limit in force for a road where a speed limit sign was not previously encountered and correctly recognised. After travelling a certain distance, the road limit symbol turns grey to indicate that it is no longer considered reliable by the system. Upon recognition of a new sign, the TSR symbol will become coloured again. WARNING In the absence of a navigator, the system cannot recognise the unit of measurement of the country you are travelling in, but only the numerical value of the road sign encountered along the road. The speed limit suggested and offered to Intelligent Speed Assist (ISA) and Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control (IACC) systems (where active) is therefore intended according to the unit of measurement set by the user on the instrument panel display. Therefore, for the ISA and the IACC to be of practical help in complying with the limits in force, the driver must set the unit of measurement consistent with the country in which they are travelling. With Uconnect™ with navigation system When the navigator is present, the TSR system integrates the detections made by the camera with the information provided by the navigation system. Therefore, it can provide the implicit limits (e.g. the general speed limit on motorways) and to supplement with maps the limitations of recognition of road signs on the camera alone. The navigator tells the system of the unit of measurement in force in the country in which you are travelling and converts the value consistently with the unit of measurement selected by the user. In this way, the speed limitation suggested by the ISA system or the speed offered by the IACC system will always be correct, regardless of the unit of measurement chosen by the user. The system can display the shape of the signs consistently with the current shape of the country in which you are travelling. Using the information contained in the navigator, the system can recognise motorway, urban and non-urban scenarios and to use the limits provided by the navigator to provide the most plausibly accurate speed limit. In addition, the system can recognise turns and provide, where necessary, the limit detected by the navigator in place of that recognised by the camera. 173 STARTING AND DRIVING 174 INTELLIGENT SPEED ASSIST The "Intelligent Speed Assist" system can be used to set a speed limit on the "Speed Limiter" system equal to the one detected on the road signs by means of the "Traffic Sign Recognition" system, signalled to the driver on the instrument panel display. The minimum speed that can be set is 30 km/h (20 mph). The "Intelligent Speed Assist" system can be activated if the following systems are active: Speed Limiter (see the chapter in this section) Traffic Sign Recognition (see the chapter in this section) When the "Intelligent Speed Assist" system recognises a new road sign, it will suggest the new speed limit to the driver with a specific message and dedicated alerts depending on whether the road sign is higher (fig. 175) or lower (fig. 176) than the current speed stored by the Speed Limiter. Consider both unconditional speed limits and those valid in rain, snow or fog to be valid for speed limitation. 90 70 km/h D 75 % POWER 90 216 km RANGE 23° C 123456 km 175 F0S1187 70 90 km/h D 75 % POWER 70 216 km RANGE 23° C 176 123456 km F0S1188 You can confirm by pressing the RES button the speed limit setting equal to the suggested sign. Once the speed limit provided by the "Traffic Sign Recognition" system has been acquired as the new Speed Limiter value, the activation of Intelligent Speed Assist is indicated by the symbol on the display and the relevant road sign is shown surrounded by green. SYSTEM DEACTIVATION The system is deactivated under the following conditions: when the Traffic Sign Recognition system is deactivated; when the Speed Limiter system is deactivated; when the Traffic Sign Recognition system shows a new speed limit which is not confirmed by the driver; when the Traffic Sign Recognition system shows the end of the speed limit; when the Traffic Sign Recognition system cannot display any speed limit. EXCEEDING THE PROGRAMMED SPEED By fully depressing the accelerator pedal, the programmed speed can be exceeded even with the "Intelligent Speed Assist" system active (e.g. in the event of overtaking). The system is disabled until the speed drops below the set limit, after which it activates again automatically. PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA DESCRIPTION 171) 51) The camera is located on the boot tailgate fig. 177. 177 F0S1193 Camera activation/deactivation Every time reverse is engaged, the display fig. 178 shows the area around the car, as seen by the rear camera. 178 F0S1274 The images are shown on the display together with a warning message. After shifting from position R (Reverse) to position D or N, the camera image will continue to be displayed for 10 seconds if the dedicated function in the Uconnect™ system settings is active (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). The image will cease to be displayed before 10 seconds have elapsed if any of the following conditions occur: car speed is higher than 13 km/h; transmission in the P (Park) position; ignition device in the STOP position; press the graphic button on the Uconnect™ system display, which is shown on the camera image whenever the transmission is not in reverse position. NOTE The displayed image may look a bit distorted. SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON THE DISPLAY Indications on the display Guideline display can be activated by acting on the settings of the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). If activated, the grid is positioned on the image to highlight the width of the car and the expected reversing path in accordance with the steering wheel position. A superimposed central broken line indicates the centre of the car to facilitate parking manoeuvres. The various coloured areas indicate the distance from the rear of the car. The table below shows the approximate distances for each area fig. 178: Area Distance from the rear of the car Red (A) 0 - 30 cm Yellow (B) 30 cm - 1 m Green (C) 1 m or more Messages on the display If the tailgate is raised, the camera will not detect any obstacle in the area behind the car. A dedicated warning message will appear on the display. Closing the door will restore proper camera operation and the warning message on the display will disappear. IMPORTANT NOTES WARNING In some circumstances, such as with ice, snow or mud on the 175 STARTING AND DRIVING surface of the camera, the camera sensitivity may be reduced. WARNING In some special circumstances (e.g. after long periods of inactivity or after disconnecting and reconnecting the battery), when activating the rear camera during Uconnect™ system initialisation, the guidelines and warning messages may not be displayed correctly; at the end of this phase, they will be automatically restored. WARNING If the tailgate is to be repainted following to repairs, make sure the paint does not get in contact with the camera. WARNING When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles that may be above or under the operating range of the camera. WARNING 171) Parking and other potentially dangerous manoeuvres are, however, always the driver’s responsibility. While carrying out these manoeuvres, always make sure that no people (especially children) or animals are in the area concerned. The camera is an aid for the driver, but the driver must never allow 176 his/her attention to lapse during potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even those executed at low speeds. Always keep a slow speed, so as to promptly brake in the case of obstacles. IMPORTANT 51) It is vital, for correct operation, that the camera is always kept clean and free from any mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be careful not to scratch or damage the camera while cleaning it. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The camera must be washed using clean water, with the addition of vehicle shampoo if necessary. In washing stations which use steam or high-pressure jets, clean the camera quickly, keeping the nozzle more than 10 cm away from the sensors. Also, do not apply stickers to the camera. DRIVING TIPS ENERGY CONSUMPTION REDUCTION Below are some useful tips that allow you to achieve a reduction in energy consumption of the high-voltage battery and a consequent increase in range. Car maintenance Checks and operations should be carried out in accordance with the "Service Schedule" (see the "Maintenance and care" chapter). Tires Check the tyre pressures at least once every four weeks: if the pressure is too low, electrical energy consumption levels increase as resistance to rolling is higher. Unnecessary loads Do not travel with an overloaded luggage compartment. The weight of the car and its trim greatly affect electrical energy consumption and stability. Roof rack/ski rack Remove the roof rack or the ski rack from the roof when they are not used. These accessories lower aerodynamic penetration and adversely affect electrical energy consumption levels. Electric devices Use electrical devices only for the amount of time needed. The heated rear window, windscreen wipers and heater fan require a considerable amount of energy; increasing the current uptake increases electrical energy consumption. Climate control system Using the climate control system will increase electrical energy consumption: use standard ventilation when the temperature outside permits. Devices for aerodynamic control The use of non-certified devices for aerodynamic control may adversely affect air drag and electrical energy consumption levels. DRIVING ON SLIPPERY ROADS Acceleration Abrupt acceleration on a snowcovered, wet or otherwise slippery road surface can cause the drive wheels to shift uncontrollably to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs due to the different grip of the front drive wheels on the road surface. 172) Traction On wet or slippery roads, a liquid film may be formed between the tyre and the road surface. This is the well-known aquaplaning phenomenon that can make the possibility of controlling and stopping the car almost null and void. To reduce this risk, observe the following precautions: Reduce speed during thunderstorms or on slippery roads. Reduce speed when there is standing water or puddles on the road. Replace the tyres when the tread wear indicators begin to become visible. Make sure the tyres are inflated correctly. Maintain sufficient distance between your car and the car in front to avoid accidents in the event of a sudden stop. CROSSING FLOODED STRETCHES OF ROAD Driving on flooded roads with water more than a few inches/centimetres deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your car. Water moving, rising 173) Stagnant shallow water Although the car can cross flooded stretches of road with shallow water depth, note the following warnings and cautions before doing so. 52) 53) 54) 55) 56) DRIVING STYLE Top speed Energy consumption considerably increases as speed increases. Maintain a constant speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and acceleration, which cost in terms of electrical energy consumption and emissions. Acceleration Accelerating violently will greatly affect electrical energy consumption and emissions. Acceleration should be gradual. CONDITIONS OF USE Traffic and road conditions Heavy traffic with fast acceleration causes high electrical energy consumption. Winding mountain roads and rough road surfaces also adversely affect consumption. TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS Warnings WARNING It is extremely dangerous to leave children in a parked car when the temperature outside is very high. The heat inside the passenger compartment may have serious, or even fatal, consequences. 177 STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING Never travel in the internal load compartment. In the event of an accident, anyone inside the boot would be at greater risk of serious or even fatal injury. WARNING Ensure that all the occupants of the car wear their seat belts correctly and that any children are positioned correctly on the dedicated child restraint systems. TRANSPORTING ANIMALS Comply with the regulations on transportation of animals of the country you are driving in. WARNING 172) Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Uneven grip can cause sudden deviations of the front wheels. You could lose control of the car and crash. Accelerate slowly and carefully in all situations of poor grip (ice, snow, wet, mud, scattered sand, etc.). 173) Do not cross roads or flooded routes with moving and/or rising water (as can happen during a heavy storm). Moving water can deteriorate the road surface and cause the car to become bogged down. In addition, moving or rising waters can drag the car quickly. Failure to comply with these warnings may result in serious injury 178 or death to the driver, passengers and any passers-by. CHARGING 174) IMPORTANT 52) Always check the depth of the flooded section before crossing it. Never cross stretches where the water depth exceeds the lower part of the wheels of the car. 53) Check the condition of the flooded road surface and any obstacles on the route before fording the flooded section. 54) Do not exceed a speed of 8 km/h while crossing in order to minimise the effect of water displacement. 55) Crossing flooded sections can damage transmission components. After crossing a flooded section, always check the car fluids (i.e. transmission fluid, coolant, etc.) for any traces of contamination (i.e. any milky or foamy appearance of the fluid). Stop driving the car in the presence of apparently contaminated liquids to avoid further damage. This damage is not covered by the new car warranty. 56) Crossing of flooded sections also limits braking capacity, resulting in longer braking distances. Therefore, after crossing, drive slowly and repeated but delicately press the brake pedal so that the braking surfaces dry out progressively. 57) 58) 59) 60) 61) 62) 63) 64) 65) Before charging the high voltage battery, it is recommended to turn the ignition device to STOP in order to obtain a charge until full in the shortest period possible. WARNING The brake calliper lock is activated during the charging procedure: unlocking will be carried out automatically at the end of the charging procedure. CHARGING PORT ON THE CAR 179 F0S1052 To access the charging port, open the charging flap fig. 179 by pressing on the area indicated by the arrow. Charging port LED Next to the charging port there are some LEDs (A) fig. 180 that indicate the charging status by means of four different colours and related flashing types: Blue: to indicate that the system is waiting for a scheduled charging. Green flashing ("Flashing"): during the charging process: one flashing green LED indicates that charging is in progress; all 5 green LEDs flashing: charging process initialisation; Steady green: to indicate that the charging process is complete. Red blinking: : to indicate a fault in the charging system or when there is a fault in the charging procedure (e.g. when the charging connector is connected to the charging port located on the car and the cable has not been previously connected to the power socket). WARNING If all the LEDs are off after connecting the charging connector to the charging port on the car, a problem may have occurred during the process. In this case it is advisable to press button (B) in fig. 180 and disconnect the charging connector and reconnect it. Symbol labels On the inside of the charging socket flap there are labels with the following warnings and indications that must be checked and observed when charging the high-voltage battery. On the label, fig. 182, there are the following symbols: A B 180 F0S1367 WARNING Use only the charging cable supplied with your car: refer to the label on the control unit, which indicates the "Country Group" (A) fig. 181 and the electrical current intensity (Ampere) (B) and the table "Mode 2" Cable Variants in the "Power sources that can be used" chapter) or a replacement cable recommended by FCA. EU-GEN4.1-CHARGECORD F235 COUNTRY GROUP 1 35344729 46345793 PLEASE READ MANUAL BEFORE USE 230VAC RCD:b LNSE SINGLE PHASE i n AC 30mA 004634579300F2350000119182 n DC 6mA LR67E346031 - ICCB A 50 Hz 13A / PE i MOPAR i FUNCTIONAL SAFETY UL EU-GEN4.1-CHARGECORD F235 EU COUNTRY GROUP 1 35344729 46345793 13A / 230VAC LNSE SINGLE PHASE 004634579300F2350000119182 E346031 R IC-CPD 25 B 181 F0S1055 indicates a risk of electric shock. indicates a general dangerous situation. indicates to refer to the descriptions and figures in this supplement. indicates that a charging timer has been set. indicates that the charging procedure is in progress. indicates that the charging procedure is complete. 179 STARTING AND DRIVING indicates that there is a fault in the charging procedure. 182 F0S1275 On the label, fig. 183, there are the following symbols: 183 indicates to refer to the descriptions and figures in this supplement. indicates to not use extension cables and/or adapters to carry out the charging procedure. indicates that water should not come into contact with the charging port on the car. 180 F0S1276 The plate at fig. 184 reminds you to refer to this Owner Handbook for charging from public AC mains and the correct order of connection of the charging cable: 184 F0S0718 (1) first connect the charging cable to the public AC station; (2) disconnect the cable from the charging port of the car. Power sources for electric charging. Identification of vehicle compatibility. Graphic symbol for consumer information in accordance with EN17186:2019. The symbols shown below make it easier to recognise the correct power source type to use when charging your car. Before charging, check the symbol (where provided) inside the charging port flap and compare it with the symbol on the charging cable (where provided). Symbols for electrically powered vehicles: Symbol on the cable charging connector (car side) for Mode 2 and Mode 3 cables and on the charging port flap 185 F1A0717 AC (alternating current) charging in the home or at a charging station (≤ 480 V RMS). Symbol on the cable charging connector (charging station side) for the Mode 3 cable and on the charging station Before charging, check the symbol (where provided) on the charging cable and compare it with the symbol on the charging cable (where provided). 186 F1A0725 AC (alternating current) charging at a charging station (≤ 480 V RMS). Symbol on the cable charging connector (car side) for the Mode 4 cable and on the charging port flap 187 F1A0718 DC (direct current) charging at a charging station (50–500 V). 181 STARTING AND DRIVING 182 WARNING 174) In order to reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to the device, special care should be taken when cleaning: ALWAYS unplug the device from the domestic power supply socket and car ports. IMPORTANT 57) Do not charge if the external temperature is -30°C or lower, as charging is likely to take longer and the charging device may be damaged. 58) Do not leave the car or the charging cable in areas where the external temperature is below -40°C as they may be damaged. 59) In cold temperatures, the charging cable may become stiff. Therefore, be careful not to apply excessive force to the charging cable as it may be damaged. 60) Do not use personal generators to charge the high-voltage battery. This may cause fluctuations in charging and the voltage may be insufficient, resulting in damage to the car system. 61) Charging the high-voltage battery using incorrect or damaged sockets, or charging cables and not following the prescribed charging procedures may cause short circuits, fire and potential risk of damage to the electrical system of the car. 62) Avoid leaving the high-voltage battery for several days with the charge indicator at or near zero. The high-voltage battery may be damaged. 63) You do not need to wait until the highvoltage battery level is low to recharge. The performance of the high-voltage battery is optimal when it is charged regularly. 64) Charging the high-voltage battery may take longer if the temperature of the highvoltage battery is high or low. 65) During charging, especially with fast charging, high-voltage battery cooling components may be voltage activated. Therefore, it is normal to hear noises during this operation. POWER SOURCES THAT CAN BE USED 175) 176) 177) 178) 179) 180) 181) 182) 183) 184) 185) 186) 187) 188) 189) 190) 191) 192) 193) 194) 195) 196) 197) 198) 199) 200) 201) GENERAL INFORMATION The high-voltage battery of the car can be charged using special charging cables: the connection of the charging port located on the rear right side of the car to the charging ports in public charging stations; or to the domestic socket. The charging procedure control and monitoring takes place in a fully automatic way. NOTE The car is able to automatically recognise the maximum allowable current intensity depending on the type of domestic socket/public charging stations used and the regulations in force in the country in which you are located (e.g. overloads). Reduce the maximum charging current required by using the "Charging settings" item on the Uconnect™ system display (for more information, refer to the "Uconnect™" chapter in the "Multimedia" section). Before charging in your own home, or elsewhere, check the allowable current intensity by contacting a specialized technician: it is advisable to contact the Fiat Dealership. In case of problems (e.g. current overloads) reduce the charge level. TYPES OF CHARGING CABLES Three different types of cables can be used for charging: "Mode 2" (A) fig. 188 cable (standard): allows charging from an earthed domestic power socket. This type of socket is used for charging with alternating current. The "Mode 2" charging cable complies with IEC 61851, IEC 62752 and SAE J1772 standards. "Mode 3" (B) fig. 189 cable (optional): allows charging from a public charging station and a domestic AC (alternating current) charging station (wallbox charging station). The charging speed may be faster than charging through a domestic power socket. ""Mode 4" – Fast Charge (C) fig. 190Charging cable: this allows charging from public charging sockets marked as DC (direct current). A 188 F0S1058 B 189 F0S1059 C 190 F0S1120 "MODE 2" CHARGING CABLE The car is equipped with a "Mode 2" 230 Volt AC charging cable (A) fig. 191 located inside a special bag under the boot floor. The cable consists of: specific charging connector (B) for connection to the car; a charge status control unit (C) equipped with LEDs, able to provide indications on any anomalies present during the charging phase; a plug (D) to connect to the domestic power socket. NOTE After use, remember to correctly replace the protective cover (where provided) on the specific charging connector (B) to prevent moisture and/or dust from getting inside. 191 F0S1277 WARNING 175) Always stop the electric motor by moving the ignition device to the STOP position before charging the high-voltage battery. Even with the engine switched off, the cooling fan inside the engine compartment can start automatically during charging. Do not approach the cooling fan while charging. 176) The safety and suitability of the domestic system for charging through the domestic mains are primary and are under the Customer’s responsibility. 177) Do not connect the charging cable connector if there is dust and/or water on the charging port. Making the connection in the presence of water or dust on the connector cable and the plug may cause a fire or electric shock. Use of worn-out electrical sockets may result in fire and injury. 178) If you use electrical medical devices (e.g., cardiac pacemakers), make sure in advance that charging the high-voltage battery does not affect the operation 183 STARTING AND DRIVING 184 of these devices. In some cases, electromagnetic waves generated by the charger may affect the operation of such medical devices. 179) Stop the charge immediately if you notice any abnormal symptoms (e.g. smell, smoke, etc.). 180) Replace the charging cable if the cable jacket is damaged to prevent risk of electrocution. 181) When connecting or removing the charging cable, be sure to grasp the handle of the charging connector and the charging plug. If you pull the cable directly (without using the handle) the internal conductors may disconnect or damage: this may cause a shock or fire. 182) The charging cable is a high-voltage conductor. Contact with high-voltage can cause serious personal injury or death. Similarly, do not touch the orange highvoltage cables. 183) It is strictly forbidden to use any plug adapter or similar devices when charging. Never use the charging cable together with an extension cable. 184) Never connect the charging cable to an extension cable or multiple socket. Multiple sockets, extension cables, overvoltage protection or similar units cannot be used together with the charging cable as they may present a risk of fire, electrocution, etc. 185) The charging cable supplied as standard is watertight and is guaranteed by the Manufacturer: do not use other cables not supplied by FCA. 186) Be sure not to touch the charging connector and charging plug with wet hands. 187) Do not charge when the connector and charging plug are wet. 188) Do not charge in adverse weather conditions (e.g. during thunderstorms) at charging stations. 189) Always keep charging connector and charging plug clean and dry. Take care to keep the charging cable away from water or moisture. Do not use chemicals or solvents. 190) Be sure to use the designated charging cable to charge the car. Using any other charger may cause personal injury or damage to the car. 191) How to use the charging cables. Treat the charging cable with care: avoid folding and/or bending it on sharp surfaces. After using the charging cable, replace the protective covers (if present) on both sides of the cable correctly. Avoid prolonged exposure of the charging cable to sunlight. Avoid dropping the charging cable from above: violent shocks could damage the cable. Do not immerse the charging cables in liquids. 192) Take care not to drop the charging connector. The charging connector could be damaged. 193) Do not leave children unattended in the vicinity of the charging cable when it is connected. 194) Position the charging cable in such a way that it is not crushed by other cars, trampled on by people, or positioned in way that people in the vicinity of the car may stumble, resulting in damage or personal injury. 195) Disconnect the charging cable from the domestic socket or charging station or wallbox charging station before cleaning it. 196) Do not use the charging cable if it has damaged parts. 197) Never disconnect the charging cable from the domestic power socket or public charging station during charging. Always interrupt charging, then disconnect the cable, first from the car-side charging port and then from the domestic socket or public charging station. 198) Never use a visibly worn or damaged electrical socket. It could cause fire or serious damage. 199) The high-voltage battery should only be charged with the maximum allowable current or other lower current specified in local and national recommendations for charging high-voltage batteries. 200) The device is to be used exclusively for charging the car. 201) Never attempt to make a repair and/or perform maintenance on the charge cables, this may result in serious personal injury or even death. Always go to a Fiat Dealership. "Mode 2" cable variants table The following table shows the list of the specific cable types and the amperages allowed for each country where the car is sold. This amperage is the limit allowed when the charging power is set to the highest level. Electric vehicle charging connector type Electric current intensity (Ampere) Type of domestic power socket (**) 1 13 CEE 7/7 – 2 10 G – 8 CEE 7/7 Country group (*) 3 4 Type 2 Cable length (metres) Notes – 6 – 8 J 5 6 K – 6 10 CEE 7/7 Specific cable for Norway market (*) The Country Group is indicated by the message "COUNTRY GROUP" on the label fig. 181located on the rear of the control unit. (**) Refer to the following pages for the type of power socket/plug. NOTE To check the maximum electric current (Ampere) that can be consumed, refer to the label located on the back of the control unit (see what is described and illustrated in the "charge status control unit" chapter). 185 STARTING AND DRIVING Country group table for "Mode 2" cable The following table shows the list of countries contained in each "Country Group" associated with the "Mode 2" cable. Refer to the images on the following page for more details. Country Group Country Albania Austria Belgium Bulgaria Croatia Czech Republic Estonia Germany 1 Greece Hungary Iceland Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Macedonia Morocco Netherlands 186 Country Group Country Poland Portugal Romania Serbia Slovakia 1 Slovenia Spain Sweden Italy Ukraine Turkey Cyprus 2 Gibraltar Malta United Kingdom, Ireland France 3 Finland Guadeloupe French Guiana 187 STARTING AND DRIVING 188 Country Group 3 4 Country Martinique Reunion Liechtenstein Switzerland 5 Denmark 6 Norway NOTE For more information on the type of socket in use in the various countries, refer to the following website: https://www.iec.ch/worldplugs/list_bylocation.htm. 192 CEE 7/7 J G K F0S1203 189 STARTING AND DRIVING CHARGE STATUS CONTROL UNIT this symbol indicates a general dangerous situation. 202) 203) Signal LED There are three LEDs on the front of the charge status control unit: GREEN LED on (A) fig. 193: indicates correct operation in the domestic power distribution system: it is therefore possible to proceed with the high-voltage battery charging. RED LED on (B): indicates a fault in the charging system. YELLOW LED on (C): indicates a possible failure in the domestic power distribution system. WARNING Never carry out any repair work on your own: always contact the Fiat Dealership. A This symbol shows the minimum operating temperature of the charge status control unit in accordance with IEC 61851 and IEC 62752 certification. NOTE FCA guarantees that the device has been tested for use from -40°C to +50°C. If the device is not used and must be stored, the temperature must be between -40°C and +80°C. Exceeding these temperature values may damage the device. B C 193 F0S1062 For the type of failure, refer to the description under "Charging system failure" on the following pages. Symbol label On the back of the charge status control unit there is a summary label, fig. 194, which shows some symbols. The main ones are listed below: This symbol indicates a risk of electric shock. 190 The presence of this symbol on the label indicates that the specific "Mode 2" charge cable cannot be used for domestic power distribution networks where the earthing cable is not present. For specific markets, without the grounding cable, check for "COUNTRY GROUP" on the label of the charging cable. The presence of this symbol on the label indicates that the charge status control unit does not have the function of disconnecting the earthing cable. The symbol indicates that the charging unit should not be placed in the waste if it no longer works: for disposal refer to the environmental regulations in force in the country in which it circulates. WARNING 202) The device is to be used exclusively for charging the car. 203) Never attempt to make a repair and/or perform maintenance on the charge cables, this may result in serious personal injury or even death. Always go to a Fiat Dealership. The symbol prompts you to read the instructions in this publication carefully before using the charging cable. 194 F0S1204 191 STARTING AND DRIVING CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE Any faults during charging are displayed by the LEDs, either steady or flashing, located on the front of the charge status control unit. Refer to the table below. GREEN LED 1 OFF YELLOW LED Description OFF Charging cable not connected to the domestic charging port or power failure in the domestic power supply mains 2 ON OFF OFF There are no faults in the domestic power distribution system, so the charging cable can be connected to the charging port on the car 3 ON ON (Flashing) ON Overheating at the charging port of the domestic mains power supply ON (Flashing) Charging to a lower current level due to overheating of the charging port of the domestic electricity distribution mains (see point 3) 4 192 OFF RED LED ON OFF Action/Consequence When the normal temperature is reached, the system will make a new charge attempt at a lower current level. GREEN LED RED LED YELLOW LED Description Action/Consequence 5 ON ON ON (Flashing) Overheating at the charging port of the domestic mains power supply Overheating during charging at a lower current level (see point 4) Proceed as follows: disconnect the charge cable from the car and from the domestic power socket with care (the domestic power plug may be hot); please wait for the domestic power plug and socket to reach a normal temperature; reconnect the cable to the domestic power socket and to the car’s charge socket, then try to charge again. In case of a new anomaly, contact a certified electrician 6 ON ON (2 blinks) ON (2 blinks) Lack of earthing cable in the charging port of the domestic mains power supply The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 seconds (6 attempts in total). Lack of earthing cable in the charging port of the domestic mains power supply New charge attempt (see point 6) failed. Disconnect the charge cable from the car and the domestic power socket and reconnect it, then try to charge again. In case of a new anomaly, contact a certified electrician. 7 ON ON ON (2 blinks) 193 STARTING AND DRIVING GREEN LED 8 OFF YELLOW LED OFF Description Action/Consequence Domestic mains power incorrectly supplied The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 seconds (6 attempts in total). If the fault persists, disconnect the charge cable from the car and the domestic power socket and reconnect it, then try to charge again. In case of a new anomaly, contact a certified electrician. 9 ON ON OFF Dispersion of electricity on the car Disconnect the charge cable from the car and the domestic power socket and reconnect it, then try to charge again. In case of a new anomaly, contact a Fiat Dealership. 10 ON ON (flashing) OFF Electric charging current too high The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 seconds (6 attempts in total). Electric charging current too high New charge attempt (see point 10) failed. Disconnect the charge cable from the car and the domestic power socket and reconnect it, then try to charge again. In case of a new anomaly, contact a Fiat Dealership. 11 194 ON (Flashing) RED LED ON ON (7 blinks) OFF GREEN LED RED LED YELLOW LED Description Action/Consequence 12 ON ON (2 blinks) OFF Charge anomaly on the car 13 ON ON (3 blinks) OFF 14 ON ON (4 blinks) OFF 15 ON ON (5 blinks) OFF 16 ON ON (6 blinks) OFF The system will make a new charge attempt after 30 seconds (6 attempts in total). If the fault persists, disconnect the charging cable from the car and the home power port and reconnect it, then try charging again. In case of a new anomaly, contact a Fiat Dealership. Charging cable failure Key ON = LED on OFF = LED off BLINK = 0.5 seconds ON / 0.5 seconds OFF / 3 seconds pause FLASHING = 0.5 seconds ON / 0.5 seconds OFF 195 STARTING AND DRIVING CHARGING SYSTEM/ MAINTENANCE/CLEANING The device is maintenance-free. If you need to clean the device, use a soft cloth slightly dampened with a mild detergent solution, then wipe dry with a dry cloth. Do not use abrasive products or flammable substances (e.g. alcohol, petrol or their derivatives). Do not wash the device with water, hazard of fire or electric shock with the risk of serious injury or death. WARNING Only clean the device when it is DISCONNECTED from both the domestic charging port and the charging port located on the car. FCC (Federal Communications Commission) SPECIFICATIONS The charge status control unit complies with Section 15 of the FCC Regulation. The use of the device meets the following two requirements: 1. This device does not cause harmful interference. 2. Correct operation of the device may be affected by interference from nearby electrical/electronic devices. This device is designed to withstand radio frequency interference (RFI), 196 however, some factors (e.g., high-intensity radio signals or radio transmitters in the vicinity of the device) may cause it to malfunction. If you find an anomaly in the operation of the device, contact the Fiat Dealership. NOTE After use, remember to replace the protective covers on both sides of the charging cable correctly to prevent moisture and/or dust from entering the cable charging socket connections. WARNING Modifications and/or repairs made incorrectly and NOT carried out by the Fiat Dealership will invalidate the Warranty and the above requirements. "MODE 3" CHARGING CABLE (optional) The car can be equipped with a "Mode 3" charging cable fig. 195, located inside a special bag under the boot floor. The "Mode 3" charging cable: complies with EN 61851- 1, EN 62196- 1 and EN 62196- 2 standards; can be used for a minimum temperature of -40°C up to a maximum temperature of +50°C. This type of cable allows you to connect to public alternating current (AC) charging stations. The charging speed may be faster than charging through a domestic power socket. Using this type of cable it is possible to charge the car with a current of up to 16A. 195 F0S1064 "MODE 4" CHARGING CABLE - FAST CHARGE This can be used to charge from DC (direct current) public charging sockets. The charging cable is connected to the charging station. The charging procedure can be faster than with AC charging stations. C 196 F0S1120 ALTERNATING CURRENT (AC) CHARGING AT HOME park the car safely (transmission in position "P" - Park); push the ignition device in the STOP position. engage the electric park brake; take the kit located in the boot; remove any dust that may have accumulated on the charging connector and charging socket; unroll the charging cable and connect it to an AC charging port, fig. 197; 204) 205) 206) 207) 208) 209) 210) 211) 212) 66) 67) 68) 69) 70) 71) 72) 73) 74) CHARGING PROCEDURE WARNING Always connect the cable to the charging socket of the domestic mains first and only then to the vehicle. The high-voltage battery of the system is charged by connecting the "Mode 2" charging cable, supplied with the car, to an AC charging port. For the characteristics of the "Mode 2" cable, refer to the "Power sources that can be used - Mode 2 cable" chapter. To charge, proceed as follows: 197 198 F0S1052 remove the protective cover of the charging port and attach it to the device; grasp the charging connector by the handle (A) fig. 199, remove the protective cover (where provided) and insert it into the charging port until you hear the click indicating that it has been locked; F0S1051 NOTE From the moment the plug is connected to the domestic mains charging port, the 3 LEDs on the control unit of the cable will flash for approx. 6 seconds (control unit switching on phase); open the charging flap by pressing on the area indicated by the arrow; 199 F0S1309 if no scheduled charging has been set (see the "Charging functions" chapter), charging starts automatically; 197 STARTING AND DRIVING check by turning on the LEDs on the cable control unit that there are no faults in the charging system (for more information see "charge status control unit" chapter in the "Power sources that can be used - Mode 2 cable" section). If there are no anomalies, the green LEDs located next to the charging port will light up momentarily. In case of anomalies, refer to the description in the "Charging system failure" chapter in the "Power sources that can be used - Mode 2 cable" section. NOTE The charge procedure is interrupted when opening the bonnet: a dedicated message will be shown on the instrument panel display. The charge will be reactivated when the engine lid is closed correctly. The time required to charge the highvoltage battery depends on several factors: for more information see the description in the “Electric” chapter of in the “Multimedia" section. If the passenger compartment preconditioning is activated, the battery charging time will be extended. The time required for heating/cooling the car is mainly determined by the outside temperature. WARNING The maximum power consumption of the charging port 198 depends on the type of contract signed by the user, the type of cable used and the charge level set in the Uconnect™ system menu. WARNING Use only the charging cable supplied with the car or a replacement cable recommended by FCA. WARNING The high-voltage battery must be charged in accordance with the maximum amperage rating allowed by local and national recommendations for charging electric vehicles. END OF CHARGING PROCEDURE The charging procedure ends when all the LEDs (A) fig. 200, located next to the charging port, will light up steady green (during the charging phase, on the other hand, the LEDs will light up flashing/fixed green according to the state of charge of the battery portion indicated by the LED. The fixed green light indicates that the battery portion is fully charged). 200 F0S1220 DISCONNECTING THE "MODE 2" CHARGING CABLE During the charging procedure the cable is automatically locked on the charging socket in the car. To complete the charging, proceed as follows: unlock the doors of the vehicle allowing the charging cable to unlock; if charging is in progress, press button (B) fig. 200 on the charging port; disconnect the cable from the car charging port by grasping the handle of the charging connector and avoiding to pull the cable directly; disconnect the cable from the charging port fig. 201; WARNING 201 F0S1053 replace the protective cover of the charging socket; close the charging flap, making sure it locks properly; roll up the charging cable correctly, repositioning the protective cover correctly on the charging connector (where provided). When rolling up, take care not to damage the cable. Then place the cable, together with the charging kit, inside the housing located inside the boot. WARNING Before disconnecting the charging connector, make sure that the doors are unlocked. If the door is locked, the charging connector locking system does not allow disconnection. 204) The charging current level ("Level 1" / "Level 2" / "Level 3", etc.) can only be changed using the Uconnect™ system display (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). The default charge level set is "Level 3". For countries in which the 13A "Mode 2" charge cable can be used, if the domestic power socket IS NOT CERTIFIED, it is recommended to set "Level 4" charge to the maximum, which corresponds to approx. 10A. For the list of country-specific cable types refer to what is indicated in the "Mode 2 cable variant table". 205) The set level applies indifferently to both AC home charging (Mode 2) and charging from an AC public charging station (Mode 3). It is therefore always advisable to check that the level is set as desired for the actual charging type that is about to be carried out. 206) Incorrect setting of the charge current intensity can overload or overheat the mains power supply of the domestic power socket. Fire hazard. Before charging from other domestic sockets, adjust the charge current intensity to the mains. If you do not know the mains, set to the lowest level. Never use extension cords for charging. 207) Incorrect connection between connector and charging terminals constitutes a fire hazard! 208) During normal operation, the domestic power socket can overheat. In the case of extreme overheating, the charge is interrupted and the warning LED on the front of the cable control unit will turn on. Refer to the table in the "Charging system failure" chapter in the "Power sources that can be used" section. 209) The "Mode 2" charge cable must be connected to a dedicated circuit that is not shared with other devices that absorb electrical energy. 210) Do not insert fingers or objects in the cable charging connector. 211) The high-voltage battery must only be charged through approved, earthed domestic sockets or from a public charging station using the charging cable supplied separately as an option by FCA (” Mode 3“ charging cable). 212) Keep the charging flap closed when the charging port is not in use. IMPORTANT 66) Do not charge if the external temperature is -30°C or lower, as charging is likely to take longer and the charging device may be damaged. 67) Do not leave the car or the charging cable in areas where the external temperature is below -40°C as they may be damaged. 68) In cold temperatures, the charging cable may become stiff. Therefore, be careful not to apply excessive force to the charging cable as it may be damaged. 69) Do not use personal generators to charge the high-voltage battery. This may cause fluctuations in charging and the voltage may be insufficient, resulting in damage to the car system. 199 STARTING AND DRIVING 200 70) Charging the high-voltage battery using incorrect or damaged sockets, or charging cables and not following the prescribed charging procedures may cause short circuits, fire and potential risk of damage to the electrical system of the car. 71) Avoid leaving the battery for several days with the charge indicator at or near zero. The high-voltage battery may be damaged. 72) You do not need to wait until the battery level is low to recharge. The performance of the battery is optimal when it is charged regularly. 73) Charging the high-voltage battery may take longer if the temperature of the highvoltage battery is high or low. 74) During charging, especially with fast charging, battery cooling components may be activated. Therefore, it is normal to hear noises during this operation. QUICK DOMESTIC CHARGING PROCEDURE FROM THE WALLBOX CHARGING STATION WARNING The wallbox charging station domestic charging station must be installed by qualified personnel after checking the domestic electrical system. For information on available wallbox charging stations, contact a Fiat Dealership. The high-voltage battery of the car can be charged by directly connecting the charging cable on the wallbox charging station or using the "Mode 3" cable (optional). For the characteristics of the "Mode 3" cable, refer to the "Power sources that can be used - Mode 3 cable" chapter. Charging with wallbox charging station, fig. 202, allows to reach, from a domestic user, a higher charge power than the charge achieved using a domestic socket: the charging time, as a consequence, is significantly reduced. 202 F0S1271 NOTE The wallbox charging station configuration may vary depending on the country where the car is sold. NOTE The electrical system of the house must be checked regularly by qualified personnel. The maximum charging current value is automatically set by the device, depending on the building's electrical system. For the charging procedure, refer to the "Alternating current (AC) charging at home" chapter. CHARGING PROCEDURE FROM PUBLIC CHARGING STATION (AC) 213) 214) 215) The high-voltage battery of the car can be charged by directly connecting the charging cable of the public charging stations or using the "Mode 3" cable (optional). For the characteristics of the "Mode 3" cable, refer to the "Power sources that can be used - Mode 3 cable" chapter. To charge, proceed as follows: park the car safely (transmission in position "P" - Park); engage the electric park brake; push the ignition device in the STOP position. pull out the charging cable (optional) fig. 203 (where provided) in the boot (inside a special bag); remove any dust that may have accumulated on the charging connector and charging socket; plug the charging connector into the socket of the public charging station, fig. 204; 203 204 F0S1207 F0S1054 open the charging flap fig. 205 by pressing on the area indicated by the arrow; 205 F0S1052 remove the protective cover of the charging port and attach it to the device; grasp the charging cable, remove the protective covers on both sides of the cable (where provided). Hold the first charging connector and insert it into the charging port on the car until you hear a click indicating that it is locked; charging starts automatically if there is no programming on the Uconnect™ system (see chapter "Charging functions"). If necessary, the public charging station must be enabled; follow the manufacturer's instructions and warnings when using the charging station; the 5 LEDs with a steady green light will light up momentarily to indicate the correct insertion of the plug; during charging, the LEDs will light on with green flashing/green steady light depending on the state of charge 201 STARTING AND DRIVING of the battery portion indicated by the LED. The fixed green light indicates that the battery portion is fully charged. NOTE The charge procedure is interrupted when opening the bonnet: a dedicated message will be shown on the instrument panel display. The charge will be reactivated when the engine lid is closed correctly. NOTE In some countries the "Mode 3" cable is not available. WARNING Always connect the connector first to the socket on the public charging station and then to the car. WARNING Before leaving the car, it is advisable to lock the doors by pressing on the key. If it is not the button possible to lock the doors by pressing the button on the key, lock the doors by pressing the button on the driver's side door handle. END OF CHARGING PROCEDURE The charging procedure ends when all the LEDs (A) fig. 206, located next to the charging port, will light up steady green (during the charging phase, on the other hand, the LEDs will light up flashing/fixed green according to the 202 state of charge of the battery portion indicated by the LED. The fixed green light indicates that the battery portion is fully charged). replace the protective cover of the charging socket; close the charging flap, making sure it locks properly; roll up the charging cable correctly, repositioning the protective covers on both sides of the cable correctly (take care not to damage the cable when rolling it up). Then place the cable and case inside the boot. WARNING 206 F0S1220 DISCONNECTING THE "MODE 3" CHARGING CABLE To complete the charging, proceed as follows: unlock the doors of the vehicle allowing the charging cable to unlock; if charging is in progress, press button (B) fig. 206; disconnect the cable from the charging port of the car and put the protective cover (where provided) back on the connector; unplug the cable from the charging port on the public charging station and put the protective cover (where provided) back correctly on the twocolour connector; 213) The charging current level ("Level 1" / "Level 2" / "Level 3", etc.) can only be changed using the Uconnect™ system display (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). The default charge level set is "Level 3". The set level applies indifferently to both AC home charging (Mode 2) and charging from an AC public charging station (Mode 3). It is therefore always advisable to check that the level is set as desired for the actual charging type that is about to be carried out. 214) The high-voltage battery must only be charged through approved, earthed domestic sockets or from a public charging station using the charging cable supplied separately as an option by FCA (” Mode 3“ charging cable). 215) Keep the charging flap closed when the charging port is not in use. CHARGING FROM PUBLIC CHARGING STATION (DC) PROCEDURE MODE 4 the charging port, will light up steady green (during the charging phase, on the other hand, the LEDs will light up flashing/fixed green according to the state of charge of the battery portion indicated by the LED. The fixed green light indicates that the battery portion is fully charged). 75) 76) 77) 78) 79) 80) The high-voltage battery of the car can be charged by directly connecting the charging cable of DC (direct current) public charging stations. To charge, proceed as follows: park the car safely (transmission in position "P" - Park); engage the electric parking brake; turn the ignition device to the STOP position; take the charging cable from the charging station; remove any dust that may have accumulated on the charging connector and charging port; open the charging flap fig. 207 by pressing on the area indicated by the arrow; 207 F0S1052 remove the protective cover of the charging port and attach it to the device; grasp the charging cable, hold the first charging connector and insert it into the charging port on the car until you hear a click indicating that it is locked; the 5 LEDs with a steady green light will light up momentarily to indicate the correct insertion of the plug; lock the doors by pressing the button on the key; charging starts automatically. If necessary, the public charging station must be enabled; follow the manufacturer's instructions and warnings when using the charging station. END OF CHARGING PROCEDURE The charging procedure ends when all the LEDs (A) fig. 208, located next to 208 F0S1220 DISCONNECTING THE "MODE 4" CHARGING CABLE To complete the charging, proceed as follows: unlock the doors of the car allowing the charging cable to unlock; if charging is in progress, press button (B) fig. 208 on the charging port; disconnect the cable from the charging port of the car and put the protective cover (where provided) back on the connector; 203 STARTING AND DRIVING 204 put the cable on the public charging station; replace the protective cover of the charging port; close the charging flap, making sure it locks properly. IMPORTANT 75) Using "Fast Charge - Mode 4" can accelerate the battery degradation process. 76) If fast charging is not required, standard (AC) charging is always preferred. This maximises battery life by ensuring the best performance of the car over time. 77) The charging times in "Fast Charge Mode 4" are referred to up to 80% of the state of charge of the high-voltage battery in standard environmental conditions (25°C). 78) Charging times in extreme weather conditions can increase by as much as several minutes due to the intervention of the high-voltage battery management system, which ensures optimal regulation of the battery temperature to prevent possible damage. 79) The charging speed slows down when the state of charge of the high-voltage battery exceeds 80%. 80) The battery charging time can increase by a few minutes in case of very cold/hot outside temperatures, many quick charging sessions, high frequency of use of "Fast Charge - Mode 4" charging or ageing of the battery. This reduction in charging speed is necessary to preserve the battery. NOTE To restore correct operation of the system, contact the Fiat Dealership. CHARGE CABLE EMERGENCY UNLOCK If the charging cable does not unlock at the end of the charging procedure, you can unlock it manually. If, after closing and opening the doors by pressing the relevant buttons / located on the key and after having pressed the button near the charging port, it is still not possible to remove the charge cable from the socket on the car, it is possible to act manually by operating a special emergency unlocking device located on the right side of the boot and performing the operations described below: acting inside the boot, remove the cap (A) fig. 209; pull the release cord (B) fig. 209 to manually unlock the actuator of the charging port; disconnect the charging cable; check that the release cord is correctly repositioned inside its housing, then reinsert the cap (A) fig. 209. 209 F0S1208 CHARGING FUNCTIONS CHARGING SCHEDULE Two charging modes are available: immediate and scheduled. The two charging modes can be selected in two ways: via the dedicated smartphone app (refer to the chapter "Connected Services - Uconnect Services" in the "Multimedia" section) (where provided) by means of the Uconnect™ system. The page available on the Uconnect™ system can be used to set charging times when the car will be charged via Mode 2 or Mode 3. By acting on the Uconnect™ system display and selecting the "Charging schedule" function on the screen under the "Vehicle" page (fig. 210) you can set the start and end time at which the high-voltage battery is to be charged. The end time of each charging interval can be set as "charge to completion", in which case the end time will be deselected. For more information, see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). NOTE DC recharging (Mode 4) does not include hourly programming. 210 F0S1194 USING SCHEDULED CHARGING After programming and selecting the desired charging intervals (up to a maximum of three), plug in the charging cable, following the charging procedure indicated in the "Alternating current (AC) charging at home", "Fast home charging procedure from wallbox charging station", "Charging procedure from public charging station (AC)" sections. Charging will start at the selected time. While the system is waiting for the charging interval, the LED lights up (A) fig. 211 (located next to the charging port) and the LEDs (B) will illuminate in a blue light sequence. When charging is in progress according to a programmed time, LED (A) fig. 211 and LEDs (B) will light up green flashing/fixed depending on the state of charge of the battery portion indicated by the LED. The fixed green light indicates that the battery portion is fully charged. If the charging cable is inserted and there are no selected charging times on the Uconnect™ system, charging will start immediately (see chapter "Using immediate charging"). To perform scheduled charging with "charge to completion" option, the plug must be inserted within 5 minutes before the scheduled start. You can move on to the next scheduled charging interval while an immediate charging operation is in progress by unlocking the ports and pressing button (A) fig. 212 on the port. WARNING the button (A) fig. 212 on the port remains active for 1 minute after the doors are locked. B A 211 F0S1065 B A 212 F0S1067 USING IMMEDIATE CHARGING When the charging cable is inserted and there are no charging schedules selected, the cable will be locked and the immediate charging procedure will begin. LED (B) fig. 212 and LEDs (B) fig. 211 will light up green flashing/fixed depending on the state of charge of the battery portion indicated by the LED. The fixed green light indicates that the battery portion is fully charged. 205 STARTING AND DRIVING 206 To switch to immediate charging mode during scheduled charging: if charging is in progress, interrupt the scheduled charging first (see chapter "Interrupting charging"); activate immediate recharging by pressing the button again (A) fig. 212 on the port. Interrupting charging The charging cable is blocked when charging is in progress. To interrupt the charging process, unlock the doors with the key and press the button (A) fig. 212 on the port. The charging process will be interrupted and you can disconnect the charging cable. When immediate recharging is interrupted and there is no charging scheduled (see the "Charging schedule" chapter), the LEDs (B) fig. 211 will light up with a steady green light showing the current battery charge level; if there are any upcoming charging schedules, the LEDs (B) fig. 211 will glow blue light and the LED will light up (A) fig. 211. If a charging interval is interrupted, the same interval can only be resumed by disconnecting and reconnecting the charging cable, otherwise charging will continue with subsequent schedule. DISCONNECTING THE CHARGING CABLE The charging cable is locked during charging or when the doors are locked. To disconnect the charging cable, interrupt the charging in progress (see the "Interrupting charging" paragraph). If no charging is in progress, first unlock the doors using the button on the key and then disconnect the charging cable. located next to the charging port will light up flashing red. COMPLETION OF CHARGE The full charging procedure, if not interrupted, ends when all LEDs (A) fig. 213 they light up with a steady green light. 214 213 F0S1178 FAILURE DURING CHARGING PROCEDURE If a fault is detected during the charging procedure first and last LED (A) fig. 214 F0S1209 "eCoasting" mode (ENERGY SAVING) This is a mode that replaces the exhaust brake when the accelerator pedal is released, recovers energy during the slowing down phase of the car. The "eCoasting" mode is automatically activated in "NORMAL" operating mode to maximise energy recovery when the accelerator and brake pedals are released. Driving in "eCoasting" mode is possible if the transmission is in position "D" (Drive). "eBraking" MODE (HIGHVOLTAGE BATTERY CHARGING) The "eBraking" mode, which is always active regardless of the selected operating mode activates the high-voltage battery charging when the brake pedal is pressed, thereby recovering energy during braking. The electric motor works as an alternator, converting the kinetic energy of the car into electrical energy. Using this mode is particularly useful when driving in the city, where there are continuous stops and starts. NOTE To make the most efficient use of the system, the braking phase should, where possible, be modulated by applying so as to allow maximum energy recovery. NOTE In the event of an emergency, maximum braking efficiency is always guaranteed by the conventional braking system. ONE-PEDAL DRIVING With One-Pedal Driving in "RANGE" and "SHERPA" modes, the accelerator pedal can also be used to control deceleration of the car to a complete stop. Quickly release the accelerator pedal to obtain aggressive deceleration. Slowly release the accelerator pedal to adjust of the deceleration of the car. WARNING When One-Pedal Driving is active and the driver releases the seat belt, the electric parking brake is applied automatically and One-Pedal Driving is not possible. Press the accelerator pedal to reach the desired speed. The deceleration provided by One-Pedal Driving mode allows for full regenerative braking and helps to increase the efficiency of the car. With the One-Pedal Driving mode enabled, the electric parking brake may be automatically applied if: the car stops on a slope; the driver’s door is open; car stopped for longer than five minutes; problem to the propulsion system. To resume driving, press the accelerator pedal and the electric parking brake will automatically release. The One-Pedal Driving mode may shift the transmission to P if the car is pushed after stopping or if there is a problem with the electric motor. TOWING TRAILERS The vehicle is type-approved for towing. It is not permitted to mount an aftermarket towing device. WARNING The installation of a towing device on the vehicle can lead to accidents and result in serious injury. WARNING Never equip the vehicle with a towing device. Attaching towing devices can cause extensive damage to the vehicle. 207 STARTING AND DRIVING MOPAR® CONNECT (where provided) These services let you keep your car under control at all times and receive assistance in the event of accident, theft or breakdown. To have these services, install the Mopar ® Connect device on your car from the country (list available on the www.driveuconnect.eu website) and request activation by following the instructions received at the email address given when your car was handed over to you. Download the Uconnect™ LIVE App or access the www.driveuconnect.eu portal to use the connected services. You can find all the details about the services in the Mopar ® section of the www.driveuconnect.eu portal. PRIVACY MODE Privacy mode lets you disable the “Find car”, “Notify Area” and “Notify Speed” services, which allow registered customers to locate their cars, for a fixed time. WARNING Car position tracing remains active for the assistance services, where provided, in the event of accident or car theft, but is not visible to the customer. 208 PRIVACY MODE activation procedure Proceed as follows: take note of the total odometer reading; make sure that the instrument panel is off; Send the following text message to +393424112613: “PRIVACY ” (e.g.: PRIVACY ZFA3340000P123456 12532). You can find the vehicle identification number in the registration document; before starting the engine, wait to receive the text message confirming that Privacy mode has been activated and indicating when it expires. When you have received the confirmation, you can start your trip in the knowledge that the car will not be tracked until the indicated expiry time. If it expires while you are still travelling, Privacy mode will be extended until you turn off the engine (instrument panel off). If you receive a text message indicating that your request was not successful, you must be aware that the car will continue to be visible to the registered customer. If you have any problems during activation, consult the FAQ on the www.driveuconnect.eu portal, contact the Fiat Dealership or contact Customer Care. IN AN EMERGENCY Have a flat tyre or a burnt-out bulb? At times, a problem such as these may interfere with your driving experience. The pages on emergencies can help you to deal with critical situations independently and calmly. In an emergency, we recommend that you call the phone number found in the Warranty Booklet. It is also possible to call the national or international universal freephone number to search for the nearest Dealership. HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS ....... ASSIST CALL ............................ EMERGENCY CALL - EU eCall .... IN CASE OF ACCIDENT .............. REPLACING A BULB .................. FUSES REPLACEMENT .............. Fix&Go KIT ................................ JUMP STARTING ....................... TOWING THE CAR ..................... 210 210 212 216 217 222 231 233 234 209 IN AN EMERGENCY HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS Press button (A) fig. 215 to switch the hazard lights on/off regardless of the position of the ignition device. With the device on, warning lights and light up in the instrument panel. Press the button (A) again to switch the lights off. 215 ASSIST CALL The car is equipped with an on-board assistance function designed to provide support in the event of malfunctions of the car. The ASSIST function is activated: automatically (where provided) following malfunctions of the braking system system, motor, etc. manually, by pressing the ASSIST button (B) fig. 216 (where provided) located on the ceiling light or via the "Assist" app (A) fig. 217 present on the Uconnect™ system (where provided). For more information, refer to the "Apps" paragraph in the "Uconnect™" chapter of the "Multimedia" section. F0S1159 WARNING The use of hazard warning lights is governed by the highway code of the country you are driving in: comply with legal requirements. Emergency braking In the event of an emergency braking, the hazard warning lights switch on automatically together with warning lights and on the instrument panel. The lights switch off automatically when emergency braking ceases. 210 216 F0S1160 A 217 F0S1382 The ASSIST function is activated with: ignition device in the ENGINE position; ignition device in STOP position and Uconnect™ system display on. Once activated automatically (where provided) or manually by pressing the corresponding button, the EU eCall function will send the position data of the car to the Operations Centre and stablish a voice call with an operator. NOTE If the ASSIST function does work, the fault in the system will be indicated on the display. Go as soon as possible to a Fiat Dealership to have the function repaired. NOTE The correct operation of the ASSIST services will be guaranteed only by a good network coverage. WARNING The ASSIST function may not be available for the first minute after the car is started. The "ASSIST call" function is not the emergency call, also known as "eCall", which is required by law in the countries of the European Union (EU eCall) based on the emergency number 112 and described in the "SOS Call" chapter in the "In an emergency" section. Privacy: for the ASSIST call service, the location (GPS) of the car cannot be deactivated because it is indispensable for the provision of the service itself. The localisation for this service cannot be deactivated even with "Privacy Mode" activated ("Geo-location OFF"). Furthermore, deactivating the positioning of the car by means of the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system will make other services (other than the one described here) unavailable (for more details see "Settings" chapter of the Uconnect™ system). FCA Italy S.p.A. processes personal data ("Data") – as the Data Controller - in accordance with the provisions of Italian Legislative Decree 196/2003 as amended by Italian Legislative Decree 101/2018, Regulation (EU) 2016/679 and any other personal data protection regulations in force. In this regard, refer to the Privacy Policy on the Patto Chiaro Vendita. WARNING The icon at the top of the Uconnect™ display indicates that the geo-location function is active (ON). When geo-location is on, the car position is tracked to enable the functions that require it. When geo-location is off, the car position is only tracked by the navigation, safety, insurance and driver assistance systems (where provided). This function can be deactivated using the Uconnect™ system (see "Settings" in the"Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). Pressing the ASSIST button (where provided) located on the front ceiling light (B) fig. 216 and/or on the display fig. 217 of the Uconnect™ system (where provided) to call to one or more of the following services: Roadside assistance: if case of need, a connection will be established with the roadside assistance authority which will receive the car type and its position directly. Additional roadside assistance charges may apply. Customer care (where provided): Customer service to support all car problems. The LED on the ASSIST button located on the ceiling light will turn green once connected to an ASSIST operator and will turn off when the connection is ended. NOTE If the ASSIST call button is pressed by mistake, the call can be ended by pressing the same button again or by pressing the cancel button on the Uconnect™ system display. Once the connection has been established, the following data will be automatically transmitted, as authorised by the customer: indication that the occupant has made an ASSIST call; the brand of the car; the most recent known GPS coordinates of the car; the type of error that occurred in the car that automatically sent the ASSIST request (in the case of an automatic call - where provided). The call will be made through the car sound system to provide any additional information about the assistance request. If the system is unable to establish the voice call, or the line disconnects due to insufficient coverage, the ASSIST service will try to call the Operations Centre again for certain number of times. WARNING If you have not subscribed to the related services or the My Assistant package has expired or is 211 IN AN EMERGENCY unavailable for purchase, the ASSIST call will not be available. For further information visit the Fiat official website. WARNING If the ASSIST call system detects a malfunction, it is indicated by the red LEDs on the ceiling light and a corresponding message on the Uconnect™ system display. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. If a EU eCall is active and an ASSIST call is requested, the latter will not be delivered. Uconnect Box SYSTEM BATTERY The Uconnect Box system is provided with an independent battery that allows the operation of some connected services even if the 12V battery of the car is disconnected. The system will warn the user of the need to replace this battery by displaying a dedicated message on the display of the Uconnect™ system (where provided) and by means of a notification via mobile app (where provided). Go to a Fiat dealership as soon as possible. NOTE Failure to replace the battery and, consequently, failure to observe the warnings provided by the system 212 could affect or entirely prevent service operation. NOTE Regardless of state of charge, the battery must be replaced every 5 years by a Fiat dealership. EMERGENCY CALL EU eCall The car is equipped with an on-board assistance function designed to provide support in the event of accident and/or emergency (SOS). The emergency call, also known as "eCall", which is required by law in the countries of the European Union (EU eCall) based on the emergency number 112, can be used to call for help quickly in dangerous situations. The eCall EU emergency call activates the voice call to the Operations Centre dedicated to emergency calls (112) with simultaneous activation of the transmission of the car data and geo-location. The EU eCall service is a public service of general interest and free of charge. The EU eCall function can be activated: Automatically, in the event of a major collision recorded by the device by means of the presence of sensors aboard the car. Manually, holding the SOS button (A) located on the ceiling light fig. 218 pressed (for longer than 2 seconds). 218 F0S1198 After automatic or manual activation by pressing the SOS button, the function will send the car data to the Operations Centre, including the geo-location data of the data, and a voice call will be initiated with an operator. If the EU eCall function does not work, the fault in the system will be indicated on the instrument panel display. Go as soon as possible to a Fiat Dealership to have the function repaired. The EU eCall service using a SIM card mounted in the car. The provision of the services presupposes the proper operation and availability of the mobile phone network of the SIM card. The EU eCall function is activated with: ignition device in the ENGINE position; ignition device in the STOP position. The EU eCall is available in the STOP position for 10 minutes after the ignition device is switched from the ENGINE position to STOP. This condition is only valid for cars equipped with SOS call in accordance with the legal regulations in the countries where it applies. Once activated automatically (where provided) or manually by pressing the corresponding button, the EU eCall function will send the position data of the car to the Operations Centre and stablish a voice call with an operator. NOTE If the EU eCall function does work, the fault in the system will be indicated on the display. Go as soon as possible to a Fiat Dealership to have the function repaired. NOTE The correct operation of the EU eCall function will be guaranteed only by a good network coverage. Privacy: the location (GPS) of the car can never be deactivated because it is indispensable for the eCall service. Furthermore, deactivating the positioning of the car, performed by activating "Privacy Mode" ("Geolocation OFF") in the "Settings" menu items of the Uconnect™ system will make other services - other than the one described here - unavailable (for more details see "Settings" in the"vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). WARNING The icon at the top of the Uconnect™ display indicates that the geo-location function is active (ON). When geo-location is on, the car position is tracked to enable the functions that require it. When geo-location is off, the car position is only tracked by the navigation, safety, insurance and driver assistance systems (where provided). To deactivate this function, see "Settings" in the "Vehicle mode" paragraph in the "Multimedia" section). AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY CALL The automatic emergency call system is only available if the car is in READY ON status ("READY" symbol on instrument panel). The system makes an automatic emergency call if certain conditions are met, e.g. an airbag is deployed. The flashing green light located on the SOS button (A) fig. 218 on the front ceiling light will indicate that the system is trying to make the emergency call. The fixed green light will indicate that the call has been established. Interrupting the call The automatic emergency call cannot be interrupted by the user but will only be interrupted by the operator of the Emergency Operations Centre. MANUAL EMERGENCY CALL To make the emergency call manually make sure that the instrument panel is on ("READY" symbol on the instrument panel). Press the SOS call button on the front ceiling light for about 2 seconds (A) fig. 218. The green light located at the SOS button will flash and then become fixed once the connection has been made with an operator of the Operations Centre responsible for emergency calls (number 112). The green light will go out when the call is interrupted. Interrupting a call If the SOS call button is pressed by mistake, it is possible to press it again within 10 seconds to cancel the operation. After 10 seconds, only the operator of the Operations Centre can interrupt the call. If you are able to speak to the operator, do so through the car audio to provide additional information about the request for help. If the system is unable to establish the voice call, or the line disconnects due to insufficient coverage, EU eCall 213 IN AN EMERGENCY service will try to call the Operations Centre again for 5 minutes. If the Operations Centre needs to contact the car again, the system can receive, for up to 120 minutes from the ending of the call with the operator, an incoming call, which will be accepted automatically. Until the end of 120 minutes, the system will be completely dedicated to the management of the emergency in progress, therefore it will not be able to provide any connectivity service. LED signalling / colours Green light In flashing mode: this indicates that the emergency call has been activated, whether it was made manually or automatically. In fixed mode: this indicates that contact has been established with the Emergency Operations Centre operator. Off: this indicates that the emergency call has ended. Red light This indicates a fault in the EU eCall system with the impossibility to make an emergency call or with the possibility to do so with limitations. Go to a Fiat dealership as soon as possible when this light is red. 214 Uconnect Box SYSTEM BATTERY The Uconnect Box system is provided with an independent battery that allows the operation of some connected services even if the 12V battery of the car is disconnected. The system will warn the user of the need to replace this battery by displaying a dedicated message on the display of the Uconnect™ system (where provided) and by means of a notification via mobile app (where provided). Go to a Fiat dealership as soon as possible. NOTE Failure to replace the battery and, consequently, failure to observe the warnings provided by the system could affect or entirely prevent service operation. NOTE Regardless of state of charge, the battery must be replaced every 5 years by a Fiat dealership. EU eCall SYSTEM FAULTS If the EU eCall system detects a malfunction, this is indicated by the red light on the ceiling light and a dedicated icon and/or message on the instrument panel display. The system through this icon and/or message will suggest to the user to have the battery checked, in case of low level of charge or malfunction and will inform him about the current system update and the status of the call (in progress, failed, etc.). If a fault is present, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Privacy - Information on personal data ("Data") processing The geo-location (GPS) function of the car is always active and can never be deactivated for the EU eCall service, even when the "Privacy Mode" system is activated ("Geo-location OFF"). Data processing is carried out in accordance with current European legislation (EU Regulation 2016/679 also known as "GDPR"). When the call is connected, the following data will be automatically transmitted to the Operations Centre: Identification of the data packet sent. (The operator may request an updated data package during the call) car Identification Number Type of traction (electric, petrol, Diesel, LPG, etc.) Date, time and minute when the call was made Call type: Manual (via SOS button) or Automatic (following a collision) Vehicle type (car or van) Type of traction (electric, petrol, Diesel, LPG, etc.) Reliability of the sent position (depending on the condition of the GPS signal at the time of the call) Location relative to the time of the call. If the call is made from a location where the GPS position is available, the position of the car will be sent at the start of the call; if the GPS signal is not available, e.g. inside a tunnel, the last available position will be sent Two positions before the main position sent and the direction of travel of the car. Data processing is strictly limited to the sole purpose of making emergency calls to 112, the single European emergency number. The recipients of the Data processed through EU eCall are the emergency call collection centres that are the first designated by the competent Authorities of the country in whose territory the vehicle is located to receive and process eCalls to the single European emergency number 112. The EU eCall system is designed to ensure that the Data in the system memory is not available outside the system before an eCall is activated. The EU eCall system, in normal operation, is not traceable and cannot be monitored at all times. It ensures that data is automatically and continuously erased from the internal memory of the system. The car geo-location data car are constantly overwritten in the internal memory of the system to store at most the last three positions of the car, necessary for the normal operation of the system. The data protocol of the EU eCall system activities is kept only for the time necessary to manage the eCall emergency call and in any case for no more than 13 hours from the time the eCall emergency call was initiated. FCA Italy S.p.A. shall retain the geo-location data relating to the position of the VEHICLE - recorded at the time of the accident - for the period deemed strictly necessary to provide this Service. In addition, the Data may be retained by FCA for a longer period to deal with any disputes related to the provision of the Service and to ascertain, exercise or defend the rights of FCA in judicial and/or extrajudicial proceedings. After this period, the Data will either be anonymised or permanently erased. The Data Controller of the aforesaid personal data is FCA Italy S.p.A. (hereinafter "FCA") with registered office in Corso Agnelli 200, 10135 Torino, Italy. The data subjects can contact the Data Protection Officer's team at the email address [email protected]. FCA commits to comply with the applicable laws in the matter of data protection, in particular the requirements of Legislative Decree 196/2003 as amended by Legislative Decree 101/2018 and UE Regulation UE 2016/679. Refer to the Privacy Policy on the Patto Chiaro Vendita. The following rights are granted to the data subject: 1. right of access, i.e. the right to obtain confirmation from FCA whether or not the Data are being processed and, if so, to obtain access to them; 2. right of correction and erasure, i.e. the right to obtain the correction of inaccurate Data and/or the integration of incomplete Data or the deletion of Data for legitimate reasons; 3. right to the restriction of processing, i.e. the right to request the suspension of processing where legitimate reasons exist; 4. right to data portability, i.e. the right to receive the Data in a structured, commonly used and readable format, 215 IN AN EMERGENCY as well as the right to transmit the Data to another data controller; 5. right to object, i.e. the right to object to the processing of Data if there are legitimate reasons, including processing of Data for marketing and profiling purposes, if any; 6. right to contact the competent data protection authority in case of unlawful processing of Data. The data subject may exercise the rights listed above by writing to FCA Italy S.p.A., Corso Giovanni Agnelli 200 10135 Torino Italy or to the following email address: [email protected]: Furthermore, the data subject has the right to lodge a complaint with the competent Data Protection Authority if he or she considers that his or her rights have been violated as a result of the processing of his or her personal data. WARNINGS In the event of danger (fire, visible smoke or hazardous road conditions or dangerous positions), do not wait for voice contact with the Emergency service operator, but exit from the car immediately and go to a safe place, if in a condition to do so. Do not place network CB radios or aftermarket electrical equipment to avoid interference. Such interference 216 could prevent the system form making the emergency call. Ignoring system fault signals (red LED on the ceiling light and dedicated messages on the instrument panel) may mean that you cannot make an EU call, if necessary. Even if the EU eCall system is fully functional, factors outside the control of FCA could interfere with or prevent operation of the EU eCall. These factors can be identified in: clogged or unavailable satellite signals, network connection, adverse weather conditions, buildings, interfering structures, tunnels, etc. IN CASE OF ACCIDENT 216) AUTOMATIC HIGHVOLTAGE BATTERY DISCONNECTION In the case of an accident, with the intervention of the battery disconnect system and airbags, the high-voltage battery is disconnected automatically, to avoid possible fire risks that could put passengers and any other people involved in traffic and/or near the car in a dangerous condition. To reactivate the high-voltage battery, contact a Fiat Dealership. PRECAUTIONS IN CASE OF ACCIDENT To minimise the risk of serious injury, observe the following precautions: park safely on the side of the road, apply the electric parking brake, put the one-speed transmission in P and switch off the electric motor; contact rescue immediately, warning that it is a electric car equipped with a high-voltage system; if you notice any electrolyte leakage from the high-voltage battery, do not go near the vehicle. If the electrolyte from the high-voltage battery comes into contact with the eyes or skin, blindness or skin lesions may occur. Any vapors released from the electrolyte, if inhaled, may also cause a risk of intoxication. In case of contact with the electrolyte, rinse immediately with plenty of water and seek medical attention; do not go near the high-voltage battery with naked flames: danger of FIRE. In case of fire, do not use water extinguishers to extinguish the fire; the use of water, even in small quantities, can be dangerous; if the car has been seriously damaged, maintain a safe distance of at least 15 metres between the car and the other cars / flammable materials. WARNING 216) Do not touch high-voltage components (identified by the colour orange) or any components that have come into contact with exposed high-voltage cables. NEVER touch exposed electric cables: danger of ELECTROCUTION. difference in temperature and humidity between the inside and the outside of the glass which does not indicate a fault and does not compromise the normal operation of lighting devices. The mist disappears quickly when the lights are turned on, starting from the centre of the vent, extending progressively towards the edges. REPLACING A BULB 217) 218) 219) 81) 82) GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Before replacing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation; burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the same type and power; always check the headlight beam direction after changing a bulb; when a light is not working, check that the corresponding fuse is intact before replacing a bulb. For the location of fuses, refer to the "Fuses replacement" chapter in this section. WARNING When the weather is cold or damp or after heavy rain or washing, the surface of headlights or rear lights may steam up and/or form drops of condensation on the inside. This is a natural phenomenon due to the 217 IN AN EMERGENCY BULB TYPES The car is equipped with the following bulbs: All-glass bulb: (type A) these are pressure fitted - pull to remove. Bayonet bulb: (type B) to remove them press the bulb and turn it anticlockwise. Cylindrical bulbs: (type C) release them from their contacts to remove. Halogen bulbs: (type D) release the fastening clip from its housing to remove the bulb. 218 A B C D Light bulbs Use Type Power Ref. Figure Dipped/Main beam headlights H19 (where provided) (LED) (where provided) 55/60W (where provided) D (where provided) Front side lights/Daytime running lights (DRL) (LED) (where provided) W5W (where provided) 5W (where provided) A (Where provided) Front direction indicators PSY24 (where provided) (LED) (where provided) 24W (where provided) B (where provided) Side direction indicators LED – – Rear direction indicators LED – – Tail/brake light LED – – Reverse gear W16W 16W B Rear fog light W16W 16W B Ceiling light C5W 5W C Boot light W5W 5W A Number plate light LED – – Third brake lights LED – – 219 IN AN EMERGENCY REPLACING AN EXTERNAL BULB FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS The front light clusters contain side/tail lights, dipped headlights, main beam headlights and direction indicator bulbs. LED front direction indicators For replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. Side direction indicators The side direction indicators of the LED type. For replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. Dipped/main beam headlights Contact a Fiat Dealership for replacing an LED dipped beam/main beam headlight. If the car is fitted with dipped beam/main beam headlights of the light bulb type, proceed as follows to replace them: operating from the motor compartment remove the protective rubber cap (A) fig. 219; press the fastener and remove the bulb holder; 220 219 F0S1161 remove the pressure-fitted bulb and replace it; refit the bulb holder locking it correctly; refit the rubber cap. Side/tail lights/daytime running lights (DRL) The side/tail lights/daytime running lights (DRL) are of the LED-type. For replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. Front direction indicators Contact a Fiat Dealership for replacing a front direction indicator of the LED type. If the car is fitted with direction indicators of the light bulb type, proceed as follows to replace them: remove the wheel arch (A) fig. 220 by undo the appropriate screws; 220 F0S1162 remove the bulb holder by pressing the fins (B) fig. 221; remove the pressure-fitted bulb and replace it; refit the bulb holder locking it correctly. 221 F0S1163 REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS These contain the functions of the tail lights, brake lights and direction indicators. The reversing lights and rear fog lights are located instead in the rear bumper. The tail, brake, third brake lights and the direction indications are of the LED type. For replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. REVERSING LIGHT/REAR FOG LIGHT To replace the reversing and rear fog light, access the bulb holder through the lower part of the rear bumper fig. 222. 223 F0S1165 224 F0S1166 225 F0S1313 refit the bulb/bulb holder (A) by turning it clockwise. THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS The third brake lights are LED-type. For replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. 222 F0S1164 rotate the bulb holder (A) fig. 223 anticlockwise and extract it. Undo the outer bulb holders to replace the reversing lights. Undo the central bulb holder to replace the rear fog light; release the bulb and replace it; NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS The number plate lights are LED-type. For replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. REPLACING INTERIOR BULBS Inside ceiling light To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: operate in the points indicated by the arrows and remove ceiling light (A) fig. 224 complete with its frame; remove the lens assembly and replace the press-fit bulb (A) fig. 225, making sure that it locks correctly. Boot courtesy light (where provided) To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: open the boot; using the screwdriver provided, extract the ceiling light (A) fig. 226 221 IN AN EMERGENCY working in the point shown by the arrow; 226 WARNING F0S1323 open the protection (B) fig. 227 replace the snap-fitted bulb; 217) Modifications or repairs to the electric system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire. 218) Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas, in the case of breakage they may burst causing glass fragments to be projected outwards. 219) Only replace the light bulbs when the motor is off and in a position that does not interfere with traffic and lets you safely replace them (see the description in the “When parked" chapter in the "Starting and driving" section). Also ensure that the motor is cold, to prevent the risk of burns. FUSES REPLACEMENT 220) 221) 222) 223) 224) GENERAL INFORMATION Fuses protect the electrical system: they intervene (blow) in the event of a failure or improper action on the system. Check the state of the corresponding fuse when a device does not work: the filament (A) fig. 228 should be intact. If it is not, replace the blown fuse with another with the same amperage (same colour). IMPORTANT 227 F0S1324 close the cover (B) on the lens; then refit the ceiling light by inserting it correctly in its housing, on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place. 222 81) Halogen bulbs must be handled holding the metallic part only. Touching the transparent part of the bulb with your fingers may reduce the intensity of the emitted light and even reduce the lifespan of the bulb. In the event of accidental contact, wipe the bulb with a cloth moistened with alcohol and let the bulb dry. 82) Where possible, it is advisable to have bulbs changed at a Fiat Dealership. The correct operation and direction of the external lights are absolutely essential for the safety of the car and of compliance with the law. 228 F0S1278 (B) = intact fuse; (C) = fuse with damaged filament. To facilitate fuse replacement, use the tongs (D) hooked inside the fusebox lid on the dashboard left-hand side. Refer to the tables on the following pages to identify the protective fuse. For fuse replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. DASHBOARD FUSEBOX The fusebox is located on the lower left side of the dashboard (fig. 229). Remove the dashboard panel to access the fusebox. The fuse layout is shown in fig. 231. 230 F0S1296 The fuse layout is shown in fig. 232. WARNING 229 F0S1291 MOTOR COMPARTMENT FUSEBOX 83) The fusebox is located behind the DC/DC converter fig. 230. 220) If the replaced fuse blows again, contact a Fiat Dealership. 221) Never replace a faulty fuse with metal wires or anything else. 222) Never replace a fuse with another with a higher amp rating; RISK OF FIRE. 223) If a general fuse (MEGA-FUSE, MIDIFUSE, MAXI-FUSE) blows contact a Fiat Dealership. 224) Contact Fiat Dealership if a safety system (airbags, brakes), engine system (engine, gearbox) or steering system general protection fuse blows. IMPORTANT 83) If you need to wash the engine compartment, take care not to directly hit the engine compartment fusebox with the water jet. 223 IN AN EMERGENCY DASHBOARD FUSEBOX F43 F36 F38 F48 F47 F94 231 USERS 224 F0S1168 FUSE AMPERE Power supply to the climate control system, FIAT Link & Drive, USB data port, Uconnect™ display, electric parking brake control, EOBD port F36 15 A Unlocking the tailgate F38 20 A Windscreen washer pump F43 20 A Front electric window (driver side) F47 20 A Front electric window (passenger side) F48 20 A USERS 12V socket FUSE AMPERE F94 15 A 225 IN AN EMERGENCY MOTOR COMPARTMENT FUSEBOX B C 232 226 A F0S1297 Fusebox (A) F30 F84 F23 T17 F88 F89 F10 233 USERS F0S1300 FUSE AMPERE Horn F10 10 Heated seats (where provided) F23 20 Heated windscreen (where provided) F30 20 12V boot power socket F84 20 Heated door mirrors (where provided) F88 7.5 227 IN AN EMERGENCY 228 USERS Heated rear window USERS Door mirror/heated rear window defrosting FUSE AMPERE F89 20 RELAYS AMPERE T17 30 Fusebox (B) T06 T02 T90 T14 T03 234 USERS F0S1299 RELAYS AMPERE Heated seats (where provided) T02 30 Horn T03 20 Heated seats (where provided) T06 30 12V boot power socket T14 20 Heated windscreen (where provided) T90 30 229 IN AN EMERGENCY Fusebox (C) 235 USERS 230 F0S1393 FUSE AMPERE Driver's side electric lock F02 10 Passenger's side electric lock F09 10 Sound system amplifier (where provided) F12 15 Sunroof movement (where provided) F13 20 Sound system amplifier (where provided) F19 15 Fix&Go KIT wear the gloves; (where provided) A D 225) 226) C 84) DESCRIPTION The Fix&Go quick tyre repair kit fig. 236 is located in the boot, inside a dedicated container and consists of: one cartridge (A) containing sealant and fitted with: transparent tube for injecting the sealant (D) and sticker (C) with the wording "Max. 80 km/h" to be placed in a clearly visible position (e.g. on the dashboard) after repairing the tyre; one compressor (B); REPAIR PROCEDURE Proceed as follows: stop the car in a position that is not dangerous for oncoming traffic where you can change the wheel safely. The car must be stopped in a lay-by, carpark or parking or service area, and the ground must be as level as possible and sufficiently compact; M AX B 236 F0S1246 turn the ignition device to the OFF position, apply the electric parking brake and shift the gear to position P or R; put on the reflective safety jacket before getting out of the car (if required by the regulations in force). In any case, follow the road safety laws in force in the country where you are driving; make sure that any passengers get out of the car and go to a safe place where they will not obstruct traffic or be exposed to the risk of injury. In case of puncture, change the tyre respecting the laws of the country you are travelling in; insert the sealant cartridge (A) into the corresponding compressor compartment (B)and press it down hard fig. 236. Remove the speed limit sticker (C) and apply it in a clearly visible position fig. 237; 237 F0S1293 remove the cap from the tyre valve and connect and screw the transparent tube of the sealant (D) fig. 236 onto the valve. If a 300 ml cartridge is present the housing of the transparent tube is provided with removable ring to facilitate extraction. Make sure that the ON/OFF button (E) fig. 238 is in the off position (button not pressed); G E 238 L F0S1262 231 IN AN EMERGENCY insert the electrical connector (C) fig. 239 into the 12V socket on the car and start the engine; C I H 240 239 F0S1294 operate the compressor by pressing the ON/OFF button (E) fig. 238. When the pressure shown in the "Wheels" chapter in the "Technical specifications" section on the specific label appears on the pressure gauge (G), stop the compressor by pressing the ON-OFF button (E) again; disconnect the cartridge (A) from the compressor, by pressing the release button (H) and lifting the cartridge (A) upwards fig. 240. 232 ON A F0S1263 If the pressure gauge (G) fig. 238 indicates a pressure lower than 1.8 bar / 26 psi 15 minutes after starting the compressor, switch off the compressor, disconnect the sealant tube (D) from the tyre valve and remove the cartridge (A) from the compressor fig. 236. Move the car by approximately 10 m to promote the distribution of sealant; stop the car safely, operate the parking brake and restore pressure using the black inflation pipe (I) fig. 241 to reach the required pressure. If also in this case, the pressure is lower than 1.8 bar / 26 psi 15 minutes after turning on, do not resume driving but contact a Fiat Dealership. 241 F0S1264 After driving for about 8 km / 5 miles, place the car in a safe and suitable area, engaging the parking brake. Take the compressor and restore pressure using the black inflation tube (I) fig. 241. If the pressure shown is higher than 1.8 bar / 26 psi, restore the pressure and drive safely to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. If, however, the pressure is lower than 1.8 bar / 26 psi, do not resume driving but contact a Fiat Dealership. PROCEDURE FOR RESTORING THE PRESSURE Proceed as follows: stop the car safely, as described above, and operate the parking brake; extract the black inflation tube (I) fig. 241 and screw it firmly onto the tyre valve. Follow the instructions shown in fig. 239 and fig. 241. Press the air release button (L) fig. 238 to adjust any tyre overpressure. IMPORTANT CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT Proceed as follows: only use original Fix&Go cartridges, which can be purchased from the Fiat Dealership. to remove the cartridge (A) fig. 240 press the release button (H) and lift it. 84) The sealant fluid is effective with external temperatures from -40°C to +50°C. The sealant fluid has an expiry date and must be replaced periodically. It is possible to repair tyres with damage on the tread up to a maximum diameter of 6 mm. Show the cartridge and the label to the personnel who will handle the tyre treated with the repair kit. WARNING 225) The information required by the applicable regulation is indicated on the Fix&Go kit package label. Carefully read the label on the cartridge before use, avoid improper use. The kit should be used by adults and cannot be used by children. 226) IMPORTANT: Do not exceed 80 km/h. Avoid sudden acceleration or braking. The kit provides a temporary repair, therefore the tyre must be examined and repaired by a specialist as soon as possible. Before using the kit, ensure that the tyre is not excessively damaged and that the rim is in good condition, otherwise do not use it and call roadside assistance. Do not remove foreign bodies from the tyre. Do not let the compressor turned on for more than 20 consecutive minutes - overheating hazard. JUMP STARTING Jump starting using cables and/or using an auxiliary 12V battery is never permitted. Risk of damaging the electrical system of the car. Contact a Fiat Dealership. STARTER WITH FLAT HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY AND 12V BATTERY Jump starting is not possible with a discharged high-voltage battery. Proceed as follows: Contact a Fiat Dealership. transport the car with a tow truck to a public or private charging point and charge the high-voltage battery (for transport see the "Towing the car" chapter in this section). FLAT HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY AND 12V BATTERY In this condition it is possible to move the car for a few metres, positioning the ignition device to the ENGINE position and putting the transmission in position N. BUMP STARTING Never bump start the motor by pushing, towing or driving downhill. WARNING Remember that the brake servo and electric power steering system (where provided) are not active until the ignition device is in ENGINE position. A much greater effort will therefore be required to use the brake pedal or turn the steering wheel. 233 IN AN EMERGENCY TOWING THE CAR 227) 228) 229) 230) 231) The tow ring provided with the car is housed in the tool bag under the boot mat. The car may not be towed. It can only be transported on a tow truck as shown in fig. 242. 243 242 F0S1302 ATTACHING THE TOW HOOK Front Proceed as follows: release the cap fig. 243; take the tow ring out of its housing in the tool support; fully tighten it on the threaded pin. 234 230) It is permitted to tow for short distances at a speed not exceeding 5 km/h using a special device conforming to the Highway Code (rigid bar) and ONLY for preparation for transport by tow truck, keeping the broken-down car aligned on the same centreline as the tow truck. 231) Tow rings MUST NOT be used to tow cars off the road or where there are obstacles and/or for towing operations using cables or other non-rigid devices. F0S1169 FLAT HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY AND 12V BATTERY In this condition it is possible to move the car for a few metres, positioning the ignition device to the ENGINE position and putting the transmission in position N. WARNING 227) Before tightening the ring clean the threaded housing thoroughly. Make sure that the ring is fully fastened in the housing before towing the car. 228) NEVER tow the car with two or four wheels on the road. Risk of damaging the motor and fire hazard. It is imperative that the car is towed by a tow truck. 229) In the case of a discharged highvoltage battery and a discharged 12V battery, NEVER tow the car. Transport it on a tow truck and contact a Fiat Dealership. MAINTENANCE AND CARE Proper maintenance allows car performance to be maintained over time, operating costs to be contained, and safety system performance to be safeguarded. This section explains how. SCHEDULED SERVICING ........... CHECKING LEVELS ................... 12V BATTERY ........................... RUBBER HOSES ....................... BRAKES ................................... REPLACING THE WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADES ......................... RAISING THE CAR ..................... WHEELS AND TYRES................. CAR INACTIVITY ........................ BODYWORK ............................. INTERIOR ................................. 236 240 243 244 244 244 246 246 247 248 251 235 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 236 SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct servicing is crucial for guaranteeing a long life for the car under the best conditions. For this reason, Fiat has planned a series of checks and services at fixed distance and/or time intervals, as described in the Service Schedule. To keep the efficiency of the car in tiptop condition, in the following Service Schedule pages a few additional checks are listed that should be carried out more frequently with respect to the normal scheduled service deadline. Scheduled Servicing is offered by Fiat Dealerships according to fixed time or kilometres/miles intervals. If, during each operation, in addition to the ones scheduled, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be carried out with the owner's explicit agreement only. IMPORTANT NOTES The scheduled service deadlines are set out by the Manufacturer. Failure to have them carried out may invalidate the warranty. We advise sharing any doubts regarding the car’s proper operation with your Fiat Dealership, before waiting for the next scheduled service deadline. SERVICE SCHEDULE WARNING Once you have carried out the last intervention in the table, continue with the scheduled servicing, maintaining the frequency indicated in the plan by marking each operation with a dot or dedicated note. Warning: simply restarting the maintenance from the start of the plan may cause the allowed interval to be exceeded for some operations! Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 Thousands of kilometres 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Check the tyre condition/wear and, if necessary, adjust the pressure. Check the "Fix&Go” kit condition/expiry Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (high-voltage cooling, brakes, windscreen washer, etc.) (1) Check vehicle functions via diagnostic socket (vehicle control units, high-voltage battery, etc.) Check 12V battery with special instrument Visually inspect the condition of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (brakes, climate control system, cooling system), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.) Check windscreen/rear window wiper blade position/wear (where provided) Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system and adjust nozzles, if necessary 237 MAINTENANCE AND CARE Thousands of miles 9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 Thousands of kilometres 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 Years 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Check cleanliness of hood and boot locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage Check soft top operation while closing and opening; check of seals and lubrication of canvas sliding side guide (only cabrio versions) Visually inspect conditions and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator (where present) Visually inspect condition and wear of the rear drum brake lining Change the brake fluid (4) Replace passenger compartment filter (2) ( ) ( ) Replace UConnect Box system battery (3) Visually check charging port (1) Topping up must be carried out with the fluids indicated in this Owner Handbook and only after checking that the system is undamaged. (2) If the car is used in dusty areas, this cleaner should be replaced every 15,000 km/9,000 mi. (3) The Uconnect Box battery must be replaced every 5 years, regardless of mileage. (4) Brake fluid must be changed every 2 years or every 75,000 km/45,000 mi. ( ) Recommended operations ( ) Mandatory operations 238 REGULAR CHECKS Every 1,000 km/600 mi or before long journeys, check and top up the following, if necessary: traction system coolant level; NOTE The motor coolant level must be checked when the motor is cold and must range between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir. If the level is under the MIN level, go to a Fiat Dealership. Do not attempt to open the cap yourself to avoid burns and/or damage to the cooling system and electronic components. Topping up and filling operations must be carried out by qualified personnel at Fiat Dealership using the appropriate equipment for vacuum filling. brake fluid level; windscreen washer fluid level; tyre inflation pressure and condition; operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.); operation of windscreen washer/wiper system and positioning/wear of windscreen/rear window wiper blades. You are advised to use PETRONAS LUBRICANTS products, which have been designed and produced specifically for Fiat cars (see table “Capacities” in the “Technical specifications” section). DEMANDING USE OF THE CAR If the car is mainly used in one of the following particularly harsh conditions: dusty roads; short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 km / 4-5 mi) at sub-zero external temperatures; in the event of a long period of inactivity; perform the following inspections more frequently than shown on the Service Schedule: check front disc brake pad condition and wear; check cleanliness of bonnet and boot locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage; visually inspect conditions of: electric motor, transmission, brake pipes and hoses, rubber elements (gaiters/sleeves/bushes, etc.); check the state of charge and fluid level (electrolyte) of the 12V battery; check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter. 239 MAINTENANCE AND CARE CHECKING LEVELS 232) 233) 234) 85) 244 F0S1087 A. Motor coolant B. Brake fluid C. 12V battery D. Windscreen washer fluid WARNING 232) Never smoke while working in the engine compartment: gas and inflammable vapours may be present, with the risk of fire. 233) Be very careful when working in the engine compartment when the engine is hot: you may get burned. Remember that the fan may start up if the engine is hot: this could injure you. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts. 234) Do not operate in the engine compartment while the vehicle is charging or when the connector on the charging port is plugged in. 240 IMPORTANT 85) The use of products with specifications other than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine not covered by the warranty. 241 MAINTENANCE AND CARE COOLING SYSTEM FLUID The traction system coolant level must be checked when the motor is cold and must range between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir. If the level is under the MIN level, go to a Fiat Dealership. Do not attempt to open the cap yourself to avoid burns and/or damage to the cooling system and electronic components. Topping up and filling operations must be carried out by qualified personnel at Fiat Dealership using the appropriate equipment for vacuum filling. WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WASHER FLUID Check fluid level through the reservoir. If the liquid is too low, lift reservoir cap (D) (see previous pages) and add the fluid described in In the section "Technical specifications". The windscreen washer reservoir must be filled with the liquids provided for this purpose. The use of any other liquid can compromise the operation of the reservoir pump. After topping up, close cap (D), making sure it is correctly locked. 235) 242 BRAKE FLUID Check that the fluid is at the maximum level (the fluid level in the reservoir must not exceed the MAX mark). If the fluid level in the reservoir is too low, undo reservoir cap (B) (see the previous pages) and add the fluid described in the "Technical specifications" section. Note Carefully clean the cap of the reservoir (B) and the surrounding surface. Take great care to ensure that impurities do not enter the reservoir when the cap is opened. Always use a funnel with a built-in filter with a mesh of 0.12 mm or less. WARNING Brake fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture). For this reason, if the car is mainly used in areas with a high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid must be replaced at more frequent intervals than specified on the "Service Schedule". 236) 237) 86) WARNING 235) Do not travel with the windscreen washer fluid reservoir empty: the windscreen washer is essential for improving visibility. Some commercial windscreen washer additives are flammable. The engine compartment contains hot components which may set it on fire. 236) Brake fluid is poisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental contact, immediately wash the affected parts with water and mild soap. Then rinse thoroughly. Call a doctor immediately if swallowed. 237) The symbol on the reservoir identifies synthetic brake fluids, distinguishing them from the mineral type. Use of mineral type fluids will irreparably damage the braking system’s special rubber seals. IMPORTANT 86) Prevent brake fluid, which is highly corrosive, from coming into contact with painted parts. Should it happen, immediately wash with water. 12V BATTERY The car is fitted with a lowmaintenance 12V battery: no electrolyte top-ups with distilled water are needed in standard conditions of use. WARNING It is forbidden to disconnect the 12V battery. For 12V battery replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. WARNING Do not use the 12V battery of the car to charge the 12V battery of the another car. The battery power is insufficient for this operation, with the risk of damage to the car. INSPECTING THE CHARGE AND THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL The operations must be carried out as described in this Owner Handbook only by specialised technicians. Topping must be carried out by specialised personnel at a Fiat Dealership. 238) 239) 12V BATTERY REPLACEMENT WARNING For battery replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. 240) 241) 87) 6) USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDING THE LIFE OF THE 12V BATTERY To avoid draining your 12V battery and make it last longer, observe the following instructions: when you park the car, ensure that the doors, tailgate and bonnet are closed properly, to prevent any lights from remaining on inside the passenger's compartment; switch off all roof lights inside the car: the car is however equipped with a system which switches all internal lights off automatically; do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on for a long time; before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the cable from the negative battery terminal; completely tighten the battery terminals. The battery will also be more at risk of freezing (this can happen as early as -10°C). Refer to the "Car inactivity" chapter in the "Starting and driving" section if the car is left parked for a long time. If after buying the car, you want to install electric accessories which require permanent electric supply (alarm, etc.) or accessories influencing the electrical supply requirements, contact a Fiat Dealership whose qualified personnel will suggest the most suitable devices from Lineaccessori MOPAR® and evaluate the overall electric absorption, checking whether the electric system in the car is able to support the required load, or if it should be integrated with a more powerful 12V battery. Since some of these devices continue to consume electricity even when the motor is off, they gradually run down the battery. RECHARGING THE 12V BATTERY 242) WARNING If the charge level remains under 50% for a long time, the 12V battery is damaged by sulphation, reducing its capacity and efficiency at start-up. Never charge the 12V battery using: an external battery charger; a battery from another car. Contact a Fiat Dealership. 243 MAINTENANCE AND CARE WARNING 238) Battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Keep open flames away from the battery and do not use objects that might create sparks: risk of explosion and fire. 239) Using the battery with low fluid will irreparably damage the battery and may cause an explosion. 240) Always wear appropriate goggles to protect your eyes when working on or near the conventional battery. 241) Any operation concerning the 12V battery ( removal, disconnection, etc.) must be carried out by a specialised professional. Contact a Fiat Dealership. 242) Do not attempt to recharge a frozen battery: first it must be thawed, otherwise there is a risk of explosion. If freezing has occurred, the battery should be checked by specialised technicians to make sure that the internal elements are not damaged and that the body is not cracked, with the risk of leaking poisonous and corrosive acid. IMPORTANT 87) Incorrect installation of electric and electronic devices may cause severe damage to your car. After purchasing your car, if you wish to install any accessories (anti-theft, etc.), go to a Fiat Dealership, which will suggest the most suitable devices and advise you whether a higher capacity battery needs to be installed. 244 IMPORTANT 6) Batteries contain substances which are very harmful for the environment. It is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership for battery replacement. RUBBER HOSES As far as the maintenance of the brake system and cooling system rubber hoses is concerned, follow the "Service Schedule" in this section carefully. Ozone, high temperatures and prolonged lack of fluid in the system may cause hardening and cracking of the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful checking is therefore necessary. BRAKES Depending on the version/market, the car may be equipped with mechanical wear detectors for the brake pads: one for each wheel assembly. When the brake linings are close to wearing out, pressing the brake pedal will generate a slight squeal: this lasts for about 100 km (the mileage varies with the driving style and route). In this case, it is still possible to continue driving, with caution. However, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the worn brake pads changed. REPLACING THE WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADES WIPER BLADES Replace the blades if the rubber edge is deformed or worn. In any case, it is advisable to replace them approximately once a year. A few simple precautions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades: if the temperature falls below zero, make sure that ice has not frozen the rubber to the glass. Use a de-icing product to release it if required; remove any snow from the glass: in addition to protecting the blades, this prevents effort on the motor and overheating; do not operate the windscreen and rear window wipers on dry glass. 243) 244) RAISING THE WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES Lift the windscreen wiper arm and position the blade so that it forms a 90° angle with the arm. REPLACING WIPER BLADES Proceed as follows: lift up the windscreen wiper arm (A) fig. 245 and position the blade so that it forms a 90° angle with the arm; press the button (A) and extract from the arm (B) the blade (C); insert the new blade making sure it is locked into place. 245 REPLACING THE REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE Proceed as follows: raise the cover (A) fig. 246 and remove the arm from the car, undoing the nut (B) that fixes it to the pivot pin; correctly position the new arm and tighten the nut fully; lower the cover. 247 F0S1333 The jets should be directed at about 1/3 of the height from the top edge of the windscreen fig. 247. WARNING In versions with a sunroof, make sure that the sunroof is closed before operating the front jets. 246 F0S1273 WINDSCREEN WASHER NOZZLES If there is no jet of fluid, firstly check that there is fluid in the reservoir (see the "Checking levels" chapter in this section). Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged; use a needle to unblock them if necessary. The screen washer jets can be oriented by adjusting the nozzle angles. REAR WINDOW WASHER NOZZLE The rear window washer jets are fixed. The nozzle holder is located above the rear window fig. 248. F0S1272 245 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 246 RAISING THE CAR A B C 88) If the car needs to be lifted, go to a Fiat Dealership which is equipped with workshop lifts and jack arms. IMPORTANT 248 F0S1334 WARNING 243) Driving with worn windscreen/rear window wiper blades is a serious risk, because visibility is reduced in bad weather. 244) If the window needs to be cleaned, make sure the device is turned off or the ignition device is in the STOP position. 88) For versions equipped with side-skirts, pay particular attention when positioning the lift arms at the workshop. WHEELS AND TYRES 245) 246) 247) 248) Check the pressure of each tyre approximately every two weeks and before long journeys. The pressure should be checked with the tyre rested and cold. It is normal for the pressure to increase when the car is used; for the correct tyre inflation pressure, see the "Wheels" chapter in the "Technical specifications" section. Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre wear fig. 249: 249 F0S1279 A normal pressure: tread evenly worn. B low pressure: tread particularly worn at the edges. C high pressure: tread particularly worn in the centre. The tyres must be replaced when the tread is less than 1.6 mm thick. In any case, follow the laws in force in the country where you are driving. IMPORTANT NOTES As far as possible, avoid sharp braking, screech starts and violent shocks against pavements, potholes or other hard obstacles. Driving for long stretches over uneven roads can damage the tyres; periodically check that the tyres have no cuts in the side wall, abnormal swelling or irregular tyre tread wear. Go to a Fiat Dealership if required; avoid overloading the car when travelling: this may cause serious damage to the wheels and tyres; if a tyre is punctured, stop immediately to avoid damage to the tyre, the rim, suspension and steering system; tyres age even if they are not used much. Cracks in the tread and on the sidewalls are a sign of ageing. In any event, have the tyres checked by specialised personnel if they have been fitted for longer than 6 years; in the case of replacement, always fit new tyres, avoiding those of unknown origin; if a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve; to allow even wear between the front and rear tyres, it is advisable to change them over every 10-15 thousand kilometres, keeping them on the same side of the car to avoid inverting the direction of rotation; avoid travelling with partially or completely deflated tyres as this can compromise safety and damage the tyres beyond repair. WARNING 245) Remember that the road holding qualities of your car also depend on correct tyre pressures. 246) If tyre pressure is too low, the tyre may overheat and be severely damaged as a result. 247) Do not switch tyres from the right­hand side of the car to the left­hand side, and vice versa. 248) Do not repaint alloy wheel rims at temperatures higher than 150°C. The mechanical features of the wheels could be compromised. CAR INACTIVITY If the car is to be left inactive for longer than a month, observe the following precautions: park the car in covered, dry and if possible well-ventilated premises and slightly open the windows; check that the parking brake is not engaged and put the transmission in position P; check the state of charge of the 12V battery every 30 days; clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax; clean and protect the shiny metal parts using special compounds available commercially; sprinkle talcum powder on the windscreen and rear window wiper rubber blades and lift them off the glass; cover the car with a fabric or perforated plastic sheet, paying particular care not to damage the painted surface by dragging any dust that may have accumulated on it. Do not use compact plastic sheets which do not allow humidity to evaporate from the surface of the car; disable the alarm system of the car (where provided); inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the standard specified pressure and check it at intervals; do not drain the cooling system; any time the car is left inactive for two weeks or more, operate the climate control system for at least 5 minutes, setting external air and with fan set to maximum speed. This operation will ensure appropriate lubrication for the system, thus minimising the possibility of damage to the compressor when the system is operated again; take the high-voltage battery to a charge level close to 100%. The amount of charge of the highvoltage battery may gradually decrease when the car is not used. Therefore, avoid long stays with a charge state close to zero. If possible, monitor the state of charge and prevent it from reaching excessively low levels. Follow these warnings even for longer stays of less than a month (a few weeks). 247 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 248 BODYWORK PROTECTION AGAINST ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS The main causes of corrosion are the following: atmospheric pollution salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or hot humid climates); seasonal environmental conditions. The abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust and sand, as well as mud and gravel raised by other cars is also not to be underestimated. On your car, Fiat has adopted the best manufacturing technologies to effectively protect the bodywork against corrosion. These include: painting products and systems which give the car particular resistance to corrosion and abrasion; use of galvanised (or pretreated) sheet metal, with high resistance to corrosion; spraying of underbody, motor compartment, wheel arch interiors and other parts with highly protective wax products; spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function in the more exposed points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc.; use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisture which could favour the formation of rust inside. BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY Your car is covered by warranty against perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or bodywork. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet. PRESERVING THE BODYWORK Paintwork 89) Paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose, but also protects the underlying sheet metal. You are advised to touch up abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent rust formation. Use only original paint products for touch-ups (see “Bodywork paint identification plate” in the “Technical Specifications” section). Normal care for paintwork consists of washing the car; how often depends on the conditions and environment where the car is used. For example, in highly polluted areas, or if the roads are spread with salt, it is advisable to wash the car more frequently. To correctly wash the car, proceed as follows: remove the aerial from the roof to prevent damage to it if the car is washed in an automatic system; if high pressure jets or cleaners are used to wash the car, keep a distance of at least 40 cm from the bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. It should be remembered that the build up of water can damage the car over a period of time; wash the bodywork using a low pressure jet of water; wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge; rinse well with water and dry with a jet of air or a chamois leather. Dry the less visible parts with special care, such as the door frames, bonnet and the headlight frames, where water may stagnate more easily. The car should not be taken to a closed area immediately, but left outside so that residual water can evaporate. Do not wash the car after it has been left in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this may alter the shine of the paintwork. Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the same way as the rest of the car. Where possible, do not park the car under trees; the resinous substances that many species release give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of triggering rusting processes. WARNING Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. 7) Automatic car washes - Tips 90) 91) Before entering a car wash Adopt the following procedure to ensure the handling of the vehicle inside the car wash: open the driver's door and leave it open; take the ignition device to the ENGINE position; press the brake pedal; take the one-speed transmission to N; release the electric parking brake; release the brake pedal; leave the ignition device in the ENGINE position, exit the car and close the driver's door. 249) Versions with matt paintwork These versions have exclusive matt paintwork which requires special care for its preservation. Some versions are fitted with exclusive decorations on the door mirror covers; do not use pressurised or high-temperature jets of water when washing them. 92) Versions with stickers or wrapping To correctly clean and wash the car, proceed as follows: avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes in washing stations. Then, wash the car, only by hand, using pHneutral detergents; dry it with a wet chamois leather. Abrasive products and/or polishes should not be used for cleaning the car. If high pressure jets or cleaners are used to wash the car, keep a distance of at least 40 cm from the bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. It should be remembered that a build up of water could cause damage, in the long term, to the car. Wet the bodywork with a lowpressure water jet. Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge. Rinse well with water and dry with a jet of air or a chamois leather. Dry the less visible parts with special care, such as the door frames, bonnet and the headlight frames, where water may stagnate more easily. The car should not be taken to a closed area immediately, but left outside so that residual water can evaporate. Do not wash the car after it has been parked in the sun. Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in the same way as the rest of the car. Where possible, do not park the car under trees; the resinous substances that many species release give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of triggering rusting processes. WARNING In case of water stains (rings) on the wrapping, remove it, washing again and drying it with a non-abrasive soft cloth. WARNINGS Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. Avoid (if at all possible) parking the car under trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as, when dried, it may only be possible to remove them with abrasive products and/or polishes, which is highly inadvisable as they could alter the paint, the stickers or the wrapping. Do not use pure windscreen washer fluid for cleaning the windscreen and the rear window: dilute it to at least 50% with water. 249 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 93) 94) Windows To clean glasses, use specific cleaning products. Use clean cloths to avoid scratching the glass or altering the transparency. WARNING Wipe the rear window inside gently with a cloth following the direction of the filaments to avoid damaging the heating device. Headlights Use a soft cloth soaked in water and detergent for washing cars. WARNING Never use aromatic substances (e.g. petrol) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses of the headlights. WARNING When cleaning the car with a pressure washer, keep the water jet at least 20 cm away from the headlights. CONTACT WITH WATER Washing the motor compartment 95) Washing the motor is not recommended. If it is absolutely 250 necessary, follow the instructions below: washing is only allowed at low pressure; washing must take place with the motor cold and the ignition device in the STOP position; take care not to direct the water jet directly onto the electronic control units, connectors and orange cables, including the areas adjacent to them (high-voltage circuit) and venting valves; Have this operation performed by a specialised workshop. After washing, check that the various protective components (e.g. rubber guards and caps) have not been removed or damaged. Underbody washing If underbody washing is necessary, do not insist with the jet directly on the connectors and venting valve. Washing with charging flap closed The electrical system is safe, even if the following situations occur: presence of water in the foot area; when the car is in water at a level that allows it to cross a ford; liquids entering the boot. 96) WARNING 249) In this condition, the car is no longer secured and could move without control due to the slopes of the ground. IMPORTANT 89) Abrasive products and/or polishes should not be used for cleaning the car. Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. Avoid parking the vehicle under trees (unless it is absolutely necessary). Remove any resinous plant matter immediately because, once it has dried, it may require the use of abrasive and/or polishing products to be removed, which are strongly discouraged as they could potentially alter the characteristics of the paintwork. Do not use pure windscreen washer fluid for cleaning the front windscreen and rear window; dilute it min. 50% with water. Only use pure screen washer fluid when strictly necessary due to outside temperature conditions. Do not use chemicals/acids to defrost windows/vehicle glass as they can damage the paint. 90) Never use high-pressure washing systems. Drops of water may penetrate in the case of high-pressure washing systems and sprayers positioned near the windows. Give preference to car washes that use fabric or soft brushes that do not damage the paint of the bodywork. Ensure that the rims and tyres are not damaged by the transport mechanisms. Depending on the width of the vehicle, fold the exterior mirrors to prevent damage. Remove the aerial from car roof. Deactivate the rain sensor (see the "Automatic wiping-Inhibition" paragraph in the "Windscreen washing" chapter, in the "Knowing your car" section) to prevent accidental activation of the windscreen wiper. In some cases, the Side Distance Warning system and parking sensors may be accidentally activated during washing. 91) Avoid car washes with drive rails higher than 10 cm (4 inches); otherwise, the vehicle bodywork may be damaged. 92) Avoid washing with rollers and/or brushes in washing stations. Wash the car only by hand using neutral pH detergents; dry it with a wet chamois leather. Abrasive products and/or polishes should not be used for cleaning the car. Bird droppings must be washed off immediately and thoroughly as the acid they contain is particularly aggressive. Avoid (if at all possible) parking the car under trees; remove vegetable resins immediately as, when dried, it may only be possible to remove them with abrasive products and/or polishes, which is highly inadvisable as they could alter the typical opacity of the paint. Do not use pure windscreen washer fluid for cleaning the front windscreen and rear window; dilute it min. 50% with water. Only use pure screen washer fluid when strictly necessary due to outside temperature conditions. Do not use chemicals/acids to defrost windows/vehicle glass as they can damage the paint. 93) It is not advisable to wash with pressure washer or, in case of use, it is necessary to maintain at least a minimum distance of 40 cm with water at room temperature. 94) Abrasive products and/or polishes should not be used for cleaning the car 95) Do not use a high pressure jet cleaner to clean the motor compartment. The appropriate precautions have been taken to protect all parts and connections, but the pressures generated by these devices are so high that complete protection against water seepages cannot be guaranteed. 96) If it is necessary to wash the car from the outside, take care not to insist directly with the water jet onto the charging flap. IMPORTANT 7) Detergents pollute the water. Only wash your vehicle in areas equipped to collect and treat waste water from this type of activity. INTERIOR Regularly check that water is not trapped under the mats (due to water dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.), as this could cause oxidation of the sheet metal. 250) 251) SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use a moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the seats with a sponge moistened with a solution of water and neutral detergent. PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS It is advisable to clean interior plastic parts with a moist cloth and a solution of water and non-abrasive mild soap. Use specific products for cleaning plastic, without solvents and specifically designed to prevent damage to the appearance and colour of the treated parts, to remove grease and tough stains. WARNING Never use alcohol, petrols and derivatives to clean the instrument panel lens. 251 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 252 LEATHER PARTS (where provided) Use only water and neutral soap to clean these parts. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based products. Before using a specific product for cleaning interiors, make sure that it does not contain alcohol and/or alcohol-based substances. WARNING 250) Never use flammable products, such as petrol ether or rectified petrol to clean the inside of the car. The electrostatic charges which are generated by rubbing during the cleaning operation may cause a fire. 251) Do not keep aerosol cans in the vehicle: they might explode. Aerosol cans must not be exposed to a temperature exceeding 50°C. When the vehicle is exposed to sunlight, the internal temperature can greatly exceed this value. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Everything you may find useful for understanding how your car is made and works is contained in this chapter and illustrated with data, tables and graphics. For the enthusiasts and the technician, but also just for those who want to know every detail of their car. IDENTIFICATION DATA ............... MOTOR .................................... BATTERY.................................. TRANSMISSION ........................ BRAKES ................................... SUSPENSION............................ STEERING ................................ WHEELS................................... DIMENSIONS ............................ WEIGHTS ................................. REFUELLING............................. FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ......... PERFORMANCE ........................ PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE CAR AT THE END OF ITS LIFE........................ 254 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 268 269 271 272 274 275 253 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 254 IDENTIFICATION DATA It is advisable to take note of the identification codes. The following identification codes are printed and shown on the plates: Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate. Chassis marking. Bodywork paint identification plate (where provided). Motor marking. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE (The label is shown divided into two parts for reading purposes) It is applied to the left front pillar fig. 250. B A C D E F G I L H M 250 F0S1327 It contains the following information fig. 251: 251 F0S1301 A Name of Manufacturer. B Vehicle type-approval number. C Car identification number. D Maximum authorised weight of car fully laden. E Maximum authorised weight of fully laden car plus trailer (field not used). F Maximum permitted weight on first axle (front axle). G Maximum permitted weight on second axle (rear axle). H Fiat colour code. I Motor type. It contains the following information fig. 254: L Type variant version. M Spare part number. BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION PLATE (where provided) Depending on the version, the plate may be applied to the external tailgate pillar (left side) and contains the following information fig. 252: A Paint manufacturer. B Colour name. C Fiat colour code. D Respray and touch up code. 252 F0S1335 Alternatively, depending on the version, the Fiat Colour Code may be integrated in the type-approval data summary plate (H field fig. 251). CHASSIS MARKING It is applied under the mat at the passenger side front seat fig. 253 and visible through a dedicated flap. 255 253 F0S1173 254 F0S1351 F0S1174 car type; chassis serial number. MOTOR MARKING It is shown on the plate (fig. 251) and is engraved on the motor body fig. 255. 255 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 256 MOTOR GENERAL INFORMATION High Range Motor code Low Range 46348460 Maximum power (CEE) (kW) 87 – Maximum power (CEE) (HP) 117 – corresponding revolutions per minute (rpm) 4200 – Maximum torque (CEE) (Nm) 220 Maximum torque (CEE) (kgm) 22.43 BATTERY High Range Type Lithium Ion (Li-ion) Cooling / Heating Rated voltage Battery operating temperature Low Range Fluid – 350 V -30 / 60°C (*) (*) The temperature of 60°C is to be understood as the temperature that the battery can reach, it is not to be understood as the operating temperature of the car. 257 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 258 TRANSMISSION Versions All versions Transmission Traction One-speed transmission Reduction ratio: 1:9.56 Front BRAKES Versions All versions Front service brakes Rear service brakes Parking brake Disc Drum, self-centring shoes with control cylinder for each wheel Electric WARNING Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. 259 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 260 SUSPENSION Versions Front Rear New 500 MacPherson independent wheels with mechanical crossmember, shock absorbers and coil springs; with anti-roll bar for versions with electric power steering Axle with torsion bridge; consisting of torsion beam with longitudinal arms and comfort bushings, shock absorbers and propeller springs STEERING Versions All versions Kerb-to-kerb turning circle (m) Type 9.3 Rack and pinion with electric power steering 261 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WHEELS RIMS AND WHEELS Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless radial carcass tyres. All approved tyres are listed in the registration document. S 2 Maximum speed index for snow tyres QM + S up to 160 km/h TM + S up to 190 km/h HM + S up to 210 km/h 1 H WARNING If there are any discrepancies between the Owner Handbook and the registration document, take the information from the latter. For safe driving, the car must be fitted with tyres of the same make and type on all wheels. WARNING Do not use air chambers with tubeless tyres. 254) 255) WHEEL GEOMETRY Front wheels toe-in measured between rims: 0.5 ± 1 mm. The values refer to the car in running order. 262 CORRECT READING OF THE TYRE 3 Load index (capacity) 70 = 335 kg 81 = 462 kg 71 = 345 kg 82 = 475 kg 72 = 355 kg 83 = 487 kg Example fig. 256: 175/65 R 14 82H 175 Nominal width (S, distance in mm between sides) 65 Height/width ratio (H/S), expressed as a percentage R Radial tyre 14 Rim diameter in inches (Ø) 82 Load rating (capacity) H Maximum speed rating 73 = 365 kg 84 = 500 kg 74 = 375 kg 85 = 515 kg 75 = 387 kg 86 = 530 kg 76 = 400 kg 87 = 545 kg 77 = 412 kg 88 = 560 kg 78 = 425 kg 89 = 580 kg Maximum speed index Q up to 160 km/h R up to 170 km/h S up to 180 km/h T up to 190 km/h U up to 200 km/h H up to 210 km/h V up to 240 km/h 79 = 437 kg 90 = 600 kg 80 = 450 kg 91 = 615 kg Ø 256 F0S1280 CORRECT READING OF THE RIM CODE Example fig. 256: 5,00 B x 14 H2 5.00 width of the rim in inches (1). B drop centre outline (side projection where the tyre bead rests) (2). 14 fitting diameter, expressed in inches (corresponds to the diameter of the tyre that should be fitted) 3 = Ø. H2shape and number of "humps" (circumference measurement which keeps the bead of tubeless tyres in position on the rim). 263 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 264 RIMS AND WHEELS PROVIDED (according to versions/trim levels) Versions All (**) Alloy wheel rim (***) Chains cannot be fitted Rims Tyres Snow tyres 6Jx15H2-ET40 185/65 R15 88T 185/65 R15 88T (M+S) 6Jx16H2-ET41(**) 195/55 R16 91V 195/55 R16 91H (M+S) 6.5Jx17H2-ET41(**) 205/45 R17 88V (***) 205/45 R17 88H (M+S) COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar) 252) 253) When the tyres are warm, the inflation pressure should be + 0.3 bar in relation to the recommended figure. With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the pressure value prescribed for other standard tyres. However, recheck the correct value when the tyre is cold. Tyres Medium load Full load Front Rear Front Rear 185/65 R15 88T 2.4 2.3 2.4 2.5 195/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.3 2.4 2.5 205/45 R17 88V 2.4 2.3 2.4 2.5 WARNING 252) Remember that the road holding qualities of your car also depend on correct tyre pressures. 253) If tyre pressure is too low, it may overheat and be severely damaged as a result. 265 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS RIM PROTECTOR TYRES 258) For wheel hub caps fitting on rims with Rim Protector tyres, see the warning below. 257 F0S0351 SNOW TYRES 259) Use snow tyres of the same size as the standard tyres provided with the car. All four tyres should be the same (brand and track) to ensure greater safety when driving and braking as well as a good manoeuvrability. Remember that you should not change the rotation direction of the tyres. The Fiat Dealership will be happy to provide advice concerning the most suitable type of tyre for the customer's requirements. The winter features of these tyres are reduced considerably when the tread 266 depth is below 4 mm. Replace them in this case. Due to the specific characteristics of snow tyres, in normal weather conditions or on long motorway journeys, the performance of these tyres is lower than that of standard tyres. Their usage should therefore be restricted in accordance with their type approval. WARNING When using snow tyres with a maximum speed index below the one that can be reached by the car (increased by 5%), place a notice in the passenger compartment, plainly in view, which states the maximum speed allowed by the snow tyres (as per EC Directive). All four tyres should be the same (brand and track) to ensure greater safety when driving and braking as well as a good manoeuvrability. Remember that you should not change the rotation direction of the tyres. SNOW CHAINS 97) 98) 99) The use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations of each country. In certain countries, tyres marked with code M+S (Mud and Snow) are considered as winter equipment; therefore their use is equivalent to that of the snow chains. Snow chains can be fitted to the tyres of the front wheels (drive wheels) only. Check the tension of the snow chains after the first few feet/metres have been driven. Using snow chains with tyres with non-original dimensions may damage the car. Using different size or type (M+S, snow, etc.) tyres between front and rear axle may adversely affect car driveability, with the risk of losing control of the car and resulting accidents. WARNING 254) Do not switch tyres from the right­hand side of the car to the left­hand side, and vice versa. 255) Never submit alloy rims to repainting treatments requiring the use of temperatures exceeding 150°C. The mechanical properties of the wheels could be impaired. 256) Remember that the road holding qualities of your car also depend on correct tyre pressures. 257) If tyre pressure is too low, it may overheat and be severely damaged as a result. 258) Do NOT fit wheel cups when using integral cups fixed (with springs) to the steel rim and tyres other than factoryfitted tyres provided with Rim Protector (fig. 257). Use of unsuitable tyres and wheel caps may cause sudden decrease of tyre pressure. 259) The top speed for snow tyres marked “Q” is 160 km/h, while it is 190 km/h for “T” tyres and 210 km/h for "H" tyres. Nevertheless, you must always comply with the highway code speed limits. IMPORTANT 97) Keep the vehicle's speed down when snow chains are fitted; never exceed 50 km/h. 98) With snow chains, use the accelerator with extreme care to prevent, or to limit as much as possible, slipping of the drive wheels that could cause chain breakage, resulting in damage to the vehicle body or mechanical components. 99) Avoid potholes, steps and pavements and avoid driving long distances on roads not covered with snow to avoid damaging the car and the road surface. 267 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIMENSIONS Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the car equipped with its original tyres. Height is measured with car unladen. BOOT CAPACITY: capacity (VDA standards): 185 litres. I B C D F A G 258 268 F0S1347 Versions A B C D E F G I All 3631 732 2322 577 1529 1470 1683 1460 WEIGHTS Versions High Range Low Range Unladen weight (with all fluids and without optional equipment) (kg): 1290 – Payload including the driver (kg) (*) 400 – - front axle: 920 – – rear axle: 840 – - total: 1690 – - braked trailer: (***) (***) – non-braked trailer: (***) (***) Maximum load on the ball (braked trailer) (kg): (***) (***) Maximum permitted load (kg) (**) Towable loads (kg) (**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum permitted loads. (***) Loads not to be exceeded. The user should carry goods in the boot and/on load carrying platform within the maximum permitted loads. (****) IMPORTANT A trailer cannot be towed so there are no provisions for fitting a tow hook. 269 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Versions Cabrio 3+1 Unladen weight (with all fluids and without optional equipment) (kg): 1330 1320 Payload including the driver (kg) (*) 400 400 - front axle: 920 920 – rear axle: 840 840 - total: 1730 1720 - braked trailer: (***) (***) – non-braked trailer: (***) (***) Maximum load on the ball (braked trailer) (kg): (***) (***) Maximum permitted load (kg) (**) Towable loads (kg) (*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, etc.) the unladen car weight increases, thus reducing the specified payload in relation to the maximum permitted loads. (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user should carry goods in the boot and/on load carrying platform within the maximum permitted loads. (***) IMPORTANT A trailer cannot be towed so there are no provisions for fitting a tow hook. 270 REFUELLING Quantity Original fluids and lubricants EDM (Electronic Drive Module) (litres): 0.67 PETRONAS IONA INTEGRA PLUS FCA Cooling system (litres): 6.5 Mixture of demineralized water and 50% PARAFLUUP (*) Hydraulic brake circuit (kg): 0.8 TUTELA TOP EVO Windscreen and rear window washer fluid reservoir (litres): 1.5 Mixture of water and PETRONAS DURANCE SC35 (*) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water. 271 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS If lubricants conforming to the required specifications are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the concerned mechanical components is not guaranteed. 100) PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Use Features Original fluids and lubricants Applications Molybdenum disulphide grease, for use at high temperatures. N.L.G.I. consistency 1-2. 9.55580-GRAS II TUTELA ALL STAR Contractual Technical Reference N° F702.G07 Wheel side constant velocity joints Low friction coefficient grease for constant velocity joints. N.L.G.I. consistency 0-1. 9.55580-GRAS II TUTELA STAR 700 Contractual Technical Reference N° F701.C07 Differential side constant velocity joints 9.55550-MZ14 PETRONAS IONA INTEGRA PLUS FCA Contractual Technical Reference N°F006.A20 Transmission Lubricant (EDM System - Electronic Drive Module) Protective for cooling system Protective agent with antifreeze action with organic formulation. CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 Specifications. 9.55523 or MS.90032 PARAFLUUP Contractual Technical Reference N° F101.M01 Cooling circuits proportions of use: 50% demineralised water 50% PARAFLUUP (*) Brake fluid Synthetic fluid for brake systems. Exceeds specifications: FMVSS n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 Class 6, SAE J1704. 9.55597 or MS.90039 TUTELA TOP EVO Contractual Technical Reference N° F002.L18 Hydraulic brakes Lubricants and greases for drive transmission SAE 75W-70, API GL-4 272 Specification Use Windscreen/rear window washer fluid Features Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants CUNA NC 956-II. Specification Original fluids and lubricants 9.55522 or MS.90043 PETRONAS DURANCE SC35 Contractual Technical Reference N° F001.D16 Applications To be used diluted or undiluted in windscreen washer/wiper systems (*) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water. IMPORTANT Do not top up or mix with other fluids which have different specifications from those described. IMPORTANT 100) The use of products with different specifications than those indicated below could cause damage to the engine not covered by the warranty. 273 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 274 PERFORMANCE Max. speed in km/h that can be reached after initial car use. Versions Maximum speed (km/h) High Range 150 Low Range – PRESCRIPTIONS FOR HANDLING THE CAR AT THE END OF ITS LIFE FCA has been committed for many years to safeguarding the environment through the constant improvement of its production processes and manufacturing products that are increasingly "eco-compatible". To grant customers the best possible service in terms of respecting environmental laws and in response to European Directive 2000/53/EC governing vehicles at the end of their life, FCA is offering its customers the chance to hand over their vehicle at the end of its life without incurring any additional costs. The European Directive sets out that when the vehicle is handed over, the last keeper or owner should not incur any expenses as a result of it having a zero or negative market value. To hand your vehicle over at the end of its life without extra cost, contact one of our dealerships if you are purchasing another vehicle or an FCA-authorized collection and scrapping centre. These centres have been carefully chosen to offer high quality service for the collection, treatment and recycling of vehicles at their end of life, respecting the surrounding environment. Similarly, to meet its obligations under European Directive 2006/66/EC on batteries, FCA requires you to comply with the national regulations on handling both low-voltage and high-voltage lithium ion batteries (12V and 48V) at all times. This includes consigning vehicles complete with their batteries to one of the collection and demolition centres authorized by FCA to handle such batteries, and not disposing of them improperly, which could lead to personal injuries and/or harm to the environment. You can find further information on these collection and scrapping centres either from an FCA dealership or by calling the number in the Warranty Booklet or by consulting the websites of the various FCA brands. 275 MULTIMEDIA 276 MULTIMEDIA This chapter describes the main features of the FIAT Link & Drive and Uconnect™ infotainment systems. FIAT LINK & DRIVE ..................... Uconnect™ ............................... CONNECTED SERVICES UCONNECT SERVICES .............. OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS ...... 277 283 303 306 FIAT LINK & DRIVE The FIAT Link & Drive system is an incar system designed to play supported music files either by interacting with your smartphone, after downloading the FIAT Link & Drive app, or via the USB port under the climate control system controls (wav, mp3, aac, wma). The FIAT Link & Drive system is activated from the outside when the doors are unlocked and deactivated when the driver's door is opened with the ignition device in the OFF position. To make the best use of the system, users must download the FIAT Link & Drive app from Apple App Store or Google Play Store. The app makes it easier to use the telephone and minimises distraction. The functions within the app can be used to manage phone calls, play audio files and web radio stations, navigate and manage audio settings. To use the app, pair your smartphone or tablet with the FIAT Link & Drive system via Bluetooth ®. To pair the devices using the Bluetooth ® function, proceed as follows: 1. activate the Bluetooth ® function on the smartphone; 2. activate the pairing procedure on the instrument panel by selecting the "Pair Phone" option in the menu; 3. select the FIAT Link & Drive system ("Uconnect [Serial Number]") from the list of available devices displayed on your smartphone; Check your smartphone for permission requests and data downloads. Smartphones with Android 6 and iOS 11 or higher are compatible with FIAT Link & Drive. MULTIMEDIA DEVICES: SUPPORTED FILES AND FORMATS For the USB source (USB flash drive or Apple device connected via USB) the system can play files with the following extensions and formats: .MP3 (32-320Kbps); .WAV (8/16 bit, 8-48 kHz); .WMA (5–320Kbps) mono and stereo; .AAC (8–96KHz) mono and stereo. For all sources, the system can also play the following Playlist formats: .M3S .M3U .WPL WARNING It is recommended to load only freely accessible music files, with supported extensions. If the external audio device has other formats (e.g. .exe, .cab, .inf, etc.) problems might arise during playing of tracks. 101) EXTERNAL AUDIO SOURCES Other electronic devices can be used on the car. Some of them may cause electromagnetic interference however. Disconnect these devices if the system performance worsens. USB source NOTE The system supports only FAT16, FAT32 and exFAT formatted USB devices. The system does not support devices with a capacity higher than 256 GB. The system does not support USB hubs connected to the USB port of the car. Connect your multimedia device directly to the USB port, using the specific connection cable for the device if necessary. Smartphone source Connecting to FIAT Link & Drive via Bluetooth ® will allow you to listen to music from your smartphone, make telephone calls and, by inserting your telephone into the dedicated mount on the dashboard, use navigation programs in a optimal manner. 277 MULTIMEDIA The app allows you to browse information related to the car: when the telephone is connected to FIAT Link & Drive via Bluetooth ®, you can see the energy flows while driving, listen to music and web radio, manage telephone calls and use the navigation apps available on your smartphone; when the telephone is not connected to FIAT Link & Drive, you can use the app to see the data saved when the car was switched off: last location, battery charge level and voltage, charging schedule of the high-voltage battery, trip statistics and car usage data, the nearest Fiat Dealerships and a dictionary of the on-board warning lights. In addition, you can use the steering wheel controls to manage telephone calls, fast forward tracks being played by FIAT Link & Drive, select the audio source, and call up the smartphone voice assistant (Google Assistant, Siri, etc.). There is a mount (A) fig. 260 on the dashboard for your smartphone; always use it in order to interact with your smartphone safely. 102) The USB port located near the smartphone stand is preferable for charging the smartphone stand and does not allow media files to be read. FIAT Link & Drive controls The volume up/down controls (A) fig. 259 and / are located on the central tunnel. A 260 F0S1210 When the motor is off, the FIAT Link & Drive system remains on for up to 20 minutes or until the driver's side door is opened. 259 278 F0S1197 You can switch the system back on again by pressing the / button located on the central tunnel. IMPORTANT 101) Some multimedia players may not be compatible with the FIAT Link & Drive system. Only use devices (e.g. USB flash drives) from safe sources on the car. Devices from unknown sources could contain software infected by viruses which, if installed on the car, could increase the vulnerability of the car's electric/electronic systems to hacking. 102) Telephone voice commands: not all mobile phones are compatible with this function. You can obtain further information from your mobile phone service provider or the user guide for your mobile phone. FCA provides the voice interface functions, but shall not be held liable for the content. STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier. 261 F0S1211 279 MULTIMEDIA Steering wheel controls summary table Button Interaction Acceptance of incoming call Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold Long press (greater than 2 seconds): Activates a voice assistant session on the phone paired over Bluetooth® to impart voice commands or ends the session if one is in progress. Short press (less than 2 seconds): Make another request in the current voice session without starting a new one. Rejection of incoming call Ending of call in progress 280 CONTROLS BEHIND THE STEERING WHEEL B A 262 F0S1350 281 MULTIMEDIA Buttons Interaction Button A (steering wheel left side) Upper button Central button Lower button Brief button press: select the next song or track. Long button press: fast forward the track. Each press selects one of the USB and Bluetooth® sources. Only the available sources will be selected. Brief button press: select the previous song or track. Long button press: fast rewind the track. Button B (steering wheel right side) 282 Upper button Increasing volume Brief button press: single volume increase Long button press: fast volume increase Central button Activation/deactivation of Mute function Lower button Decreasing volume Brief button press: single volume decrease Long button press: fast volume decrease Uconnect™ Uconnect™ 10.25” (where provided) B A 263 C D E F D F0S2048 283 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect™ 7” (where provided) A 264 284 B F E B F0S1349 GRAPHIC BUTTONS ON DISPLAY (A) Graphic button Home Media Comfort (Uconnect™ 10.25" version) Comfort (Uconnect™ 7" version) Phone Vehicle Nav (Uconnect™ 10.25" version only) App Functions Mode Show the main screen Press graphic button Access Media mode to select available sources, folder tracks and interaction with audio settings Press graphic button Climate control system settings (air flow, set indoor temperature) and heated seat (where provided) Press graphic button Access to the Phone mode Press graphic button Access to additional car settings and functions Press graphic button Start Navigation system Press graphic button Access the list of available Apps Press graphic button You can customise the order of the buttons by holding down the icon to move and dragging it to the desired position. NOTE Customisation is only active when the car is stationary. If an attempt is made to customise with the car in motion or to resume driving without having completed the operation, a warning message will appear on the display and the operation will be ended. 285 MULTIMEDIA 286 STATUS BAR Area B Comfort (where provided) C App D Reconfigurable quick button bar E Timetable / App customisation F Message area Functions Mode Climate control system display and settings Press graphic button Access the list of available Apps Press graphic button Quick access to functions: Profiles, Notifications, External temperature, Voice recognition Press graphic button Display the current time / access to App list for customising the reconfigurable bar Press graphic button Display notifications, audio track playing, tuned radio station, call time, volume and scrolling messages – CONTROLS ON THE STEERING WHEEL The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier. 265 F0S1211 Steering wheel controls summary table Button Interaction Acceptance of incoming call Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold Display on the instrument panel of the list of the last 10 calls and favourite phone numbers (only with call browsing enabled) 287 MULTIMEDIA Button Interaction for Uconnect™ 7" Interaction Apple CarPlay and Android Auto for Uconnect™ 10.25" Activation of voice recognition Interruption of the voice message in order to give a new voice command Interruption of voice recognition Interaction Apple CarPlay and Android Auto Rejection of incoming call Ending of call in progress 288 CONTROLS BEHIND THE STEERING WHEEL B A 266 F0S1350 289 MULTIMEDIA Buttons Interaction Button A (steering wheel left side) Upper button Central button Lower button Brief button press: search for next web radio station or select next track. Long button press: fast forward the track. With each press advances between AM, FM, DAB, USB and Bluetooth ® sources. Only the available sources will be selected. Brief button press: search for next web radio station or select next track. Long button press: fast rewind the track. Button B (steering wheel right side) 290 Upper button Increasing volume Brief button press: single volume increase Long button press: fast volume increase Central button Mute on/off (mutes the playback of audio tracks, radio stations, streaming from App and the ringing of incoming calls). Lower button Decreasing volume Brief button press: single volume decrease Long button press: fast volume decrease CONTROLS ON CENTRAL CONSOLE 267 F0S1245 (A) (long press) Uconnect™ on/off button (A) (short press) Mute on/off (mutes the playback of audio tracks, radio stations, streaming from App and the ringing of incoming calls). (B) Volume adjustment knob TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTION The system uses the touchscreen function; to interact with the different functions, press the graphic buttons displayed. To confirm the selection, press the graphic button "OK" or tick the required selection. Confirmation of some functions or settings is accompanied by a dedicated chime. To go back to the previous screen, press the "X" (Delete) graphic button or, depending on the active screen . To go back to the home screen or home position press the HOME graphic button. The touchscreen function can be used to access and view the available lists of music tracks, phone numbers, settings, etc. Move your finger on the screen to scroll lists and selections. Hold your finger down and move up to display the list items at the bottom; move down to display the list items at the top. Hold your finger down on the screen and move your finger rightwards, to see the lists to the left; move your finger leftwards, to see the lists to the right of the screen. The same operation can be performed to move between pages. Press your finger on the chosen field or button to select the field or perform the function associated with the button. HOT BUTTONS Up to 4 hot buttons (D) fig. 263 can be set on the status bar. Press the button below the time ((E) fig. 263) to open the drop-down menu with the list of available apps. Hold the desired app pressed and drag it to the app to be replaced on the status bar. NOTE Customisation is only active when the car is stationary. If an attempt is made to customise with the car in motion or to resume driving without having completed the operation, a warning message will appear on the display and the operation will be ended. MEDIA MODE Press the "Media" graphic button to listen and manage your music, view the available lists and select your preferred audio settings. WARNING Applications used on portable devices may be not compatible with the Uconnect™ system. After Media mode is selected, the following information is shown on the display. Upper part: Selection of the different pages of the "Sources", "Playback", "Browse", "Audio settings" function. Left part: Display of the user's three favourite sources. To choose the source, select "Sources" and then choose the source to display. The source being played is shown in red. Middle part: Display of information about the track being played and playback control buttons: 291 MULTIMEDIA “Bluetooth”: for a Bluetooth® audio source, opens the list of devices; "Browse" for USB/Bluetooth ® source, allows you to search for content on your device; "Tracks" for USB/Bluetooth ® source, allows you to select a track from the playlist; / : previous/next track selection or previous/next station; : random playback of the tracks contained in the folder; : when the last track is finished, playback automatically resumes from the first track in the playlist; : pause track being played; "Tuning": access the radio station selection page. Lower part: Quick access to the favourite radio stations. Track selection The “Tracks” function allows you to open a window with the list of tracks being played. and can be The graphic buttons used to browse the list of artists, music genres and albums on the connected device via USB or Bluetooth ®, according to the information recorded on the tracks themselves. Within each list, the "ABC" graphic button allows the user to skip to the desired letter in the list. 292 NOTE This button might be disabled for some Apple® devices. NOTE The DAB frequency can be used in countries where digital transmission technology is available. The device will tuned to any frequency if the DAB button is pressed in a country where the service is not provided. COMFORT MODE On the screen you can select: the airflow distribution settings: windscreen, face, face plus feet, feet plus windscreen; the inside temperature settings; fast windscreen heating ( Max) the defrosting of the rear window ( ); the activation of the climate control system (A/C); the activation of the climate control system with maximum cooling (Max A/C); the recirculation function; the AUTO function; the activation/deactivation of the heated seat function (where provided). BLUETOOTH® MODE This mode is activated by pairing a Bluetooth® device containing music tracks with the Uconnect™ system. PAIRING A BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE The pairing of a Bluetooth® device (e.g. a smartphone) is done via the "Device Manager" function on the "Phone" page. Proceed as follows to pair a device: activate the Bluetooth® function on the device; access the "Device Manager" function; press the "Add Device" graphic button; a pop-up window shows the temporary PIN to be entered on the device; search for Uconnect™ on the Bluetooth® audio device; when requested by the audio device, enter the PIN code shown on the system display or confirm on the device the PIN displayed; if the pairing procedure is completed successfully, a screen is displayed. Answer “Yes” to the question to pair the Bluetooth® audio device as favourite (the device will have priority over all other devices to be paired subsequently). If "No" is selected, the priority is determined according to the order of connection. The last device connected will have the highest priority. If no device has been registered, you can access the "Device Manager" directly from the "Phone" function. NOTE Up to 20 device can be paired. In case of an attempt to pair a twentyfirst device a pop-up window will notify that this is impossible. Remove a paired device to allow the pairing of a new one. NOTE The Radio may change the track being played by modifying the name of the device in the Bluetooth® settings of the telephone (where provided), if the device is by means of USB after the Bluetooth® connection. After updating the phone software, for proper operation, it is recommended to remove the phone from the list of devices linked to the radio, delete the previous system pairing also from the list of Bluetooth® devices on the phone and make a new pairing. WARNING If the Bluetooth® connection between mobile phone and system is lost, consult the mobile phone handbook. USB SOURCE There are two USB ports. The first one is located on the dashboard for data transfer to the Uconnect™ system and for charging external devices; the second one is inside the central console for charging external devices only. When a USB device is plug into the port on the dashboard with the radio on, it starts to play the tracks on the device if the "AutoPlay" is set to "ON" in the "Audio" menu. If the "AutoPlay" function is set to OFF and a smartphone is connected, only charging the device will be active. PHONE MODE Press the “Phone” graphic button on the display to activate the Phone mode. NOTE To consult the list of mobile phones and supported functions, visit the www.driveuconnect.eu website Select the desired page on the display using the bar at the top to: dial the phone number using the graphic dial pad on the display; NOTE The keypad is only active when the car is stationary. If an attempt is made to use the keypad with the car in motion or if driving is resumed without having completed engagement, a warning message will appear on the display and the operation will be ended. display and call contacts from the registers of previous calls; display and call the contacts in the phonebook of the mobile phone; view received text messages; view the connected devices. The mobile phone audio is transmitted through the car’s sound system; the system automatically mutes the Uconnect™ system audio when the Phone function is used. Pairing a mobile phone WARNING Carry out this operation only with car stationary and in safety conditions; this function is deactivated when the car is moving. To pair a mobile phone, see the procedure in the "Pairing a Bluetooth® audio device" paragraph in this chapter. "Double telephone" feature The Uconnect™ system allows simultaneous Bluetooth® connection to two telephones. Only one of the two connected devices can play multimedia content via Bluetooth®. WARNING The “double telephone” feature is not available while using the 293 MULTIMEDIA telephone in CarPlay or Android Auto mode. Making a phone call The operations described below can only be accessed if supported by the mobile phone in use. For all functions available, refer to the mobile phone owner's handbook. You can make a call by selecting one of the following items: "Keyboard"/"Keypad" (according to the version) "Recent" (according to the version) "Favourites" "Contacts" Favourites You can add a number or a contact (if already in Contacts) to the favourite list during a call by pressing one of the 5 "Empty" graphic buttons on the upper part of the display. The favourites can also be managed by using the Phone Book options. TEXT MESSAGES (for Uconnect™ 10.25") You can access the text message list received by the cell by selecting the "Messages" item (the list shows a maximum of 60 received messages). To use this function, the mobile phone must support the text exchange function through Bluetooth®. 294 If this operation is not supported by the phone, the corresponding "Text message" graphic button is deactivated (greyed out). When a text message is received, the display will show a screen where the options "Read", "Answer" “Forward", "Call" or "Incoming" can be selected. Close the window by pressing the "X" button on the top right. NOTE On some mobile phones, to make the text voice reading function available, the text notification option on the phone must be enabled; this option is usually available on the phone, in the Bluetooth® connections menu for a device registered as Uconnect™. After enabling this function on the mobile phone, it must be disconnected and reconnected with the Uconnect™ system in order to make it effective. WARNING Some mobile phones may not take the text message delivery confirmation settings into account when interfacing with Uconnect™.If a text message is sent via the Uconnect™ system, the driver could face an additional cost, without any warning, due to the text message delivery confirmation request sent by the phone. For any problems related to the above, contact your telephone service provider. "Do Not Disturb" function If supported by the connected phone, by pressing the "Do Not Disturb" graphic button the user will not receive notifications of incoming calls or text messages. The user can reply with a default or customized message by means of the settings. Text message options (for Uconnect™ 10.25") According to the versions, default text messages may be stored in the system memory and can be sent to answer a received message or as a new message. The following list of available messages is given by way of example: Yes No Okay I can't talk right now Call me Thanks I'm lost I'm on the road I am stuck in traffic Are you there? Where are you? I can't talk right now I will be 5 (or 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 45, 60) (*) minutes late (*) Only use the numbers listed, otherwise the system will not take the message. When receiving a text message, the systems also allows the same message to be forwarded. NOTE For details on how to send a text message using the voice commands, refer to the dedicated paragraph. Uconnect™ system. Any discrepancy between the date and time on the display and the actual date and time may be due to a malfunction in Apple CarPlay/Android Auto. Apple CarPlay and Android Auto (where provided) The Apple CarPlay and Android Auto applications allow you to use your smartphone in the car safely and intuitively. To enable them, connect a compatible smartphone to the USB port of the car or in Wireless mode and the contents of the phone will be automatically shown on the Uconnect™ system display. To check the compatibility of your smartphone, refer to the indications on the websites: https://www.android.com/intl/it_it/auto/ e http://www.apple.com/it/ios/carplay/. If the smartphone is connected correctly to the car via the USB port or in Wireless mode, the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto icon will be displayed in place of the graphic button in the main menu. NOTE The date and time shown on the Uconnect™ system display must match the actual date and time, even after disconnecting the battery. Adjust it from the "Settings" menu of the Apple CarPlay App Setup Apple CarPlay is compatible with the iPhone 5 or more recent models, with the iOS 7.1 operating system or later versions. Before using Apple CarPlay, enable Siri from "Settings" > "General" > "Siri" on the smartphone. Android Auto APP Setup Before use, download the Android Auto application to your smartphone from Google Play Store. The application is compatible with Android 5.0 (Lollipop) and later versions. Starting from Android version 10 and higher, the Android Auto app is integrated into the operating system of the smartphone and no downloading is required. On the first connection, you will have to perform the setup procedure that appears on the smartphone. You can only perform this procedure with the car stationary. Once connected to the USB port, the Android Auto application establishes a parallel Bluetooth® connection. Wireless mode You can use Apple CarPlay and Android Auto in Wireless mode, without the need to connect your smartphone to the USB port. To configure this mode, follow the procedure for pairing a Bluetooth® device. If successfully completed and the connected device supports Wireless mode, confirm that it starts on the message shown on your smartphone and Uconnect™ display. On subsequent connections, Wireless mode is available automatically. If a Bluetooth® pairing is cancelled, the pairing procedure must be repeated on the "Device Manager" menu. Interaction After the setup procedure, the application will run automatically on the Uconnect™ system when your smartphone is connected to the USB port in the car. Apple CarPlay: To interact with Apple CarPlay press the steering wheel button (long press) or the "Home" graphic button on the display in Apple CarPlay. Android Auto: To interact with Android Auto press the steering wheel button (long press of the button) or the "Microphone" graphic button 295 MULTIMEDIA on the display in Android Auto (where provided). Navigation (only for Uconnect™ 10.25") If the "Nav" mode of the system is already active, or when a device is connected to the car with a navigation session in progress, the system navigation mode is interrupted to continue the navigation session of the device. The selection can be changed at any time by accessing the chosen navigation system and setting a new destination. Voice Commands (only for Uconnect™ 7") NOTE Voice entry of addresses is only supported in the country in which you are located and provided that the system language matches the local language. For example, if the car is located in Italy, it will be possible to enter Italian addresses only if the system language is set to "Italian". To use the voice commands, press the button on the steering “Voice” wheel controls and say the function you want to activate aloud. Alternatively, the function can be activated by saying "Hey FIAT" or "Hey Uconnect" (if the user has previously enabled the function). 296 Exiting the Android Auto and Apple CarPlay apps To end the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto session, physically disconnect the smartphone from the USB port of the car or using the "Device Manager" menu. VOICE COMMANDS (only for Uconnect™ 10.25") NOTE Voice commands are not available for languages not supported by the system. To use voice commands, press the "Voice" button on the steering on the wheel controls or the button display and say out loud the function you want to activate. Alternatively, the function can be activated by saying "Hey FIAT" or "Hey Uconnect" (if the user has previously enabled the function). The list of available voice commands is shown on the display divided by categories. Suggestion A list of the most used voice commands is shown. Phone Call Call Write message Call back Show recent calls Show outgoing calls Show missed calls Show received calls Text Send a message to mobile / work Media I want to listen to music Play by Let me hear some Show my playlists Play album… Play artist… Play genre… Play playlist… Radio I want to listen to music Play by Let me hear some Show my playlists I want to listen to a radio Play radio Play channel Tune to / Tune to Tune to DAB channel Navigation See the "Navigation" paragraph below. Climate Set the temperature to I'm cold Make it warmer Turn down the fan Turn on the A/C NAVIGATION (only for Uconnect™ 10.25") Press the "Nav" graphic button to show the navigation map on the display. You can use map view in the same way as you might look at a traditional paper map. You can move around the map using gestures, and zoom using the zoom buttons. You can find your destination by selecting it on the map, choosing a saved destination (for example "Home" or "Work") or searching for an address using the "Search" button in the main menu. After selecting the destination, a route is planned and shown on the "Map view" screen. The route bar appears on the right hand side of the display and provides an additional indication of events along the route, e.g. accidents and speed cameras. The arrival time and remaining distance are also available. You can choose to view the route via a 3D image in the "Guidance view". NOTE The navigation system volume can only be adjusted during navigation when the system provides voice indications. NOTE In some countries, the use of the keyboard is only permitted when the car is stationary. If an attempt is made to enter text (e.g. an address) with the car in motion or if driving is resumed without having completed engagement, a warning message will appear on the display and the operation will be ended. We recommend the use of voice commands while driving. Navigation main menu In "Map view" or "Guidance view", tap to open the the "Main menu" button menu. The following buttons are available in the main menu: "Search”: select this graphic button to search for an address, a place or a point of interest, then plan a route to the location. "Recent": Select this button to open the list of recent destinations. Select a recent destination to plan a route to that destination. "Favourites": select this button to show the saved favourite places. "Trips": select this button to show saved trips. "Maps": select this button to display a list of installed maps. The maps are updated automatically. "Settings": select this button to open the Settings Menu. In the "Settings" menu, you can change the items shown on the navigation display. System buttons The following buttons are available on the different screens of the navigation system: "Add Home": select this button to set the location of your home. "Add Work": select this button to set the work position. 297 MULTIMEDIA After selecting a destination, clicking on a point on the map or using the search function, select this button. The navigation system will find the best route and, if available, two alternative routes. You can select an alternative to avoid tolls or heavy traffic, for example. Use this button to decide whether to display the results on the map or in a list. Use this button to access the "Route Options" menu. With an active route, you can change the route from this screen. Select this button to return to the previous screen. Select this button to return to the "Map view" screen. Select this button to switch between the "3D direction up", "2D direction up" and "2D north up". Select this button to choose between audio instructions, warning only or no sound. 298 Map update To ensure optimal performance, the navigation system must be updated periodically. For this, the Mopar Map Care service offers a new map update every three months. The updates can be downloaded from the maps.mopar.eu website and installed directly on the Uconnect™ system. All updates are free of charge for 3 years from the start of the warranty on the car. The navigation system can also be updated at the Fiat Dealership. NOTE The dealer may charge for updating the navigation system. Go to

Go to centre Drive to

// Navigate home Go via home Clear route Recent Destinations Stop at a recent destination 2D view 3D view Voice Commands NOTE Voice entry of addresses is only supported in the country in which you are located and provided that the system language matches the local language. For example, if the car is located in Italy, it will be possible to enter Italian addresses only if the system language is set to "Italian". The following voice commands can be given after pressing the button on the steering wheel : Find (Point of Interest) near/along the route Let's go / VEHICLE MODE Pressing the "Vehicle" graphic button to access the pages: "Electric Vehicle", "Controls" and "System Settings". Volume adjustment The volume of the navigation system can only be adjusted when the navigation system provides voice commands. Electric vehicle The following submenus are available to the user on the "Electric vehicle" page: Power flows, History, Programming and Charge Status. Power Flow shows in a chart the power flow used by the battery, the electric motor and the climate control system. History shows the power flows used up to 15 minutes before or in the previous 7 days. Programming can be used to program the charging of the high voltage battery or climate control system when the car is parked. The page shows a summary of the programmed charging and climate control system operations with respective times and days of activation. Select "New programming" to define a new programmed charging or climate control system operation. When programming a battery charging operation, select "Operating frequency" to set the day and time for the start and end of charging. When programming the climate control system, a pop-up with the ignition device in the OFF position will ask the user whether to recharge the high-voltage battery or not despite the programmed function. Set the desired day and time to start the climate control system from this page. The Charging status shows the current battery level and gives an estimate of the maximum and minimum charging time (depending on the power supplied by the charging station). For home charging, you can also set five different power consumption levels according to your needs. To adjust the power level, select one of the five values from "1" (lowest current) to "5" (maximum current) on this page. The estimated time displayed on the screen will be updated accordingly. Checks The "Controls" tab contains for example: "screen settings OFF", "internal electrochromic mirror" (where provided), "rear camera" (where provided). System setup The settings are available with the ignition device in OFF or START position. You can access the settings in two ways by pressing the "Settings" button on the status bar, or from the main page of the function you are viewing, at the bottom right. NOTE The menu items displayed vary according to the versions. The menu is indicative and includes the following items (where provided): My Profile Language Display Units Safety and Driving Assistance Clock and Date Phone/Bluetooth ® Camera Lights Brakes Doors & Locks Key off options Radio Setup Reset System information Notifications Geolocation Software update System information APP Pressing the graphic button "App" will display the "Favourites", "Recent" (according to the version), "Categories" and "All" submenus. Favourites The "Favourites" submenu contains (for versions/markets, where provided) the "Electrical functions" and "Performance" pages. The "Favourites" page can contain up to 6 favourite pages. A message will indicate that you have reached the maximum number of pages allowed if you try to add an additional page. To add or remove an app from the Favourites list, select or deselect the star that appears on the app icon in the list shown in the "Recent", "Categories" or "All" pages. A pop-up will tell you whether you want to save the app in your favourites or not. The operation 299 MULTIMEDIA can be cancelled by selecting "Cancel" or "X". Recent The "Recent" submenu contains recently used or downloaded apps. The user will see a list of apps arranged in chronological order. In the "Recent", "Categories" and "All" submenus you are prompted by a message to press the star on the App icon to add it to your favourite app list. Categories The "Other categories" submenu contains the list of filtered categories between apps. The following are displayed in order: Media, Comfort, Nav (where provided), Telephone, Vehicle, System and more. The applications in each category are displayed in alphabetical order. All The "All" submenu all available apps and allows the user to search for them in alphabetical order from A to Z or Z to A. WIDGETS On the main page, you can view summary pages of Uconnect™ system functions (called "widgets") from a list of available widgets. To add on the a Widget, press the button 300 display and select the desired Widget from the list. Some Widgets can also be customised by pressing the button next to the title. This will open the customisation screen. The number of Widgets which can be installed per page depends on their size. You can add multiple pages (up to a maximum of five in total) by pressing the "+" button on the display. To switch between pages, simply touch the page briefly and swipe your finger rightwards or leftwards. Pages can be deleted using the "Delete page" function or reordered using the "Reorder pages" function. NOTE The customisation is only active when the car is stationary. If an attempt is made to customise with the car in motion or to resume driving without having completed the procedure, a warning message will appear on the display and the operation will be ended. MOVING THE WIDGETS Select the desired widget and then: Moving the widget: hold the desired widget pressed for a few seconds and then move it to the right or left of the display. Resizing the widget: press the widget resize icon to be resized. View widget content: select the desired widget and then scroll vertically. When reordering the widgets (viewing their thumbnails), it will not be possible to view their contents. SHORTCUTS WIDGETS Shortcuts (which can only be added with the car stationary) enable quick access to contents offered by the system such as, for example: the "Call" function to start a call; the "Media" widgets for starting the radio and playback from Bluetooth®/USB; the "App" widgets for starting the radio, Bluetooth®/USBplayback, opening the comfort, SOS and Uconnect™ and car settings screens. PROFILES By entering the “Profiles” mode you can create an avatar and enter your own customisations. Selecting "All profiles” displays the existing profile. Selecting "Edit profile” allows you to enter or edit customisations in the profile. The profile customisations can be deleted using either "Edit profile” or the "Del. personal data” function in the "Settings" menu. UPDATING THE SYSTEM The Uconnect™ system can be updated remotely via Over The Air upgrade. NOTE The images are given by way of example only. They may differ from those shown below according to the version/market. NOTE Instead of using external Wi-Fi connections, Over The Air software updates use the data connectivity included with the car, at no additional cost to the customer. When a software update is available, a pop-up window will appear on screen informing that a new software version or new features for the Uconnect™ system are available. NOTE The rear-view camera, Uconnect™ system and other driver assistance systems are not available during the update. It is recommended to carry out the update when the car is stationary. Instant update Press the "Update Now" button fig. 268 to update the software immediately when the pop-up window appears on screen. be made mandatory when the car is first started. In case of a mandatory update you can only press the "OK" button on the pop-up and start the update. During the update the radio will show the percentage of the update completed and the time remaining until completion fig. 269. When the update is complete the Uconnect™ system will automatically restart. Scheduled update In case of a mandatory update, press the "Update now" or “Schedule update" button fig. 268. The scheduled update option allows you to define a different update time. Press the arrows / on the screen to set the desired time. 269 268 F0S2074 NOTE The scheduled update option can be used 20 times per update. After the 20th postponement the update will F0S2075 Updates over external Wi-Fi When a software update via Wi-Fi is available, a pop-up window will appear on the screen offering the update instantly or at a later time. NOTE The rear-view camera, Uconnect™ system and other driver assistance systems are not available during the update. It is recommended to carry out the update when the car is stationary. 301 MULTIMEDIA To allow the Uconnect™ system to update its software: Select "Settings" on the screen Select "Wi-Fi" in the settings list Select the correct Wi-Fi router from those shown NOTE If the Wi-Fi router is too far from the car, it will not be shown among the available ones. If prompted, enter the password to access the router and select "OK". To enable software updates: Select “Enable software download over Wi-Fi" on the Wi-Fi settings screen. When a software update is available, a pop-up window will appear on the Uconnect™ system screen to alert you that a new update is available. When asked to connect to a Wi-Fi network, select "Yes". During the update, a second popup screen shows the estimated time remaining and the progress percentage of the update. When the update is finished, press "OK". Instant update Press the "Update Now" button to update the software immediately when the pop-up window appears on screen. Scheduled update Use the scheduled update option to set a deferred update time. Press the 302 arrows / on the screen to set the desired time. NOTE The scheduled update option can be used 20 times per update. After the 20th postponement the update will be made mandatory when the car is first started. In case of a mandatory update you can only press the "OK" button on the pop-up and start the update. During the update the radio will show the percentage of the update completed and the time remaining until completion fig. 269. When the update is complete the Uconnect™ system will automatically restart. Update errors In case of errors during the update, the operation will be interrupted and the following messages will appear: "An error has occurred. The system will revert to the previous software version." "Update failed. An error occurred during the update procedure. Please contact your dealer. Error code: XXXX" Contact a Fiat Dealership in these cases. Uconnect Box updates (where provided) The Uconnect™ system can update the Uconnect Box remotely via Over The Air update. NOTE Instead of using external Wi-Fi connections, Over The Air software updates use the data connectivity included with the car, at no additional cost to the customer. When a software update Uconnect Box is available, a pop-up window will appear on the screen offering the update instantly or at a later time. NOTE The Uconnect Box can only be updated when the car is off (ignition device in OFF position). Instant update Press the "Update Now" button to update the software immediately when the pop-up window appears on screen. The update will take place with the car is off. When the update is complete the Uconnect™ system will automatically restart. Scheduled update Use the scheduled update option to set a deferred update time. Press the / on the screen to set the arrows desired time. During the update the radio will show the percentage of the update completed and the time remaining until completion. When the update is complete the Uconnect™ system will automatically restart. Update errors In case of errors during the update, the operation will be interrupted and the following messages will appear: "An error has occurred. The system will revert to the previous software version." "Update failed. An error occurred during the update procedure. Please contact your dealer. Error code: XXXX" Contact a Fiat Dealership in these cases. CONNECTED SERVICES UCONNECT SERVICES (where provided) 260) Uconnect Services connected services enrich the experience of use of the car by connecting it to the network. The services (where provided) allow you to receive timely assistance in case of need and emergency, to obtain information about the status of your car, its location, control it remotely and to improve the navigation experience (where provided) thanks to real-time updates. You can access the Uconnect Services through the dedicated FIAT app for smartphones or smartwatches, a web portal, or the Uconnect™ system of your car. The availability of services requires a UConnect Services contract. Read more about the Uconnect Services – applicability, availability, compatibility, packages and specifications – on the Fiat website. GENERAL DISCLAIMER Personal data & privacy FCA collects, processes and uses the personal data of the car in accordance with legal requirements. Read more about the general conditions of service and data protection policies on the Fiat official website. The Customer is solely responsible for using the services in the car, even if by other people, and shall inform all users and occupants of the car about the services and the functions and limits of the system. If the SOS emergency service is activated, the call will be automatically routed to the 112 emergency service number or a private FCA Call Centre (depending on market). Operating prerequisites To use some of the Uconnect Services, you need to register on the dedicated portal http://myuconnect.fiat.com/ which can be accessed from the official Fiat website, and activate and login to your devices. Uconnect Services not available in all markets and is subject to limitations depending on Uconnect™ system type, location and duration of the services. The full operation of the Uconnect Services, including the ASSIST call, is subject to mobile network and GPS geolocation coverage, without which the proper provision of services is not guaranteed. Coverage may not be guaranteed in places such as tunnels, garages, multi-storey car parks, mountains. In case of mobile network overload or problems related to the power supply of the car (e.g. low battery), the services may not be available. When using the services, customers shall keep their passwords secret for strictly personal use and not to disclose them to third parties. SERVICES WARNING Some of the services listed below may not be available if the car is left with the motor off for more than 303 MULTIMEDIA 304 20 days. Start the motor to reactivate these services. NOTE The date and time shown on the Uconnect™ system display must match the actual date and time, even after disconnecting the battery. Adjust it from the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system. Any discrepancy between the date and time on the display and the actual date and time may be due to a malfunction in the Connected Services. According on the equipment of the car and of the country, different services may be available for different durations. For further information about your car, go to the personal page on the official Fiat website. Some of the packages made available to the customer are: My Assistant: Customer care and safety alert service, which includes: "ASSIST call" (see "In an emergency” section). "Vehicle Health Report": information on the status and condition of the car, notifying potential maintenance needs to the customer via periodic e-mails. This service is provided on condition that the Customer has previously provided the FCA network with a valid e-mail address. "In-Vehicle Alerts (Basic)": to receive messages and/or alerts regarding recall campaigns or other important messages on the Uconnect™ system display. You can contact FCA Customer Service for further information regarding the messages received. My eCharge: is a service that allows you to find, use and pay for charging at public charging stations and keep track of your charging history. The service also allows you to manage recharges with your private wallbox charging station directly from your smartphone. My Car: vehicle status monitoring service: "Vehicle Information" and "Vehicle Health Report": information and alerts related to battery level, tyre pressure, and odometer. "In-Vehicle Alerts: possibility to receive messages and/or notifications related to the provision of services and reminder messages about the execution of service and/or recall campaigns on Uconnect™ system display. You can contact FCA Customer Service for further information regarding the messages received. My Remote: this can be used to manage remote operations (switching on lights, door lock/unlock, find vehicle, etc.) from the FIAT mobile app and through compatible voice assistants. It is also possible to use the "E-Control" services that allow to manage, remotely, all the functions related to the of the high-voltage battery charging, such as charging activation, charging programming and charge level monitoring. When a high-voltage battery charge session is planned using the Uconnect™ system display of the car, or via the Fiat app, and charging is taking place using devices/charging points which have their own planning solutions, make sure that the programming functions are compatible with those of the car itself, as otherwise charging might not take place. My Navigation: connected navigation service (subject to availability according to version/market). The navigation system is automatically updated by prioritising the maps of the area most frequented by the user. My Wi-Fi: Optional Wi-Fi Hotspot service. This service provides Internet access from the car to all devices with Wi-Fi connection (smartphones, tablets, laptops) (supported technologies: 3G – 4G). This creates a private Wi-Fi internet access point in the car. The function, available only with the ignition device to motor or with the motor running allows the connection of up to eight devices simultaneously, but not direct communication between devices. The quality of the service offered by the integrated Wi-Fi Hotspot depends on the coverage of the mobile operator's network. Users with active data plan with the Wi-Fi Hotspot service can also use the radio-activated voice service on-board the vehicle to perform operations, such as checking the weather or news, playing music, interacting with the navigation system and remotely controlling intelligent devices in their home. NOTE The hotspot name and password can only be changed with the ignition device in motor position and the system in "READY" state (the car is ready to go). You can enrich your Uconnect Services experience by purchasing optional services for which a subscription is required. The services can be subscribed to independently by the customer from the catalogue of services available for the car, directly on the personal page of the official Fiat website. My Theft Assistance: optional service with app and web notifications in case of suspected theft attempts and assistance in case of theft. DEACTIVATION OF GEOLOCATION MODE (only for Uconnect™ 10.25") If you wish to deactivate geolocation mode, simply do so from the Uconnect™ system (see the "Settings" menu of the Uconnect™ system for more details). When geolocation mode is deactivated some of the services on mobile apps and web that use the location of the car will not be available. WARNING The icon at the top of the Uconnect™ display indicates that the geolocation function is active (ON). When geolocation is on, the car position is tracked to enable the functions that require it. When geolocation is off, the car position is only tracked by the navigation, safety, insurance and driver assistance systems (where provided). See the Uconnect™ system "Settings" chapter to deactivate the function. UPDATING THE SYSTEM Uconnect Services and the Uconnect™ system application software are updated remotely in order to provide the customer with newer software versions that include new features or enhancements/enrichments of features already offered. Updates are made at the discretion of FCA. Some system updates will be managed automatically, others will be communicated to the Customer by showing messages on the display of the Uconnect™, allowing the customer to confirm or postpone the update itself. The customer will be notified by the Uconnect™ system if the system is unavailable. To read more about services, features, specifications, availability and any updates please always refer to the content included in the official Fiat website. DEACTIVATING UCONNECT SERVICES If you sell your car on which the Uconnect Services are still active, you will be responsible for logging off your profile from the services on the page on the official Fiat website, by contacting the Customer Care or by going to a Fiat Dealership. You will also be responsible for informing the new owner of any 305 MULTIMEDIA services which have not yet expired associated with a new Uconnect Services account. WARNING 260) Always follow the highway code of the country in which you are driving, and concentrate on the road. Always drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. Only use the Uconnect™ system functions when you are sure that it is safe to do so. The customer is liable for all risks associated with using the functions and applications of the car. Failure to follow these rules may cause serious accidents and/or death. OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS Radio devices The radio equipment supplied with the vehicle complies with Directive 2014/53/EU, UA.RED.TR and the French SAR Decree Law of 15/11/2019. For more information about certifications and open source lists available for in-car components use the following: http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/ 306 Radio frequency devices All radio frequency devices comply with the regulations in force in the countries in which they are sold. For further information go to www.mopar.eu/owner or http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum. NOTES CONTENTS 12V battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . inspecting the charge . . . . . . . replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . A BS (system) 243 243 243 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Active safety systems . . . . . . . . . 100 Adaptive Cruise Control with Follow to Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Adaptive Cruise Control with Stop&Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Adjusting the headlights abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Alternating current (AC) charging at home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 ASSIST call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Automatic dual-zone climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Autonomous Emergency Brake Control (system) . . . . . . . . . . 104 Autonomous Emergency Brake Control system . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Battery ............ Blind Spot Assist (system) Blind Spot Assist system . Bodywork (cleaning and maintenance) . . . . . . ... ... ... ... Bodywork (warranty) . . . . . . . . . . Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boot courtesy light . . . . . . . . . . . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brakes features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Car inactivity ............ Carrying children safely . . . . . . Charge cable emergency unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Charging equipment . . . . . . . . Charging functions . . . . . . . . . Charging mode 4 . . . . . . . . . . Charging modes . . . . . . . . . . Charging procedure from public charging station (AC) . . . . . Chassis marking . . . . . . . . . . Checking levels . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint systems . . . . . . Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . Climate control system . . . . . . Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Co-Driver system with Follow to . . . 104 Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Co-Driver system with Stop&Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 248 Connected Services - Uconnect Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Controls . 66 Summary table of display . 41 buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Cooling system fluid . . . . . . . . . . 259 Cornering lights (light activation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Correct reading of the rim 247 code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Correct reading of the tyre . . . . . . Courtesy lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Cup / can holders . . . . . . . . . . . 178 D ashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . 203 Dead Lock (device) . . . . . . . . . . 182 Demanding use of the car . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Direction indicators (activation) . . . 254 Disabling active safety 240 systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Driving assistance systems . . . . . 258 Driving on slippery roads . . . . . . . Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 DTC (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Dusk sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . eCoasting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 283 240 . 37 262 262 . 37 . 68 . 21 . 37 . 27 236 268 . 37 100 . 76 . 27 104 176 176 100 . 37 206 CONTENTS Electric handle (Soft Touch) . . Electric steering wheel heating Electric windows . . . . . . . . . Electronic Cruise Control . . . . ERM (system) . . . . . . . . . . . ESC (system) . . . . . . . . . . . Extending the boot . . . . . . . . External lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FIAT Link & Drive ........... Controls behind the steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel controls . . . . . . Fix&Go kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fixed glass sunroof . . . . . . . . . . Flashing (activation) . . . . . . . . . . Fog lights / rear fog light . . . . . . . Follow Me Home (device) . . . . . . Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front ceiling light . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses (replacement) . . . . . . . . . . Grab handle Handbrake ............... ........... Hazard warning lights . . . . . Head restraints . . . . . . . . . Headlight alignment corrector Headlights (washing) . . . . . High-voltage battery . . . . . . .... .... .... ... .... .... . 66 Hold 'n' Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 HSA (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 I dentification data 143 body paint identification 100 plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 VIN plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Ignition device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 In case of accident . . . . . . . . . . . 100 100 Occupant protection systems . . . . . . . . . . . Official type approvals . . . . One-Pedal Driving . . . . . . 254 Operating Mode . . . . . . . 254 Operating principle . . . . . . . 24 Paintwork (maintenance) . 216 Park Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ParkView (rear camera) . . . 174 Passenger compartment air . 68 diffusers . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Passive Entry (system) . . . 251 PBA (system) . . . . . . . . . 277 Instrument panel features . . . . . . Intelligent Speed Assist . . . . . . . . 281 Interior fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Interiors (cleaning) . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 ISOFIX child restraint system (installation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 . 37 iTPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring . 37 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 . 37 129 J ump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 . 41 Lane change function . . . . . . . . . . 37 . 32 M ain beam headlights 222 (activation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 . 68 Manual climate control system . . . . 46 140 Motor technical specifications . . . . . . 256 210 Motor compartment . 35 (washing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 . 37 Motor marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 248 . 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 306 207 . 17 . 15 . . . . . 248 . . . . . 165 . . . . . 175 . . . Performance (top speed) . . . Power socket . . . . . . . . . . Power sources that can be used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 . 27 100 274 . 68 . . . . 182 . . . . 116 Quick domestic charging procedure from the wallbox charging station . . . . . . . . . . . 200 R aising the car ......... Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear View Camera . . . . . . . Rear window washer (jets) . . Rear window wiper / washer Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . RED special series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 . 32 175 244 . 42 . 36 . 73 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . Replacing a bulb . . . . . . . . . Replacing an exterior bulb . . . Replacing the windscreen/rear window wiper blades . . . . Rim Protector (tyres) . . . . . . . Rims and wheels . . . . . . . . . Roof rack/ski rack . . . . . . . . Rubber hoses . . . . . . . . . . . SBR system ........... Scheduled servicing . . . . . . Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sentry Key (system) . . . . . . Service Schedule . . . . . . . . Side bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side Distance Warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side/tail lights / dipped beam headlights (activation) . . . Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . Snow tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space-saver wheel . . . . . . . Spark plugs (type) . . . . . . . Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 236 217 217 Steering column lock . . . . . . . Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . Storage compartments . . . . . . Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Supplementary Restraint System . . . 262 (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 T C (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 236 114 . 32 . 26 236 129 129 . . . . 169 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 262 262 . 61 262 256 142 261 The keys . . . . . . . . . . Towing the car . . . . . . Traffic Sign Recognition Transmission . . . . . . . . Transporting animals . . Transporting passengers Tyres (inflation pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Wireless charging system – WCPM (Wireless Charge Pad 35 Module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 68 68 59 . . 129 . . 260 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 254 . 22 234 172 258 176 176 262 Uconnect™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Warning lights on panel . . . . . . . . 84 Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . Window bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windows (cleaning) . . . . . . . . Windscreen washer (jets) . . . . . Windscreen wiper / washer . . . Windscreen/rear window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 246 129 248 244 . 42 . . 240 FCA Italy S.p.A. - MOPAR - Technical Service Operations - Service Library Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italy) Print no. 603.85.432 - 08/2021 - 1st Edition Printed on recycled paper